HomeMy WebLinkAboutJaynes Corporation of California; 2005-10-18; 39271-3 Part 2 of 3D. Riser nipples for all sprinkler heads shall be same size as the riser
opening in the sprinkler body.
2.12 QUICK COUPLING VALVE:
A. Quick coupling valves used in reclaimed water systems shall be
1” nominal size Nelson No. 7645 or Rain Bird No. 44NP. Valve
shall be operated with a special coupler key (acme thread) to
prevent unauthorized use. Locking covers are required and shall
be permanently attached to valve. Covers shall be purple rubber
or vinyl.
B. Quick coupling valves used with Greens Water shall be 1” size,
as noted in legend.
2.13 GATE VALVE:
A. Gate valves shall be as specified in the irrigation legend. It shall
have brass handwheel and stainless steel nut.
2.14 PRESSURE REGULATOR:
A. Pressure regulating valve shall be of bronze or brass construction
with corrosion free internal assemblies. Regulating valve shall
include a union connection and integral strainer screen.
Regulating valve shall be supplied with a spring making the unit
capable or regulating pressures as noted on the irrigation legend.
Unit shall be supplied with pressure gauge.
2.15 AIR AND PRESSURE RELEASE VALVE:
A. Valves shall be as specified in the irrigation legend.
2.16 SPRING CHECK VALVE:
A. Spring check valves shall be maintenance free and constructed of
heavy duty Type 1 PVC with stainless steel and neoprene internal
parts. Valves shall be adjustable from 5 to 40 feet of head and
shall prevent low head drainage quickly and positively after RCV
shut-off. Valves shall have a female IPS threaded inlet and outlet.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE IRRIGATION
028 1 0-1 3
2.17
2.18
2.19
SWING CHECK VALVE:
A. Valves shall be made of superior high strength hi-impact PVC
Type 1 material meeting ASTM requirements. There shall be no
internal metallic parts. It shall require ?4 pound back pressure
required for complete closure. It shall have threaded inlet and
outlet, line size as specified in the irrigation legend.
CONCRETE FOOTINGS:
A. Concrete footings shall be 2,000 P.S.I. concrete at 28 days, 5
sack minimum mix, natural color.
EXTRA EQUIPMENT:
A. Contractor shall provide to the Owner:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Extra sprinkler heads and in amounts equal to 5% of each
type used on the project (minimum of one of each).
Two (2) sets of special tools required for removing,
disassembling, and adjusting each type of sprinkler and
valve on this project.
Two (2) manual valve keys 30” in length.
One (1) quick coupler key with swivel hose ell, to match
each type (non-potable and potable) quick coupling valve
used (where used).
Two (2) valve box opening tools.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE IRRIGATION
028 1 0-1 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .O 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 0
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Locations on drawings are diagrammatic and approximate only
and shall be changed and adjusted as necessary and as directed to
meet existing conditions and obtain complete water coverage.
Locate and stake all work and obtain approval of the Owner’s
representative before any installations. Tree placement takes
precedence over location of irrigation system equipment and
lines. Exact location of cross connection control test stations has
precedence over any other type of installation for the landscape.
Install and extend system as shown on the drawings, and as
necessary to carry out the intent of the Drawings and
Specifications.
Locate existing golf course lines, potable water lines and
equipment, valves and other underground utilities before digging
trenches.
Paving, curbs and shovel cut edges shall be installed or indicated
before installation of sprinkler system laterals, heads, and valve
boxes.
A11 sprinkler heads shall be installed and adjusted to keep all
water and spray off walls, walks, paving, golf course and other
structures at all times.
The Contractor shall apply irrigation water as often and in
suficient amounts, as conditions may require, to germinate and
establish the seed and keep the container plants and sod healthy
and growing. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages
caused by its operations. Connections shall be made at
approximately the locations shown on the drawings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for unapproved changes.
Permission to shut off any existing in-use water lines must be
obtained 48 hours in advance, as to the date, time and exact
length of time of each shut-off. The Contractor shalI demonstrate
that the entire irrigation system is under full automatic operation
for a period of seven days prior to any planting.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE IRRIGATION
0281 0-1 5
3.02 INSTALLATION OF IRRIGATION SYSTEM:
A. Excavation and backfilling of Trenches:
1. Excavate trenches, prepare subgrade, and backfill to line
and grade with sufficient room for pipe fittings, testing and
inspecting operations. Do not backfill until the pipe system
has been subjected to a hydrostatic test as specified. Do not
cover any installed control wiring until it has been visually
observed by the Owner's representative.
2. Soil backfill within 3" of piping shall be free of all rocks
over 1 " diameter, debris, and litter prior to use as backfill.
3. Deposit topsoil on one side of trench and subsoil on the
opposite side, then install irrigation lines and test each
section.
4. Pipe shall be snaked from side-to-side of trench bottom to
allow for expansion and contraction.
5. Center load pipe at 10' intervals with small amount of
backfill to prevent arching and slipping under pressure.
Leave joints exposed for site observation during testing.
B. Repair any leaks and replace all defective pipe or fittings until lines
meet test requirements. Do not cover any lines until they have
been checked and approved for tightness, quality .of workmanship
and materials.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE:
A. PLASTIC PIPE CARE:
1. Use care in handling, loading, and storing to avoid damage.
Store the pipe and fittings under cover and protect from
sunlight before using. Transport in a vehicle with a bed
long enough to allow the length of pipe to lay flat, so as not
to be subjected to undue bending or concentrated external
load at any point. Any pipe that has been dented or
damaged will not be accepted.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE I R R I GAT IO N
028 10-1 6
B. SOLVENT WELD JOINING:
1. Prior to installation of any solvent weld of lateral piping,
the Contractor will engage the services of factory
representatives of the manufacturer of plastic pipe, plastic
fittings, and solvent, to conduct a seminar in which all
employees involved in the installation of these items, will
be fully informed of the proper method of installation.
‘ 2. Verification of this seminar and its participants shall be
forwarded to the Owner’s representative prior to
installation of any of the above mentioned material.
3. No water shall be permitted in the pipe until a period of at
least 24 hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and
curing.
C. LATERAL PIPE INSTALLATION - TRENCH:
1. PVC pipe shall be installed by trenching, laying pipe, backfilling and compacting.
2. Pipe installed by trenching shall be installed as follows:
a. Trench depth to be a minimum of 12” from the final
finish surface to the top of the pipe. The bottom of
the trench shall be free of rocks, clods, and other
sharp edged objects.
b. Lower in open trench, after being assembled on the
surface. Provide a firm uniform bearing for the
entire length of each pipe line to prevent uneven
settlement.
c. Installation of pipe shall be installed in accordance
with ASAE standard: ASAE 376.
d. 90% compaction will be required on all backfill
material in landscape, 95% under proposed paving.
e. Lines shall be flushed thoroughly prior to
installation of sprinkler heads.
D. MAINLINE PIPING INSTALLATION:
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE I RR IG AT1 ON
028 1 0-1 7
1. Installation of pipe shall be in accordance with ASAE
standard: ASAE S376.
2. Concrete thrust blocking shall be installed at all tees,
elbows, gate valves, and reducers. Size, location and
installation of thrust blocks shall be in accordance with
ASAE standard: ASAE S376.
3. Connection of lateral lines to mainlines (where occurs)
shall be through use of tapped coupling with same size tap
as lateral isolation valve. Tapped couplings shall be cast
iron, ductile iron, or AC heavy duty.
4. Mainlines shall be installed by trenching.
5. Mainline trench depth shall provide a minimum of 18” final
cover over the pipe. The trench bottom shall be free of
rocks, clods and other sharp objects.
6. Backfill material shall be placed in no less then three (3)
layers compacted to 85%, in landscape, and compacted to
95% under proposed hardscape.
7. After each section of mainline has been installed and
backfilled, it shall be pressure tested. Before testing, all air
shall be expelled from the line. Next, all gate valves shall
be tightly closed and the line shall be pumped up to 125 PSI
at its lowest point. The test pressure shall be maintained
for a period satisfactory to Owner’s representative, tow (2)
hours minimum.
E. SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR INSTALLATION OF ALL PIPES:
1. No substitutions of pipe materials will be allowed without
prior approval of the City of Carlsbad Municipal Water
District.
2. All on site pipes shall have warning tape per Carlsbad
Municipal Water District Rules and Regulations. .
3. All irrigation pipes shall be stenciled with the warning,”
NO POTABLE OR RECYCLED WATER’, Color-
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE I RRlGATl ON
028 1 0-1 8
coded (Purple), and laid with warning tape and stenciling
oriented toward the top of the trench per the Carlsbad
Municipal Water District Rules and Regulations.
4. When potable water lines and recycled water lines, cross
the recycled line shall be installed within a protective
sleeve. The sleeve shall extend 10 feet from each side,
from the center line of potable line for a total of 20’.
5. A 10’ horizontal separation between potable water and
recycled water mains must be maintained at all times. The
potable lines must be installed above the recycled line.
6. A minimum of 12” of vertical separation between utilities
must be maintained at all times.
F. TESTING OF PIPING:
1. After the installation of each PVC sprinkler line, and
installation of swing joints, the entire system shall be tested
and checked for leaks. Owner’s representative and
Contractor shall accomplish this for each area.
G. SLEEVES:
1. All pipe(s) and wire(s) below paved surfaces or footings
shall be sleeved in separate PVC SCH 40 sleeves. Sleeves
below paved surfaces or footings shall be installed with a
minimum 24 inch clearance below underside or pavement,
and extend a minimum of 6 inches past both edges of
pavindfooting.
a. Before paving begins, provide sleeves under
sidewalks, driveways, curbs and elsewhere as
specified on drawings and as required to install
irrigation system.
b. Immediately following installation, cap both ends of
sleeve with dry fitted pipe cap, or several layers of
duct tape.
c. RepIace and re-compact fill around sleeves.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE IRRIGATION
028 1 0-1 9
2.
d. Provide visible and identifiable markers where
sleeve ends are concealed.
Generally, sleeving required under paving shall be installed
prior to pavement installation. Sleeves required below
existing paving shall be installed by jacking, boring or
hydraulic driving. Where any cutting or breaking of
sidewalks, concrete work and/or asphalt is necessary, it
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor in kind to
a condition equal to or greater than that existing before
removal. Permission to cut or break sidewalks, concrete
and/or asphalt shall be obtained from the Owner’s
representative prior to start of construction. Where piping
is shown under paved areas but running parallel and
adjacent to planted areas, the intent of the drawings is to
install the piping in the planted areas.
a. Trench settlement
1. If trenches settle due to incomplete
compaction during the construction period,
it is the Contractor’s responsibility to refill
all settlement with approved material.
2. If major settlement due to improper
compaction has occurred within one year
from completion date, it is the Contractor’s
responsibility to make all adjustments in
pipe, sprinkler heads, topsoil plantings, seed
or paving, to return all areas to finish grade.
This work will be completed under the
original contract with now extra cost to the
Owner.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE I R R lG AT1 0 N
028 1 0-20
H. INSTALLATION OF TRENCH MARKERS:
1. Warning tape shall be installed directly on top of the pipe
longitudinally and shall be centered. The warning tape
shall be installed continuously for the entire length of the
pipe and shall be fastened to each pipe length by plastic
tape banded around the pipe with fasteners no more than 5
feet apart. Taping attached to the sections of pipe before
laying in the trench shall have flaps sufficient for
continuous coverage. All risers between the mainline and
control valves shall be installed with warning tape. A
second warning tape running continuously above piping to
be installed 12’’ above reclaimed water line.
3.04 . INSTALLATION OF BRASS PIPE:
A. Cut brass piping by power hacksaw, circular cutting machine using
an abrasive wheel, or hand hacksaw. No piping shall be cut with
metallic wheel cutter of any description. Ream and remove rough
edges of burrs so smooth and unobstructed flow is obtained.
B. Carefully and smoothly place thread lubricant on male thread only.
Tighten screwed joints with tongs or wrenches. Caulking is not
permitted.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF COPPER PIPE:
A. Install copper pipe as shown in the detail drawings.
.~ 3.06 INSTALLATION OF REMOTE CONTROL WIRING AND
CONNECTIONS:
A. Contractor shall obtain acceptance from Owner’s representative
before installing any wire.
B. Contractor shall install wire from reel, by hand, each set of two
conductor wire shalI be carefully Iaid in ditch and protected fiom
all damage.
C. Wires shall be taped every ten (10) feet and laid to one side of
ditch as indicated on drawings.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE I RR IG AT1 ON
0281 0-21
D. Each set of wires shall be checked for resistance and continuity as
soon as it is completed and installed at termination point at
controller, and/or connection point.
E. Splices of wire shall be done only in a valve box at a valve
location, otherwise a valve box shall be furnished for all points of
splice.
F. Minimum depth for all 24 volt wire shall be 14”.
G. Wire shall not be pulled through the ground.
H. Wire connections to remote control electric valves and splices of
wire in the field, if allowed by the Owner’s representative, shall be
made in the following manner using 3-M DBY connectors and
cement:
1.
2.
Strip ends of wires approximately %”.
Twist wires together and mechanically bond together using
electrical wire nut.
3. Open connector and insert wires to bottom of connector.
4. Close attached lid and snap into place. It is important that
the joint be absolutely waterproof so that there is no chance
for leakage of water and corrosion build-up on the joint.
I. Control wires under paving shall be installed in minimum 2” PVC
SCH 40 sleeves (white in color) at depths as specified for control
wires; keep separate from water line sleeves.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF VALVE BOXES:
A. Install valve boxes as shown in the detail drawings. Install no
more than one valve per box. Heat brand 2” high abbreviated
description of contents (i.e., “PB” for pull box) on top of valve box
lid, readable from pavement. Remote control valve boxes shall
indicate controller and station number.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF REMOTE CONTROL VALVES:
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE IRRIGATION
028 1 0-22
A. All recycled water sprinkler control valves shall be tagged with
identification tags.
1. Tags shall be weatherproof plastic 3”x4” purple in color
with the words:
“WARNING, RECYCLED WATER, DO NOT
DRINK” imprinted on one side and “AVISO-AGUA
IMPURA-NO TOMAR” on the other side. Imprinting
shall be permanent and black in color. Use tag as
manufactured by T. Christy Enterprises or approved equal.
2. One tag shall be attached to each valve as follows:
a.
or
b.
C.
Attach to valve stem directly or with plastic tie wrap
Attach to solenoid wire directly or with plastic tie
or
Attach to valve cover with existing valve cover bolt
3. Where noted on plans, install pressure regulator with gauge
in separate valve box ups.tream of and adjacent to remote
control valve/ valves.
B. All greens water control valves shall be tagged with yellow Christy
valve tags.
3.09 INSTALLATION OF QUICK COUPLING VALVES:
A. Quick coupling valve (Recycled Water)
1. Recycled water quick coupling valves shall be of a type
designed for the use on recycled water distribution systems
(Spikes not interchangeable with potable water quick
coupling spikes) per Carlsbad Municipal Water District
Rules and Regulations.
2. Quick coupling valves use in recycled water systems shall
conform to the following:
a. Recycled water quick coupling valves used in
recycled water systems shall have ACME type
threads (Spikes not interchangeable with potable
water quick coupler spikes) and purple colored
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE I RR I GAT ION
028 1 0-23
locking covers permanently attached to the valve.
b. Quick coupling valves shall be Nelson No. 7645,
Hunter No. HV-1 OOA-RL-NP or Approved Equal.
3. Installation location for each quick coupler shall be
determined by the Owner or Owner’s representative prior to
beginning installation.
B. Quick coupling valve (Greens Water)
1. The quick coupling valves, where shown on the plans shall
be as called out on the plans.
2. Installation location for each quick coupler shall be
standardized at all picnic areas and any other areas as
determined by Owner. The decision of this standard shall
be determined by the Owner or Owner’s representative
before beginning installation.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER HEADS:
A. Install all sprinkler heads as shown in detail drawings.
B. Nozzle size of all heads shall be adjusted to suit any particular
conditions of the area. This shall be done after the system has been
thoroughly tested, immediately after written notification by the
Landscape Architect to do so.
C. The Contractor shall flush and adjust all irrigation heads and
valves for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto
unintended areas, golf course, paths, walks, roadways, buildings,
walls and other structures. Install reclaimed water identification as
required to all heads using reclaimed water.
3.1 1 INSTALLATION OF GATE VALVES:
A. Install per detail.
B. Gate valve shall be equipped with brass handwheel, and stainless
steel nut.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE I RRl GAT1 ON
028 1 0-24
3.12 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE REGULATORSN-STRAINERS:
A. Install in jumbo box separate from remote control valve or any
other valve, and so that there is adequate room for adjustment and
for viewing gauge. Set regulator pressure at pressure optimum for
equipment downstream. Ensure regulator is factory set at pressure
safe for equipment operation prior to loading entire system. Install
Y-strainer such that maintenance access is easily obtainable.
3.13 INSTALLATION OF AIR AND PRESSURE RELEASE VALVES:
A. Install per detail.
3.14 INSTALLATION OF SPRING-CHECK VALVES:
A. Install spring-check valves as shown in detail drawings.
3.1 5 INSTALLATION OF SWING-CHECK VALVES:
A. Install swing-check valves as detailed.
3.16 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE FOOTINGS:
A. Footings shall be placed on 90% minimum compacted or
undisturbed subgrade. Construct to shapes specified and parallel to
walkways. Tool finish exposed surface.
3.17 FLUSHING OF SYSTEMS:
A. After piping and risers are in place, but prior to the installation of
the sprinkler heads, a full head of water shall be used to flush out
the system. After system is thoroughly flushed, install heads.
3.1 8 CLEAN-UP
A. As project progresses, Contractor shall maintain all areas in a neat
manner and remove unsightly debris as necessary. After
completion of project, Contractor shall remove all debris and
containers used in accomplishing work. Contractor shall sweep
and clean all sidewalks, asphalt, and concrete areas, and clean all
vertical surfaces affected by hisher work.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE IRRIGATION
028 1 0-25
SECTION 02870 - SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL 0
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. The work includes furnishing and installing site furnishings as
indicated and as specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Section
01300.
B. Shop Drawings and Descriptive Data: Submit shop drawings
and descriptive data showing dimensions and cross-section
location, size, and type of reinforcement, including reinforcement
necessary for safe handling and placement of units.
C. Samples: Submit samples of surface finish, 12 inches by 12
inches by approximately 1-112 inches in thickness to illustrate
quality, color, and texture of exposed-to-view precast concrete
surface finishes. 0 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Handle and store units in a manner that will guard against
cracking, chipping, warping, soiling, staining or other physical
damage, discoloration, or distortion.
/
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Cement: Type I or 111 conforming to ASTM C 150-85. All
cement for exposed concrete surfaces shall be of the same type
and from the same manufacturing plant.
B. Water: Water for mixing and curing shall be fiee of acid, alkali,
oil or organic material that may interfere with setting of the
cement.
C. Aggregates: Clean, hard, strong, durable material, fiee of
injurious amounts of organic impurities.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE SITE FURNISHINGS
02870-1
D. Admixtures: Use of admixtures is at the Contractor's option.
1.
2.
Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260.
Retarding and Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM c 494.
3. POZZOlanS: ASTM C 618-85
4. Pigments: Nonfading, resistant to lime and other
a1 kalies.
E. Reinforcement: All reinforcing steel, except No. 2 bars shall be
deformed.
1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615-84a, Grade 40 or
2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185-85.
60.
2.02 CONCRETE MIXES:
A. Proportions: Proportion concrete design mix in accordance with
ACI 211.1 or ACI 318, Chapter 4 as required to obtain a
compressive strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days
when tested on a 6" by 12' cylinder in accordance with ASTM C
39-84. Air content of the concrete shall be betweeq 4 percent
and 6 percent. Mixture shall consist of sand and stone aggregates
in a ration of 1 to 4 by weight; white portland cement or a.blend
of white and standard portland cement, coloring agent and water
as required to achieve the color selected by the Engineer.
B. Mixing: Materials shall be mixed in proportions controlled by
weight in a semi-automatic batch plant. Mixing shall be done in
a turbine type mixer which will distribute coarse and fine
aggregates evenly throughout the mix. Water content shall be
held to a minimum necessary for placement in order to prevent
shrinkage cracking. Take all precautions necessary to ensure
uniform color throughout the mix.
2.03 FABRICATION:
A. Casting Molds: Precast concrete fwnishings shall be cast in
polished molds of sufficient rigidity to assure products with
dimensional tolerances equal to or better than those specified in
PCI MNL 116. Concrete shall be vibrated in place in closed
molds. Molds shall have characteristics to achieve a smooth
surface.
B. Reinforcement: Provide all reinforcing necessary to structurally
support the anticipated loads on the units and all stresses
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE SITE FURNISHINGS
02 8 70-2
imposed by transportation and handling.
C. Finishes: Finish of formed surfaces shall be smooth and free of
all irregularities. Surfaces shall have a medium sandblast finish.
Texture of surfaces shall be uniform after etching. Color choices
shall be slate grey, charcoal and rust upon approval by owner for
the following furnishings: planters, trash/ash urns, bollards and
benches.
2.04 FURNITURE ITEMS:
A. Planters, Trash/Ash Receptacles: Fabricate precast concrete pots,
trash/ash receptacles to the shapes and dimensions indicated
within a tolerance of 114 inch except waste container tops shall
be within a tolerance of 1/16 inch. Provide each trash receptacle
with a 20 gallon capacity galvanized steel liner and a spun
aluminum lid. Trash and ash receptacles shall be as labeled on
the drawings.
B. Bollards: Fabricate concrete bollai-ds to the shapes and
dimensions indicated within a tolerance of 114 inch. Bollards
shall be furnished complete with attached base plate and pipe and
base plate for embedment in concrete. Bollards shall be as
labeled on the drawings.
C. Handicap Panel: Fabricate precast concrete Handicap Panel to
the shapes and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of 114
inch. Panels shall be as labeled on the drawings.
D. Benches: Shall be as indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install precast concrete furnishings in accordance with approved
shop drawings and descriptive data. Do not install furnishings
until the concrete has attained compressive strength of 4,000 PSI.
Unload and place units as recommended by the manufacturer.
Unload and handle the units without exposing them to stresses or
loads for which they were not designed. Exact location of units
shall be as directed by the Architect. Connect furnishings to
supporting pads by means of the connection devices indicated on
the approved shop drawings.
*END OF SECTION*
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE SITE FURNISHINGS
02870-3
SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A. The General Conditions, and Special Conditions are a part of
this section and the contract for this work and apply to this
section as fully as if'repeated herein.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The work includes all services, labor, materials, transportation and equipment necessary to perform the work
as shown and noted on the drawings and specified.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Contractor shall submit list (5 copies) of soil amendments, fertilizers, plant materials, etc. with quantities of each.
1.04 GUARANTEES AND REPLACEMENTS:
A. Shrubs, vines and groundcovers shall be guaranteed to
remain healthy and vigorously growing for 90 days, from
date of final acceptance of project.
All trees that have been supplied and installed under this
Contract shall be guaranteed to live in a healthy condition for
a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of
project.
B.
C. All plants found to be dead and all plants not in a vigorous
condition noted within the Guarantee Period shall be
replaced within (14) calendar days.
D. Plants used for replacement shall be the same kind and size
as specified in the plant list. They shall be furnished, planted
and fertilized as originally specified.
1.05 SITE OBSERVATION VISITS:
A. Site observation visits herein specified shall be made by the
Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall request site observation one week in advance of the time observation is required.
B. Site observation will be required for the following parts of the work:
1. Incorporation of soil conditioner and fertilizer into the soi I.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LAN DS CAP I N G
02900-1
2.
3. Approval of plant materials.
Upon the completion of grading prior to planting.
I
4. When trees and shrubs are spotted in place for planting,
but before planting holes are excavated.
5. When planting, and all other indicated or specified
work, except the Maintenance Period, has been
completed. Acceptance and written approval shal I
establish beginning of the Maintenance Period.
6. Final site observation visit. at the completion of the sixty
(60) day Maintenance Period. This site observation visit shall establish the beginning date for the guarantee
period of plant material.
C. Acceptance: Upon completion of the final site observation
visit and the work of this section, the Contractor will be
notified in writing (1) whether the work is acceptable; (2) of
any requirements necessary for completion and acceptance.
D. This Contractor or his authorized representative shall be on
the site at the time of each site observation visit by the
Landscape Architect.
1.06 MAINTENANCE:
A. The Maintenance Period begins on the first day after all landscape and irrigation work on this project is complete, checked, accepted and written approval from the Landscape Architect is given to begin the Maintenance Period, and shall continue thereafter for no less than sixty (60) continuous calendar days.
B. The Contractor or his authorized representative shall be on
the site at the time of each site observation visit by the
Landscape Architect.
C. The Contractor shall continuously maintain all involved areas of the Contract during the progress of the work and during
the Maintenance Period until the Final Acceptance of the
work.
D. Regular planting maintenance operations shall begin immediately after each plant is planted. Plants shall be kept in a healthy, growing condition and in a visually pleasing
appearance by watering, pruning, trimming, edging, fertilizing, restaking, pest and disease controlling, spraying, weeding, cleaning-up and any other necessary operation of maintenance. Landscape areas shall be kept free of weeds,
noxious grass, and all other undesired vegetative growth and
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LAN DSCA P I NG
02900-2
debris.
condition shall be replaced immediately.
All plants found to be dead or in an impaired
E. The Contract completion date of the Contract Maintenance
Period will be extended, when in the opinion of the
Landscape Architect, improper maintenance and/or possible
poor or unhealthy condition of planted material are evident
at the termination of the scheduled Maintenance Period. The
Contractor shall be responsible for additional maintenance of
the work at no change in Contract price until all of the work
is completed and acceptable.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining adequate
protection of the areas. Damaged areas shall be repaired
immediately at the Contractor's expense.
1.07 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The term "Planting Area" shall mean all areas to be planted with trees, shrubs, groundcovers.
B. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practice.
C. All rock and other growth or debris accumulated during the duration of the project shall be removed from the site.
D. Upon completion of all grading operations, soil samples (3 locations min.) shall be taken by the contractor and analyzed by a soil laboratory. The results of these tests are to be
reviewed by the Landscape Architect for any required
modifications to specified soil preparation.
LANDSCAPING
02900-3
E. Prior to excavation for planting or placing of plant materials,
locate all underground utility lines still in use and take
proper precautions to avoid damage to such improvements.
In the event of a conflict between such lines and plant locations, notify the Landscape Architect who shall arrange
for the re-location of one or the other. The Contractor
assumes all responsibility for making any and all repairs for
damages resulting from work as herein specified.
Grading and soil preparation work shall be performed only , during the period when beneficial and optimum results may
be obtained. If the moisture content of the soil should reach
such a level that working it would destroy soil structure, spreading and grading operations shall be suspended until
the moisture content is increased or reduced to acceptable
levels and the desired results are likely to be obtained.
G. All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding
with any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions and
immediately inform the Landscape Architect of any discrepancy between the drawings and/or specifications and actual conditions.
F.
H. Quantities for plant materials are shown for convenience
only, and not guaranteed. Check and verify count and
supply sufficient number to fulfill intent of drawings. Certify
any clarifications with the Landscape Architect.
1. Adequately stake, barricade, and protect al I irrigation
equipment, manholes, utility lines, and other existing
property during all phases of the soil amending planting
and grading operations.
1.08 TREE SELECTION:
A. Upon award of the project the Contractor shall inform the
Landscape Architect of the nursery source of all trees. The
Landscape Architect will check the trees at the project for approval. If the trees are rejected, the Contractor shall be
responsible for locating other sources of trees. The contract
price for the project shall not change due to rejected trees.
The Contractor shall make all necessary financial
arrangements or purchase orders to reserve the trees
specifically for this project.
8. Shrub Samples: Typical sam.ples, three each of all varieties
and sizes (5 gallon and under) shrubs of all plant materials shall be submitted for approval at the site a minimum of three days prior to planting operations. Approved samples shall remain on the
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LANDSCAPING
02900-4
site and shall be maintained by the Contractor as standards of
comparison for plant materials to be furnished. Samples will be incorporated into the work.
1.09 REJECTION AND SUBSTITUTION:
A. All plants not conforming to the requirements herein
specified and on the drawings shall be considered defective, and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as
rejected and be immediately removed from the site of the
work and replaced with acceptable plant materials: The
plant materials shall meet all applicable inspections required by law. All plants shall be of the species, variety, size, age, flower color and condition as specified herein and/or as
indicated on the drawings. Under no condition will there be
any substitution of plant species, variety, or reduced sizes for
those listed on the accompanying drawings, except with the
express written consent of the Landscape Architect.
All utilities (water and electricity) used during the installation
of the landscaping and irrigation systems for this project shall be paid for by the Owner.
6.
1.10 INVOICING OF PLANT MATERIALS AND SOIL PREPARATION
CONFORMANCE TEST:
A. A sample of the soil amendments shall be delivered to the
Landscape Architect within thirty-five (35) days after
recording of the Contract for review and comment (ap prova I/d isapproval).
6. Upon delivery of materials and/or completion of all soil
conditioning and grading, but prior to initiating planting
operations, the Landscape Architect, with the signed copies of required certificates, trip slips, and invoices for soil
preparation materials, shall invoice such material, comparing the total quantities of each material furnished against the
total area to each operation. If the minimum rates of application have not been met, the Architect will require the
distribution of additional quantities of these materials to
fulfill the minimum application requirements specified.
C. After installation of plant materials, but prior to the premaintenance site observation visit, the Landscape Architect, with the heretofore specified signed copies of the required certifications, trip slips, and invoices for the plant materials and related items, shall invoice such material, comparing the total
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LANDSCAPING
02 900-5
area and/or the amounts specified. If the minimum amounts
have not been furnished, the Landscape Architect will
require the installation of additional materials to fulfill the
minimum requirements specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL AMENDMENT AND FERTILIZER:
A. Soil conditioner - Shall be "WiI-Gro Life" by Wilbur Ellis or
approved equivalent by the Landscape Architect.
B. Iron Sulphate - 20% Iron by volume. WARNING: Fertilizers containing chelated iron will stain concrete surfaces. The
Contractor shall take care not to stain concrete and shall be
responsible for removing all iron stains from concrete, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
C. Pre-plant Fertilizer (1-1 0-1 0) "Best" or approved equal.
D. Post-plant Fertilizer (14-7-3) granular fertilizer to be applied
to groundcover areas "Best" or approved equal.
E. Gypsum - Commercially packaged, free flowing gypsum
containing not less than 95% by volume of calcium sulphate
as active ingredient.
F. Wetting Agent - NAIAD or equal.
G. Soil-moist - An acrylic co-polymers, "Terra Sorbi"or
approved equivalent by the Landscape Architect.
H. Superthrive: concentrated vitamin B-1.
2.02 PLANTING BACKFILL:
A. Planting backfill shall be a thoroughly blended mixture of
excavated soil from the planting pits and soil amendments at
the following mixture:
Soil Conditioner 5 0 '/o
On Site Soil 5 0 '/o Iron Sulphate 2 I bs./cu .yd. Pre-plant Fertilizer 3 Ibs./cu.yd. Gypsum 4 Ibs./cu.yd. NAIAD 1 oz./cu.yd.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LANDSCAPING
02900-6
Soil Moist 1 Ib./cu.yd.
Su pert h r ive 1 capful
2.03 STAKl N G MATERIALS:
A. Single and Double Staking: Stakes shall be of lodgepole
pine. These shall be straight shafts, shaved and cut clean and
bare of branches and stubs, of uniform thickness with a
minimum diameter of 2 inches, free of loose knots, splits or
bends. Stakes shall be no less than ten (10) feet in length.
2.04 GUYING MATERIALS:
A. ' Guy wires shall be of pliable, zinc-coated steel of No. 12
gauge.
B. Anchors (deadman) for holding guy wires shall be 8" x 8" x 16" concrete blocks. Set 18" below finish grade.
C. Pipe for covering wire, shall be 1/2" dia. by 5' long white
PVC plastic pipes.
D. Tree ties shall be V.I.T. Cinch-Tie or approved equal.
2.05 PLANT MATERIALS:
A. Nomenclature: The scientific and common names of plants
herein specified conform with the approved names given in
"A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants of California",
published by the University of California, College of Agriculture, Publication 4091 (1979). See list of plant
material on drawings.
B. Container stock (1 gal., 5 gal., 15 gal. boxes) shall have
grown in containers for at least six months, but not over two years. No container plants that have cracked or broken balls
of earth, when taken from the container, shall be planted,
except upon special approval. No trees with damaged roots
or broken balls shall be planted.
Pruning shall not be done, prior to delivery, except by
written approval by the Landscape Architect.
C.
D. Inspection of Plant Materials, required by City, County or State authorities, shall be a responsibility of the Contractor, and where necessary he shall secure permits or certifications
prior to delivery of plants to site.
E. Plants shall be subject to approval or rejection, at the project site at any time before or during progress of work, for size, variety, condition, latent defects and injuries. Rejected
plants shall be removed from the project site immediately.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LAN DSCAP I N G
02900-7
F. Substitutions will not be permitted except that if proof is
submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a
proposal will be substituted subject to Landscape Architect's
written -approval.
Quantities shall be furnished as needed to complete work shown on drawings. G.
H. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to check root
condition of any species, particularly those grown from seed,
and if found defective, to reject the plants represented by the
defective sample.
I. Identify plant species or varieties correctly on legible,
weatherproof labels attached securely to the plant material.
There shall be a minimum of one labeled plant for each 25 plants in a lot.)
1.
K.
Groundcover plants shall be healthy vigorous rooted cuttings grown in flats until transplanting.
Lawn sod shall be indicated on the drawings.
2.06 PLANTING TABLETS:
A. Use Agriform (20-10-5) blue chip tablet. Twenty-one (21) gram size for trees and shrubs. Five (5) gram for flat plants
2.07 BARK MULCH:
A. Type 7 mulch ("Gorilla Hair"), shall be a finely ground
redwood product which has been shredded through a one
inch tub grinder. Available from Sequoia Forest Products
(559)591-2000, or approved equal.
2.08 ROOT BARRIER:
A. Root Barrier shall be Model #UB-24-2 as manufactured by:
Deep Root Corporation, 345 Lorton Ave., Ste. 103,
Burlingame, CA 94010. Phone: (800) ILV-ROOT.
2.09 ROCK
A. Boulders shall be 1-1/2' - 3' size "California Gold".
B. Decomposed granite shall be "Autumn Gold". All Rock
Be from Southwest Boulder & Stone. Escondido, CA
(800) 540-1 147 Attn: Erika Treptow. Submit photos for re-
view and apporval.
shall
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LANDSCAPING
02900-8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SO1 L CON DlTlON I NG, FERTl LIZ1 NG AND ROTOTl LLI NG:
A. After the areas have been graded, the following rates of soil
conditioning and amendment materials shall be evenly spread over all planting areas and shall be thoroughly
scarified to an average depth of six (6) inches by rototilling a
minimum of two (2) alternating passes.
1.
2.
Soil Conditioner: 6 cu.yds. per 1,000 sq.ft.
Iron Sulphate: 20 Ibs. per 1,000 sq.ft.
3. Gypsum: 100 Ibs. per 1,000 sq.ft.
4. Soil Moist: 1 Ib. per 1,000 sq.ft.
5. Pre-plant Fertilizer: 30 Ibs. per 1,000 sq.ft.
6. NAIAD: 1 qt. per acre (prior to amending soil)
6. Rate of application is for bidding purposes only. Soil test
may reduce or increase total soil amendment yardage. Adjustment (plus or minus may be necessary.) Contractor shall obtain at least three soil tests of final grade at site and
submit results to Landscape Architect for interpretation and recommendation. The Contractor shall submit a binding unit price for each itemized soil amendment which will be used to determine changes to the contract amount in the event of modifications to rates of applications as specified herein.
The thoroughness and completeness of the rototilling and
incorporation of the soil conditioners/amendments shall be
acceptable to the Landscape Architect.
C.
3.02 DEEP WATERING:
A. After complete installation and testing of the Irrigation
system, all areas shall be deep watered and compacted and
settled by continuous application of irrigation water until the
soil is moist to a minimum depth of 8".
6. Care shall be taken that the rate of application of water does
not cause erosion or sluffing of soils.
All depressions, voids, erosion scars and settled trenches generated by the deep watering shall be filled with conditioned topsoil and brought to finish grade.
C.
3.03 FINISH GRADING: ' CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LANDSCAPING
02900-9
A. Finish grades shall be as indicated on the civil engineer's
drawings and landscape drawings.
B. Finish grades shall be measured as the final water compacted
and settled surface grades and shall be within plus or minus
0.1 foot of the spot elevations and grade lines indicated on
the drawing.
C. Finish grades shall be measured at the top surface of surface
materials.
D. Molding and rounding of the grades shall be provided at all
changes in slope.
All undulations and irregularities in the planting surfaces
resulting from tillage, rototilling and all other operations shall be leveled and floated out before planting operations are
initiated.
E.
F. The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect and
avoid damage to sprinkler heads, irrigation lines, and other
underground utilities during his grading and conditioning
operations.
G. Final finish grades shall insure positive drainage of the site
with all surface drainage away from buildings, walls, and
toward roadways, drains and catch basins.
H. Final grades shall be acceptable to the Landscape Architect
before planting operations will be allowed to begin.
Planting surfaces shall be graded with no less than 1 percent
surface slope for positive drainage.
I.
3 -04 PLAN TI N G :
A. The layout of locations for plants and outlines of
groundcover to be planted shall be approved on the site by
the Landscape Architect, prior to their planting. All such
locations shall be checked for possible interference with
existing underground piping, prior to excavating of holes. If
underground construction or utility lines are encountered in the excavation of planting areas, other. locations for the
planting may be selected by the Landscape Architect.
Damage to existing utilities shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
3.05 PLANTING TREES, SHRUBS AND VINES:
A. Planting holes shall be of size as shown on the drawings.
B. Excavation shall include the stripping and staking of all
acceptable soil encountered within the areas to be excavated
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LANDSCAPING
02900-10
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
for plant pits and planting beds. Protect all areas that are to
be trucked over and upon which soil is to be temporarily
stacked pending its re-use for the fillings of holes, pits and beds.
Excess soil, generated from the planting holes shall be
removed from the site, or distributed thereon with, and only
with, approval of the Landscape Architect.
All used containers shall be removed to the storage area or
from the site.
The plants shall be planted at approved locations with the heretofore specified conditioner and soil planting backfill.
The plants shall be placed in the planting pits on the
undisturbed natural subgrade. After setting the plants, the
remaining backfill material shall be carefully tamped and
settled around each rootball to fill all voids.
Each tree and shrub shall be placed in the center of the hole
and shall be set plumb and held rigidly in position until the
planting backfill has been tamped from around each root ball. Tree drains shall be installed per details.
All plants shall be set at such a level that after settling they bear the same relationshiD to the surrounding finish grade as
they bore to the soil line grade in the container.
Planting tablets shall be placed in each tree or shrub planting
hole at the following rates:
1-21 gram tablet per 1 gallon container.
2-21 gram tablets per 5 gallon container.
4-21 gram tablets per 15 gallon container.
1-21 gram tablet per each 4 inch of box size.
No plant will be accepted if the rootball is broken or
cracked, either before, during or after the process of
instal lation.
All plants shall be thoroughly watered into the full depth of
each plant hole immediately after planting.
All trees shall be staked as detailed with wood stake (or
guyed as indicated on drawings), driven into the ground on
the windward side of the tree (one on opposite side for
double). The stakes shall be driven in plumb and secure.
Special care shall be taken that the driving in of the stake
does not damage the tree roots or root ball. Tree ties shall be
fastened to each tree and stake by looping figure 8's with the
inside diameter of the tie at 2 or 3 times the diameter of the
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE 0 LANDSCAPING
02900-1 1
tree and by tacking the back of the tie to the stake (See
Detailed Drawings).
M. The staking shall be accomplished in such a manner as to
insure the proper and healthy growth and the safety of the plants, property, and the public.
Pruning after planting shall be required on all trees, shrubs
and vines when necessary to provide the specified or
approved standard shapes, form and/or sizes characteristic to each plant. Pruning may include thinning, topping, and/or
cutting and shall be under the direction of the Landscape
Architect. Cuts over 3/4 inch in diameter shall be painted with an approved tree sealant.
N.
3.06 PLANTING G ROUN DCOVERS:
A. Groundcovers shall be planted in the areas indicated on the
drawings. The groundcover plants shall be rooted cuttings
grown in flats, and shall remain in those flats until
transplanting. All groundcover plants shall be planted with soil around roots in staggered rows, evenly spaced at the intervals called out on the drawings.
6.
C. The groundcover plants shall be planted sufficiently deep to
cover all roots and a 5 gram planting tablet shall be placed in
each planting hole and shall be immediately sprinkled after
planting until the entire area is soaked to the full depth of all
holes. Keep 5 gram tablet 1 " away from roots of flat plants.
3.07 SODDING LAWNS
A. General: Sodding shall be performed only during the time of
day and during seasons when satisfactory results can be
expected. Only when authorized in writing by the
Landscape Architect may sodding be done during
unfavorable weather or seasons. With the approval of the
Landscape Architect, the sod may be set in place during
periods of drought, provided the sod bed is thoroughly
watered to a depth of at least 8 inches prior to planting the
sod.
6. Subgrade of Sod: After the preparation of the soil, the greading and the deep watering specified herinbefore, the areas to be sodded shall be raked, floated and rolled to the finish subgrade to receive the sod (1/2 inch below finish
grade) by any standard method acceptable to the Landscape
Architect, with the finish subgrade left smooth and even, free of ridges and depression, reasonably well firmed and moist
to a depth of at least 8 inches.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LANDSCAPING
02900-12
C. Lay of Sod: The sod sahll be laid smoothly, in one directions
only, edge to edge, with closely fitted staggered butt joints.
D. Initial Watering: After laying, but prior to rolling, the sod shall be irrigated lightly with a spray mist within 1 hour after
the sod has been exposed to direct sunlight and/or wind.
E. Compacting: The sod shall immediately be pressed firmly
into contact with the sod bed using a light weight turf roller
or other approved equipment, so as to eliminate all air
pockets, provide a true and evern surface and ensure knitting
eiwthout displacemetn of the sod or deofrmation of the
sureface of the sodded aresas.
F. Filling: Following compaction and when sod area is firm, a
blended screened conditioned topsoil shall be used to fill all
cracks between the strips of sod. Excess soil shall be worked
into the grass with rakes or toher suitable equipment. The
quality of fill soil sahll be such as will not cause smothering
of the grass but will leave the top surface of the sod even.
3.08 POST FERTILIZATION:
A. Post Fertilization for all areas (14-7-3) shall occur 45 days
after planting at a rate of 8 Ibs. per 1,000 sq.ft.
3.09 BARK MULCH:
A. Install 2-1/2" layer of bark mulch to all groundcover planting areas with exception of 2:l slopes or steeper.
3.1 0 ROOT BARRIER:
A. Assemble and install per manufacturer's instructions and detai Is.
3.1 1 CLEAN UP:
A. As project progresses, Contractor shall maintain all areas in a
neat manner and remove unsightly debris as necessary. After completion of project, Contractor shall remove all debris and containers used in accomplishing work. He shall sweep and
clean all sidewalks, asphalt, and concrete areas adjacent to plantings.
** END OF SECTION**
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE I) LANDSCAPING
02900-1 3
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE LAN DSCAPl NG
02900-1 4
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK 0 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A. THE GENERAL CONDITIONS, AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS ARE A PART OF THIS SECTION AND
THE CONTRACT FOR THIS WORK AND APPLY TO THIS WORK AND APPLY TO SECTION AS
FULLY AS IF REPEATED HEREIN.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. THIS SECTION COVERS THE FURNISHING AND INSTALLING AND REMOVING OF FORMS FOR
SPECIFIED.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WORK AS SHOWN AND NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS AND AS
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. FORMS FOR UNEXPOSED CONCRETE: FORM CONCRETE SURFACES WHICH WILL NOT BE
EXPOSED IN THE FINISHED STRUCTURE WITH PLYWOOD, LUMBER, METAL OR OTHER
ACCEPTABLE MATERIAL.
1. LUMBER SHALL BE STANDARD OR BE’ITER GRADE DOUGLAS FIR, IN ACCORDANCE
WITH WCLIB “STANDARD GRADING RULES 1981’ OR WWPA “WESTERN LUMBER
GRADING RULES 80. BOARDS SHALL BE SURFACED ON AT LEAST 2 EDGES AND ONE SIDE FOR A TIGHT FIT.
B. FORMS FOR EXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE: CONSTRUCT FORMWORK FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES wrm PLYWOOD, METAL, METAL-FRAMED PLYWOOD FACED OR
OTHER ACCEPTABLE PANEL-TYPE MATERIALS, TO PROVIDE CONTINUOUS, STRAIGHT, SMOOTH, EXPOSED SURFACES. FURNISH IN LARGEST PARCTICABLE SIZES TO MINIMIZE NUMBER OF JOINTS. PROVIDE FORM MATERIAL WITH SUFFICIENT THICKNESS TO
WITHSTAND PRESSURE OF NEWLY-PLACED CONCRETE WITHOUT BOW OR DEFLECTION.
1. WHERE AN AS CAST SURFACE FINISH I S SHOWN, PLYWOOD SHALL BE HIGH DENSITY
OVERLAY PLYFORM CLASS I EXTERIOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH PS 1-83.
2. WHERE SACKED, RUBBED OR SANDBLASTED SURFACE FINISH IS SHOWN, PLYWOOD
SHALL BE B-B PLYFORM CLASS I EXTERIOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH PS 1-83.
C. FORM TIES AND SPREADERS: STANDARD METAL FORM CLAMP ASSEMBLY, OF TYPE
ACTING AS SPREADERS AND LEAVING NO METAL WITHIN I” OF CONCRETE FACE. MNER
TIE ROD SHALL BE LEFT IN CONCRETE WHEN FORMS ARE REMOVED. WIRE TIES OR WOOD
SPREADERS WILL NOT BE PREMI’ITED.
D. FORM COATING: NON-GRAM RAISING AND NON-STAINING TYPE THAT WILL NOT LEAVE
MATTER ON SURFACE OF CONCRETE OR ADVERSELY AFFECT PROPER BONDING OF SUBSEQUENT APPLICATION OF OTHER MATERIAL APPLIED TO CONCRETE SURFACE.
BE PERMITTED. FORM COATING FOR USE WITH FORM LINERS SHALL BE OF TYPE RECOMMENDED BY FORM LINER MANUFACTURER.
COATINGS CONTAINING MMERAL OILS OR OTHER N0N:DRYING INGREDIENTS WILL NOT
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 DESIGN OF FORMWORK:
A. THE ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION OF ALL FORMWORK, SHORING, AND BRACING
SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY AND UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE CONTRACTOR, AND HE
SHALL BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ENGINEERING, CONSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE, AND SAFETY OF ALL FORMWORK DURING THE ENTIRE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD.
THE FORMWORK SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR THE LOADS AND LATERAL PRESSURES
THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE.
B.
OUTLINED IN PART 3, SECTION 102, OF ACI 347-78, AND LATERAL FORCES AS SPECIFIED BY
3.02 CONSTRUCTION:
A. EARTH FORMS: EARTH FORMS MAY BE USED FOR FOOTING ONLY WHERE THE SOIL IS FIRM
AND STABLE AND THE CONCRETE WILL NOT BE EXPOSED TO VIEW. WHERE EARTH FORMS ARE TO BE USED, EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE CUT NEAT AND ACCURATELY TO SIZE FOR
PLACING OF CONCRETE DIRECTLY AGAINST THE EXCAVATION. CONSTRUCT WOOD EDGE
STRIPS AT EACH SIDE OF TRENCH AT TOP TO SECURE REINFORCING AND PREVENT TRENCH
FROM SLOUGHING. FORM SIDES OF FOOTINGS WHERE EARTH SLOUGHS. EARTH FORMS
SHALL BE TAMPED FIRM AND CLEANED OF ALL DEBRIS AND LOOSE MATERIAL BEFORE
DEPOSITING CONCRETE.
B. WOOD FORMS: CONSTRUCT FORMS OF SOUND MATERIAL TO THE CORRECT SHAPE AND
DIMENSIONS, MORTAR TIGHT, AND OF SUFFICIENT STRENGTH, AND SO BRACED AND TIED
TOGETHER THAT THE MOVEMENT OF MEN, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, OR PLACING AND VIBRATING THE CONCRETE WILL NOT THROW THEM OUT OF EXACT SHAPE UNDER ALL IMPOSED LOADS. THEY SHALL BE SO CONSTRUCTED THAT THEY MAY BE EASILY
REMOVED WITHOUT DAMAGE TO THE CONCRETE. BEFORE CONCRETE IS PLACED IN FORMS, THE HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL POSITION OF THE FORM SHALL BE CAREFULLY
VERIFIED AND ALL INACCURACIES CORRECTED. ALL WEDGING AND BRACING SHALL BE
COMPLETED IN ADVANCE OF PLACING OF CONCRETE.
C. FRAMING BRACING, SUPPORTING MEMBERS, AND CENTERING SHALL BE OF AMPLE SIZE
AND STRENGTH TO SAFELY CARRY, WITHOUT DEFLECTION, ALL DEAD AND LIVE LOADS
TO WHICH FORMS MAY BE SUBJECTED, AND SAHLL BE SPACED SUFFICIENTLY CLOSE TO
PREVENT ANY BULGING OR SAGGING OF FORMS. CONCRETE OUT OF LINE, LEVEL, OR PLUMB WILL BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION OF THE WHOLE WORK AFFECTED.
D. FORM TIES: TIES SHALL BE SUFFICIENT STRENGTH AND USED IN SUFFICIENT QUANTITIES TO PREVENT SPREADING OF THE FORMS. TIES SHALL BE PLACED A TLEAST 1” AWAY FROM
THE FINISHED SURFACE OF THE CONCRETE.
E. ARRANGEMENT: ARRANGE FORMWORK TO kLOW PROPER ERECTION SEQUENCE AND TO PERMIT FORM WITHOUT DAMAGE TO CONCRETE.
F. JOINTS: CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, ISOLATION JOINTS, SHRIKAGE CONTROL JOINTS AND
EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS NEEDED AND AS APPROVED. LOCATION OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, PARTICULARTY THOSE EXPOSED TO VIEW AT WALLS AND
COLUMNS, SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH AND ARE VIEWED IN ADVANCE OF CONCRETE POURING.
G. EMBEDDED PIPING AND ROUGH HARDWARE:
1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL AFFORD EVERY TRADESMAN WHO IS REQUIRED TO
FASTEN HIS WORK TO THAT OF THE CONTRACTOR,,OR WHO IS REQUIRED TO INSET THEREIN ANY PIPING, BOX, BOLT, ANCHOR, INSERT, OR OTHER ROUGH
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CONCRETE FORMWORK
03 100-2
HARDWARE, WITH EVERY FACILITY FOR SETTING THE SAME ACCURATELY IN THE
FORMS.
2. CONDUITS OR PIPES SHALL BE SO LOCATED AS NOT TO REDUCE THE STRENGTH OF
THE CONSTRUCTION AND IN NO CASE SHALL BE PLACED IN ASLAB LESS THAN 3-
112 INCHES IN THICKNESS EXCEPT FOR LOCAL OFF-SETS. NO CONDUIT BURIED IN A
CONCRETE SLAB SHALL HAVE AN OUTSIDE DIAMETER GREATER THAN 30
PERCENT OF THE THICKNESS OF THE SLAB, AND NO CONDUIT SHALL BE PLACED
UNDER SLAB REINFORCING STEEL, EXCEPT FOR SLAB MESH
H. COATING OF FORMS: THOROUGHLY CLEAN FORMS AND COAT WITH SPECIFIED FORM
COATING BEFORE EACH USE. DO NOT REUSE ANY FORM FOR EXPOSED WORK WHICH
CANNOT BE RECONDITIONED TO “LIKE NEW CONDITION. APPLY FORM COATING TO ALL
FORMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICATIONS. APPLY FORM
COATING TO ALL FORMS BEFORE PLACING REINFORCING STEEL.
I. INSPECTION: PRJOR TO PLACING OF CONCRETE, AND AFTER PLACEMENT OF REINFORCING STEEL IN THE FORMS PROVIDE NOTIFICATION SO THAT PROPER INSPECTION CAN BE MADE.
SUCH NOTIFICATION SHALL BE MADE AT LEAST 2 WORKING DAYS IN ADVANCE OF PLACING CONCRETE.
J. REJECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK: ANY MOVEMENT OR BELLYNG OF FORMS DURING
CONSTRUCTION OR VARIATIONS IN EXCESS OF THE TOLERANCES SPECIFIED WILL BE
CONSIDERED JUST CAUSE FOR THE REMOVAL OF SUCH FORMS AND IN ADDITION, THE
CONCRETE WORK SO AFFECTED. RECONSTRUCTION OF FORMS, NEW CONCRETE AND ANY
REQUIRED REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE FURNISHED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE
OWR.
3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS:
A. FORMWORK FOR WALLS AND OTHER PARTS NOT SUPPORTING THE WEIGHT OF THE CONCRETE MAY BE REMOVED AS SOON AS THE CONCRETE HAS HARDENED SUFFICIENTLY
TO RESIST DAMAGE FROM REMOVAL OPERATIONS, BUT NOT SOONER THAN 24 HOURS
AFTER PLACING CONCRETE.
B. WHEN SHORES AND OTHER VERTICAL SUPPORTS ARE SO ARRANGED THAT THE FORM
FACING MATERIAL MAY BE REMOVED WITHOUT LOOSENING OR DISTURBING THE SHORES AND SUPPORTS, THE FACING MATERIAL MAY BE REMOVED AT AN EARLIER AGE AS
SPECIFIED OR PERMITTED. THE SHORES AND SUPPORTS SHALL REMAIN IN PLACE UNTIL
THE CONCRETE HAS REACHED ITS SPECIFIED 28 DAY STRENGTH, UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED OR PERMITTED.
C. WHENEVER THE FORMWORK IS REMOVED DURING THE CURING PERIOD, THE EXPOSED
CONCRETE SHALL BE CURED BY ONE OF THE METHODS SPECIFIED M SECTION 03300.
D. USE SOFTWOOD WEDGES TO RELEASE FORM FACES FROM CONCRETE. DO NOT PRY WITH
METAL TOOL.
E. REMOVE ALL FORMWORK AND RELATED MATERIALS FROM THE SITE.
*END OF SECTION*
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE 0 CONCRETE FORMWORK
03 100-3
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL 0
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A. The General Conditions, and Special Conditions, are a part of
this section and the contract for this work and apply to this work
and apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. This section covers the furnishing and installing of reinforcing
steel for cast-in-place concrete work as shown and noted on the
drawings and as specified.
1.03 CODES:
A. Except as modified by the requirements specified herein and /or
the details on the drawings, concrete reinforcing work shall
conform to the "Uniform Building Code" (UBC), Chapter 26,
"Concrete".
1.04 REFERENCES:
A. The editions of the specifications and standards referenced
herein, published by the following organizations, apply to the
work only to the extent specified by the reference:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
2.
3.
4. American Welding Society (AWS).
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI).
1.05 SUBMITTALS :
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and placement drawings of all
reinforcing for review.
1. Placement drawings shall show the locations and
spacing of reinforcing in the various parts of the
improvements with details as required, all in
accordance with ACI 315-80. Cutting and bending
lists submitted without placement drawings will be
returned without review as incomplete. Placement
drawings shall be compIete so that placement of the
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-1
0
2.
reinforcing may proceed without reference to the
design drawings.
Review shall not act to relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for accuracy of the fabrication details
and placing diagrams. Dimensions and locations
shall be verified prior to the preparation of shop
drawings.
3. No work shall be done except from reviewed
drawings which must be kept at all work locations.
B. Product Data: Mill affidavits, stating the grades and physical and
chemical properties of the reinforcing steel, and conformance
with ASTM Specifications, shall be submitted before delivery of
the steel to the job site.
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Delivery: Delivery reinforcement bundled and tagged to identify
placement and certify testing.
B. Reinforcing steel shall be transported to the site, stored and
covered in a manner which will insure that no damage shall occur
to it from moisture, dirt, grease, or any other cause that might
impair bond to concrete. A sufficient supply of approved
reinforcing steel shall be stored on the site at all times to insure
that there will be no delay of the work. Identification of steel
shall be maintained after bundles are broken.
1.07 COORDINATION:
A. Contractor shall check architectural, structural, mechanical, and
electrical drawings for anchor bolt schedules and locations,
anchors, inserts, conduits, sleeves, and any other items which are
required to be cast in concrete and shall make necessary
provisions as required so that reinforcing steel will not interfere
with the placement of such embedded items.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CONCRETE REIN FORCEMENT
0 3 2 00-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Reinforcing Bars: New, deformed, billet steel bars, conforming
to ASTM A 615-84. Deliver bars new and free from rust and
mill scale in original bundles with mill tags intact.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: New welded steel wire fabric, conforming
to ASTM A 185-79. Gauge and center-to-center spacing shall be
as indicated in drawings.
C. Accessories: Reinforcement accessories, consisting of spacers,
chairs, ties, and similar items shall be provided as required for
spacing, assembling, and supporting reinforcement in place.
Accessories shall be galvanized steel or approved plastic
accessories, conforming to the applicable requirements of the
CRSI Standards hereinbefore specified.
D. Tie Wire: Tie wire for reinforcement shall be #16 gauge or
heavier, where noted or specified, black or galvanized steel wire,
conforming to ASTM A 82-79.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION:
A. Fabrication of steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with the
details shown on the drawings. Where specific details are not
shown or noted, comply with the applicable requirements of
UBC and ACI 3 15-80 hereinbefore specified.
Bars shall be accurately bent, cut, and placed as indicated on the
drawings.
B.
3.02 PLACING:
A. General: Reinforcing steel shall be placed in accordance with the
drawings and the applicable requirements of the "Codes and
Standards" hereinbefore specified. Install reinforcement
accurately and secure against movement, particularly under the
weight of workmen and the placement of concrete.
B. Reinforcing Supports: Bars and welded wire fabric larger than 8
gauge shall be supported on metal chairs or spacers on metal
hangers, accurately placed and securely fastened to steel
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-3
reinforcement in place. Support legs of accessories in forms
without embedding in form surface. Spacing of chairs and
accessories shall conform with CRSI's "Recommended Practice
for Placing Bar Supports". No wood will be permitted inside
forms. Precast concrete cubes may be used to support footing
and slab on ground reinforcing.
C. Placing and Tying: All reinforcing shall be set in place, spaced,
and rigidly and securely tied or wired with #16 gauge steel tie
wire at all splices and at crossing points and intersections in the
position shown, or as directed. Point ends of wire away fiom
forms.
D. Spacing: Bars shall be spaced as indicated on the drawings.
Where not shown, the clear spacing for main longitudinal column
reinforcement shall be less than 1.5 times the nominal bar
diameter, or 1-1/2 inches, or 1-1/3 times the maximum size
aggregate, whichever is less. For all other parallel bars, where
spacing is not shown, the minimum clear spacing shall not be
less than the nominal bar diameter, or one inch, or 1-1/3 times
the maximum size aggregate, whichever is less. The clear
distance limitations above also apply between the bars being
spliced at a contact lap splice and adjacent bars.
E. Splices: Except for temperature bars in slabs and horizontal wall
reinforcing, no splicing will be allowed for reinforcing bars
unless detailed locations are given for these splices on the design
drawings, or approval is given. Stagger lapped splices for
horizontal wall reinforcing and slab temperature bars by the
required lap splice length minimum. Wherever possible, splices
of adjacent bars shall be staggered.
F. Install ladder reinforcing continuously spaced as
splice laps of 54 wire diameters in a grouted
diameters in the mortar bed joints.
G. Welded Wire Fabric: Wire fabric shall be in as
ndicated, with
cell, 75 wire
mg lengths as
practicable and shall be wired at all laps and splices. -Laps shall
be one full spacing of the cross wires plus 2" at splices. Welded
wire fabric shall be supplied in flat sheets.
H. Dowels: Dowels shall be tied securely in place before concrete is
deposited. In the event there are no bars in position to which
dowels may be tied, No. 3 minimum shall be added to provide
proper support and anchorage. Bending of dowels after
placement of concrete will not be permitted unless approval is
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200-4
I.
J.
obtained. Dowels extended for future construction shall be
protected from weather exposure as shown on drawings.
Compliance with Safety law requirements for extended dowel is
required.
Cleaning:
coatings that would impair bond to concrete.
Reinforcement, at time of pour, shall be free of
Welding: Welding of reinforcing steel will not be permitted
except as specifically approved. Welding shall comply with
AWS D1.4-79 using low hydrogen electrodes. Prior to welding,
determine weldability of reinforcing bars by a laboratory
chemical analysis.
3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION:
A. Contractor shall provide notification at least 2 working days
ahead of each concrete pour, and no concrete shall be placed until
all reinforcing steel has been installed by the Contractor and
approved. All reinforcing shall be complete in every way by the
end of the working day prior to concrete placing.
3.04 DEFECTIVE WORK:
A. The following reinforcing steel work will be considered defective
and shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner
1.
2.
3. Bars heated for bending.
4.
Bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings.
Bars injured due to bending or straightening.
Reinforcement not placed in accordance with the
drawings or specifications.
3.05 CLEAN-UP :
A. Remove all excess reinforcing materials and debris from site at
completion of work.
***END OF SECTION* * *
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03 200-5
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A. THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS ARE A PART OF THIS
SECTION AND THE CONTRACT FOR THIS WORK AND APPLY TO THIS WORK AND
APPLY TO THIS SECTION AS FULLY AS IF REPEATED HEREIN.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. THE WORK INCLUDES THE FURNISHING AND INSTALLING OF CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE WORK AS INDICATED AND SPECIFIED HEREIN.
1.03 REFERENCES:
A. EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BY THE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED HEREIN OR AS
INDICATED, WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF THE
FOLLOWING CODES AND STANDARDS:
1. UNIFORM BUILDING CODE, CHAPTER 26, CONCRETE.
2. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE:
ACI 301-81 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS.
ACI 318-77 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE.
3. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM):SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS REFERRED TOHEREIN.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. PRODUCT DATE: SUBMIT MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT DATA WITH APPLICATION
AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPRIETARY MATERIALS AND ITEMS, SUCH AS ADMIXTURES, CURING MATERIALS, JOINT SYSTEMS.
0
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS:
A. PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM C 150-81, TYPE I OR 11. TYPE II CEMENT SHALL MEET THE STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS OF TYPE I CEMENT. USE ONLY ONE BRAND OF CEMENT ON THE PROJECT.
B. NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATE: ASTM C 88-81. PROVIDE AGGREGATE FROM A
SINGLE SOURCE FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE.
1. FINE AGGREGATE: GRADE FROM 114 INCH TO FINE.
2. COURSE AGGREGATE: GRADE FROM 114 INCH TO MAXIMUM SIZESPECIFIED FOR EACH USE.
C. WATER: CLEAN AND POTABLE, FREE OF IMPURITIES DETRIMENTAL TO
CONCRETE.
D. CUR I NG MATERIALS:
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CAST-IN-PLACE
03300-1
1. WATERPROOF PAPER AND POLYETHYLENE FILM: ASTM C
171-69(1980).
2. BURLAP: FEDERAL SPECIFICATION CCC-C-4678.
E. EXPANSION JOINT FILLER: PREMOLDED, OF SIZES AND THICKNESSES
INDICATED, MEETING REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM D 1751-73.
F. EXPANSION JOINT SEALING COMPOUND: COLD-APPLIED POURED LATEX
RUBBER TYPE SEALANT, MEETING REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM D 1850-74 (1979). COLOR TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACE COLOR.
G. CURING COMPOUND: ASTM C 309-81, TYPE l-D, LIQUID MEMBRANE FORMING, COMPATIBLE WITH FINISHES SCHEDULED TO BE APPLIED THERETO.
RES-X: THE BURKE COMPANY
HYDROCIDE CURING COMPOUND: SONNEBORN BUILDING PRODUCTS
H. COLOR-CONDITIONING ADMIXTURES: MEET REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM C 494.
2.02 MIX DESIGNS:
A. OBTAIN ANY PAY FOR DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXERS, INCLUDING
RECOMMENDED AMOUNTS OF WATER TO BE USED IN THE MIXES, FROM A
RECOGNIZED INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY. INCORPORATE CONCRETE
INTO THE IMPROVEMENTS OF THE MINIMUM STRENGTHS SPECIFIED.
2.03 CONCRETE STRENGTHS AND PROPORTIONS:
A. PROVIDE CONCRETE WITH THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS AT 28 DAYS PROPORTIONED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING LIMITS:
MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM LOCATION OF PSI AT SIZE OF SACKS CEMENT MAXIMUM CONCRETE 28 DAYS AGGREGATE PER CU. YD. SLUMPS
DRIVEWAY AND
PARKING LOT
PAVING, FOOTINGS,
WALLS AND SLABS 4000 1 "
WALKS
3000 1"
6.0 4"
5.0 4"
B. THE EXACT PROPORTIONS OF THE MIX, INCLUDING AMOUNTS OF ADMIXTURE (IF ANY) AND WATER, WILL BE DETERMINED BY THE TESTING LABORATORY OR BATCH PLANT BASED ON CEMENT AND AGGREGATE SUBMllTED BY THE CONTRACTOR.
2.04 MIXING:
A. USE READY-MIXED CONCRETE MIXED AND DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM C 94-81, AND U.B.C. STANDARD NO. 26-13. IN THE EVENT CONCRETE IS MIXED AT A CENTRAL BATCHING PLANT, ARRANGE DELIVERY SO INTERVALS BETWEEN BATCHES AREA KEPT AT A MINIMUM, AND IN ANY EVENT NOT MORE THAN 30 MINUTES. DO NOT ADD WATER DURING TRANSIT OR AT THE PROJECT SITE WITHOUT THE ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. PLACE CONCRETE WITHIN 90 MINUTES AFTER CEMENT HAS BEEN MIXED WITH AGGREGATE AND 45 MINUTES AFTER ADDITION OF WATER AND ADMIXTURES.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE:
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CAST-IN-PLACE
03300-2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
NOTIFICATION: NOTIFY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AT LEAST THREE WORKING
DAYS IN ADVANCE OF THE PLACING OF ANY CONCRETE.
SOIL BOTTOMS FOR FOOTINGS AND SLABS SHALL BE APPROVED BEFORE
PLACING CONCRETE.
FORMS: BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE INSPECT FORMS. REMOVE WOOD CHIPS, DIRT OTHER OBJECTIONABLE MATERIALS. REMOVE TEMPORARY BRACING AND
CLEATS, BOX OPENINGS FOR PIPES, OTHER DEVICES, SECURE FORMS IN
CORRECT POSITION AND MAKE TIGHT, SECURE REINFORCEMENT, ANCHORS,
AND EMBEDDED ITEMS IN PLACE. REMOVE SET AND DRY CONCRETE FROM
FORMS OR REINFORCEMENT, CLEAN FORMS AND WASH OFF BEFORE PROCEEDING. REMOVE WATER AND FOREIGN MAlTER FROM FORMS AND EXCAVATIONS.
PRE-SOAK SUBGRADE IN ALL EXPANSIVE SOIL AREAS PRIOR TO POURING
OPERATION AND SPRINKLE SEMIPOROUS SUBGRADES SUFFICIENTLY TO ELIMINATE SUCTION.
HANDLING AND DEPOSITING:
1. COMPLETE CONCRETING, ONCE STARTED, IN A CONTINUOUS OPERATION UNTIL THE SECTION OF APPROVED SIZE AND SHAPE IS COMPLETED.
2. HANDLE AS RAPIDLY AS PRACTICABLE FROM THE MIXER TO PLACE OF FINAL DEPOSIT BY METHODS WHICH PREVENT THE SEPARATION OR LOSS OF INGREDIENTS. DEPOSIT AS NEATLY AS PRACTICABLE, IN ITS FINAL POSITION TO AVOID REHANDLING OR FLOWING.
3. DO NOT DROP CONCRETE FREELY WHERE REINFORCING WILL CAUSE SEGREGATION, NO MORE THAN FOUR FEET. DEPOSIT CONCRETE TO MAINTAIN A PLASTIC SURFACE APPROXIMATELY HORIZONTAL.
4. DO NOT DEPOSIT CONCRETE THAT HAS PARTIALLY HARDENED
IN THE WORK.
VIBRATING AND COMPACTING:
1.
2.
3.02 JOINTS:
A. CONSTRUCTION
CONSOLIDATE AND COMPACT CONCRETE BY SUITABLE MEANS
DURING THE OPERATION OF PLACING AND DEPOSITING, AND
THOROUGHLY WORK AROUND REINFORCEMENT, EMBEDDED
ITEMS, AND IN TO THE CONCERNS OF THE FORMS. SPADE
CONCRETE AGAINST FORMS. USE INTERNAL VIBRATORS, AND
KEEP OUT OF THE CONTACT WITH REINFORCEMENT AND
WOOD FORMS. DO NOT USE VIBRATORS IN A MANNER THAT
FORCES MORTAR BETWEEN INDIVIDUAL FORM MEMBERS.
VIBRATE CLOSE TO THE FORMS BUT DO NOT CONTINUE AT ONE SPOT TO THE EXTENT THAT LARGE AREAS OF GROUT ARE FORMED OR HEAVIER AGGREGATES ARE CAUSED TO SElTLE. TAKE CARE NOT TO DISTURB CONCRETE WHICH HAS ITS INITIAL SET.
JOINTS: PROVIDE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN ALL SLABS.
BEAMS, WALLS, AND OTHER AREAS AT NOT OVER 30 FEET IN ANY DIRECTION
WHERE CONCRETE IS EXPOSED TO THE ELEMENTS. LOCATE JOINTS NOT
INDICATED TO LEAST IMPAIR STRENGTH, APPEARANCE OF THE IMPROVEMENT,
ACCEPTABLE TO THE ARCHITECT.
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CAST-I N-PLACE
03300-3
3.03
3.04
3.05
3.06
1. PROVIDE KEYWAYS AT LEAST 1-1/2 INCHES DEEP IN ALL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN WALLS, SLABS AND BETWEEN WALLS AND FOOTINGS; ACCEPTED BULKHEADS DESIGNED
FOR THIS PURPOSE MAY BE USED FOR SLABS.
2. PLACE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS PERPENDICULAR TO THE MAIN
REINFORCEMENT. CONTINUE REINFORCEMENT ACROSS CONSTRUCTION JOINTS. CLEAN REINFORCEMENT BEFORE NEXT POUR IS MADE.
B. EXPANSION JOINTS IN SLABS-ON-GROUND: PROVIDE PREMOLDED EXPANSION
JOINTS TO FULL DEPTH OF SLABS WHERE INDICATED OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT. INSTALL WITH TOP EDGE 1/2 INCH BELOW THE SURFACE AND
TOOL ADJACENT EDGES TO A 1/8 INCH RADIUS. USE STEEL PINS TO HOLD
MATERIAL IN PLACE DURING PLACING AND FLOATING OF CONCRETE. AFTER A
MINIMUM OF 28 DAYS AFTER SLABS HAVE BEEN PLACED AND FINISHED, FILL
TOPS OF EXPANSION JOINTS WITH SEALER TO 118 INCH BELOW SURFACE OF SLABS. DO NOT PERMIT TRAFFIC OVER SEALED JOINTS UNTIL SEALER IS THOROUGHLY DRY.
TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS:
A. HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS: MAXIMUM PLACING TEMPERATURE OF
CONCRETE, WHEN DEPOSITED, SHALL BE 80 DEGREES F. IF THE WEATHER
CAUSES THE PLACING TEMPERATURE TO EXCEED 80 DEGREES F., COOL THE
MIX BY WETTING AGGREGATE OR OTHER APPROPRIATE METHOD APPROVED BY
THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.
PATCHING:
A. IMMEDIATELY AFTER STRIPPING FORMS, PATCH MINOR DEFECTS, FORM-TIE HOLES, HONELY-COMBED AREAS, BEFORE CONCRETE IS THOROUGHLY DRY. REMOVE LEDGES AND BULGES. REPAIR GRAVEL POCKETS BY CUTTING OUT TO SOLID SURFACE, FROM KEY, AND THOROUGHLY WET BEFORE PLACING PATCHING MORTAR. USE PATCHING MORTAR CONSISTING OF ONE PART CEMENT TO TWO PARTS FINE SAND; COMPACT INTO PLACE AND NEATLY FINISH TO MATCH SURFACE. GRIND OR FILL SURFACES TO PRODUCE LEVEL, TRUE PLANES.
CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES:
A. STEEL TROWEL FINISH: PROVIDE SLABS WITH A MONOLITHIC STEEL TROWEL
SMOOTH, HARD, DENSE, IMPERVIOUS SURFACE, FREE OF DEFECTS. FINISHERS
SHALL WORK FROM KNEE BOARDS LAID FLAT UPON THE SURFACE.
MECHANICAL TROWELING MACHINES MAY BE USED IF THE DESIRED FINISH AND
LEVEL TOLERANCES CAN BE OBTAINED BY THEIR USE.
FINISH. SCREED, WOOD FLOAT, AND STEEL-TROWEL SURFACES. PROVIDE A
B. SLAB LEVELS: FINISH SURFACES TRUE TO 1/8 INCH TO 10 FEET ON A STRAIGHT-
EDGE IN ANY DIRECTION WITH MAXIMUM HIGH AND LOW VARIANCE OCCURRING
IN NOT LESS THAN 20 FEET AND WITH 1/16 INCH MAXIMUM TOLERANCE IN ANY
ONE RUNNING FOOT. TAKE CARE TO FINISH TROWELING AROUND THE EDGES
OF THE SLABS SO FINISH SURFACE EDGES WILL BE AT SAME ELEVATION AS THE
REST OF THE TOP SURFACE OF THE SLAB. USE TEMPORARY SCREEDS SET LEVEL AT THE PROPER ELEVATIONS.
C. MARK-OFF LINES: FORM MARK-OFF LINES WITH CURVED EDGING TOOL, NEAT AND TRUE TO LINE, UNIFORM THROUGHOUT. CONFORM TO MARKINGS INDICATED.
FOR OTHER CONCRETE PAVING FINISHES AND COLORS SEE PLANS. D.
PROTECTION AND CURING:
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CAST-I N-PLACE
03300-4
A. PROTECT CONCRETE FROM INJURIOUS ACTION OF THE ELEMENTS AND DEFACEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS.
B. KEEP CONCRETE IN A THOROUGHLY MOIST CONDITION FROM THE TIME IT IS PLACED UNTIL IT HAS CURED FOR AT LEAST SEVEN DAYS.
C. KEEP FORMS SUFFICIENTLY WET TO PREVENT DRYING OUT OF THE CONCRETE.
D. CAREFULLY PROTECT EXPOSED CONCRETE CORNERS FROM TRAFFIC OR USE
WHICH WILL DAMAGE THEM IN ANY WAY.
E. FOG SPRAY FRESHLY PLACED SLABS CONTINUOUSLY UNTIL FINISHING
OPERATIONS COMMENCE. ALLOW NO SLABS TO BECOME DRY UNTIL CURING
OPERATIONS ARE COMPLETE. CURE SLABS WITH NONSTAINING CURING
PAPER, WET BURLAP, FOG SPRAYS OR CURING COMPOUND. PROTECT FRESH CONCRETE FROM DRYING WIND, RAIN, DAMAGE, OR SOILING. COVER EXPOSED INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR FINISHED SLABS WITH CURING PAPER LAPPED 4 INCH MINIMUM AT JOINTS AND SEALED WITH WATERPROOF ADHESIVE OR MASKING
TAPE.
3.07 CLEAN-UP:
A. DO NOT ALLOW ANY CONCRETE SPILL OR WASTE ON PLANTING AREAS.
B. REMOVE ALL CONCRETE DEBRIS AND SPILL FROM ALL PLANTING AREAS, LEAVING THE AREA CLEAN AND FREE OF ALL NOXIOUS MATERIALS.
"END OF SECTION**"
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE CAST-IN-PLACE
03300-5
SECTION 03350 - SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A. THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS ARE A PART OF THIS SECTION AND
THE CONTRACT FOR THIS WORK AND APPLY TO THIS WORK AND APPLY TO THIS SECTION
AS FULLY AS IF REPEATED HEREIN.
1.02 SUMMARY: -
A. THE WORK INCLUDES THE FURNISHING AND INSTALLING OF ALL SPECIAL CONCRETE
FINISHES AS SHOWN AND NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. PROVIDE 48”X48 SAMPLE PANELS ON THE PROJECT SITE OF EACH TYPE OF PROPOSED
FINISH AND COLOR AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. THE ARCHITECT SHALL REVIEW
AND APPROVE THE SAMPLE PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF SANDBLAST WORK.
8.
SAMPLE PANELS, IF APPROVED, MAY BE LEFT IN PLACE AS PART OF THE COMPLETED CONSTRUCTION.
1.04 PROTECTION:
A.
THE PROJECT.
SAMPLE PANELS SHALL BE APPROVED BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE RESPECTIVE WORK.
SPECIAL FINISHES OF CONCRETE SURFACES SHALL BE PROTECTED UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. FORMS: AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 03100.
B.
C.
REINFORCEMENT: AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 03200
CEMENT, WATER, ADMIXTURES, AND AGGREGATE: AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 03300.
2.02 CONCRETE MIX
A.
B.
C.
MIX CONCRETE I ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C94.
PROVIDE CONCRETE OF THE STRENGTHS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS.
BASE MIX DESIGN A MAXIMUM 3” SLUMP.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.
OPERATIONS.
B.
NOT CAUSE HARDSHIP IN PLACING CONCRETE.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
INSTRUCTIONS.
NOTIFY ARCHITECT MINIMUM OF 24 HOURS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CONCRETING
VERIFY THAT ALL ITEMS TO BE CAST INTO CONCRETE ARE PLACED, HELD SECURELY, AND WILL
APPLY FORM RELEASE AGENT TO FORMWORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER’S
B. INSTALL EMBEDDED ITEMS PRIOR TO PLACING REINFORCING STEEL.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. PLACE AND FINISH CONCRETE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 03300 WHERE APPLICABLE.
3.04 SANDBLAST FINISH
A. CONCRETE SURFACES INDICATED SHALL RECEIVE LIGHT-TO-MEDIUM OR HEAVY
ABRASIVEBLASTED FINISH AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. TEXTURE OF CONCRETE SURFACES SHALL BE
UNIFORM AFTER BLASTING. THE EXACT DEGREE OF ABRASIVE BLASTING SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE
ARCHITECT AT THE TIME WHEN THE JOB-SITE SAMPLE RECEIVES THE ABRASIVE BLASTING.
B.
SAME WORK CREW TO MAINTAIN CONTINUITY TO FINISH ON EACH SURFACE OR AREA OF WORK. CONCRETE SHALL BE CURED NOT LESS THAN 28 DAYS BEFORE COMMENCING WORK.
PERFORM ABRASIVE BLASTING IN AS CONTINUOUS AN OPERATION AS POSSIBLE, UTlLlZlN THE
C.
REMOVE THE SURFACE LAITANCE AND DEFINE THE AGGREGATE AND SURROUNDING MATRIX SURFACES
TO MATCH THE APPROVED SAMPLES. IF DRY SANDBLASTING OPERATIONS ARE EMPLOYED, USE ONLY
STEEL OR IRON GRIT EQUAL TO BLACK BEAUTY OR OTHER APPROVED TYPES. IF WET SANDBLASTING OPERATIONS ARE EMPLOYED, USE ONLY SILICA SAND. THE ABRASIVE SHALL NOT AFFECT THE COLOR OF
THE FINISHED SURFACE.
USE AN ABRASIVE GRIT OR SAND OF THE PROPER TYPE AND GRADATION AS REQUIRED TO
D.
RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE MANUFACTURER OF THE ABRASIVE BLASTING EQUIPTMENT. BLASTING OF
SAMPLE SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED UNDER THE OBSERVATION OF THE ARCHITECT, WHO SAHLL APPROVE
THEACCEPTABLESURFACETEXTURETOBEUSED.
THE TYPE OF NOZZLE PRESSURE, AND BLASTING TECHNIQUES REQUIRED SHALL BE DETERMINED
IN THE FIELD ON THE SAMPLE. DIAMETERS OF AIR-LINES AND HOSES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
E. ABRASIVE BLAST CORNERS AND EDGES CAREFULLY USING BACK-UP BOARDS IN ORDER TO
MAINTAIN A UNIFORM CORNER OR EDGE LINE. BLASTING SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY AN AIR HOSE TO
REMOVE RESIDUE AS SURFACES ARE CUT TO ENABLE EXAMINATION OF SURFACES.
F.
THE OWNER HARMLESS OF ANY CLAIMS OR DAMAGES AS A RESULT OF ABRASIVE BLASTING. ABRASIVE
BLASTING OPERATIONS SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH AIR POLLUTION CONTROL DISTRICT, RULES 50
VISUAL ADMISSIONS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 40% OPACITY AND RULE 51 NUISANCE. EACH BLASTER SHALL BE
EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR FED HELMET. PROVIDE CONTROL FOR COLLECTING GRIT AND DUST FROM THE
ABRASIVE OPERATIONS.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SAFETY OF THE WORKERS AND SAHLL HOLD
G. ADJACENT WORK SHALL BE PROTECTED FROM ABRASIVE BLASTING.
3.05 CURING
A. CURE SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 03300.
3.06 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION
A.
REMOVE SUCH MATERIAL AT COMPLETION OF EACH DAY APPLICATION. PREVENT MIGRATION OF
AIRBORNE MATERIALS BY USE OF TARPAULINS, WIND BREAKS AND SIMILAR CONTAINING DEVICES.
MAINTAIN CONTROL OF CONCRETE DUST AND DEBRIS IN EACH AREA OF WORK. CLEAN UP AND
B. COOPERATE WITH OTHER TRADES FOR PROTECTION OF COMPLETE FINISHES.
C. CURE AND PROTECT SANDBLASTED CONCRETE FINISHES IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 03300.
**END OF SECTION"*
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE
03350-2
CARLSBAD GOLF COURSE CLUBHOUSE 03350-1
SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES
SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES
03350 -3
SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
I .01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1 .os
GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A. THE GENERAL CONDITIONS, AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS AREA A PART OF THIS SECTION AND THE CONTACT FOR THIS WORK AND APPLY TO THIS WORK AND APPLY TO THIS
SECTION AS FULLY AS IF REPEATED HEREIN.
SUMMARY:
A. THE WORK INCLUDES THE FURNISHING AND INSTALLING OF ALL REINFORCED CONCRETE
UNIT MASONRY WORK, INCLUDING REINFORCING STEEL AS SHOWN AND NOTED ON THE
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFIED HEREIN.
REFERENCES:
A. EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BY THE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED HEREIN OR THE DETAILS ON THE
DRAWINGS, WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF THE FOLLOWING
CODES AND STANDARDS.
1. 2. UNIFORM BUILDING CODE, CHAPTER 24, MASONRY. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM): THE SPECIFICATIONS
AND STANDARDS HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. CERTIFICATIONS: FURNISH A CERTIFICATE, EXECUTED IN TRIPLICATE, STATING THAT ALL CONCRETE BLOCKS HAVE BEEN PROPERLY AND THOROUGHLY CURED AT THE PLANT
BEFORE SHIPMENT, AND THAT THEY CONFORM TO ALL OF THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS
SPECIFICATION. EACH CERTIFICATE SHALL BE SIGNED BY THE BLOCK MANUFACTURER AND SHALL CONTAIN THE NAME OF THE CONTRACTOR, THE PROJECT LOCATION, AND THE
QUANTITY AND DATE OR DATES OF SHIPMENT OR DELIVERY TO WHICH THE CERTIFICATE
APPLIES.
HANDLING AND STORAGE:
A. IMMEDIATELY UPON DELIVERY TO THE SITE, MASONRY UNITS SHALL BE STACKED UNDER
COVER OR OTHERWISE PROTECTED FROM EXPOSURE TO THE WEATHER AND FROM CONTACT WITH SOIL. CARE SHALL BE EXERCISED IN HANDLING THESE ITEMS TO AVOID
CHIPPING AND BREAKAGE AND TO PROTECT THEM FORM DAMAGE. USE OF DAMAGED
BLOCKS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. UNITS SHALL BE STORED ON PALLETS OR TEMPORARY WOOD FLOORS OFF THE GROUND AND OUT OF THE WAY OF OTHER TRADES.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: HOLLOW LOAD-BEARING UNITS, CONFORMING TO ASTM C 90-8 1, GRADE N, TYPE 1, MEDIUM WEIGHTS, EXCEPT THAT UNITS SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM LINEAR SHRIKAGE OF 0.06%. BLOCK SHALL BE STANDARD UNITS 6" AND 8 X 16" FACES BY
THICKNESS INDICATED.
1. CONCEALED UNITS SHALL BE STANDARD COLOR AND TEXTURE.
2. EXPOSED UNITS SHALL BE APPLIED STUCCO - SEE SECTION 091 SO.
B. CEMENT: STANDARD TYPE I1 PORTLAND CEMENT, CONFORMING TO ASTM C 150-80, LOW ALKALI.
LIME: HYDRATED, CONFORMING TO ASTM C 207-79, TYPE S. C.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
D. MORTAR SAND: NATURAL SAND, CLEAN AND GRADED, CONFORMING TO ASTM C 144-76.
E.
F.
GROUT AGGREGATE: CLEAN AND GRADED, CONFORMING TO ASTM C 33-81
WATER: FRESH, CLEAN AND POTABLE, AND FREE FROM SUCH AMOUNTS OF MINERAL AND
ORGANIC SUBSTANCES AS WOULD ADVERSELY AFFECT THE HARDENING OF CEMENT
MORTAR.
REINFORCING STEEL: FURNISH AND INSTALL REINFORCING STEEL FOR GROUTED BLOCK
MASONRY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 03210. G.
2.02 STRENGTHS AND COLORS OR MORTAR AND GROUT:
A. MORTAR STRENGTHS AND COLOR: MORTAR FOR GROUTED UNIT MASONRY SHALL BE
TYPE S MORTAR M ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 24 OF THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE.
B. GROUT STRENGTHS AND COLOR: STRENGTH SHALL BE 2000 PSI AT 28 DAYS. COLOR SHALL
BE NATURAL.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 UNIT MASONRY CONSTUCTION:
GENERAL: WALLS SHALL BE STRAIGHT, PLUMB AND TRUE, WITH ALL COURSES TRUE TO
LINE AND LEVEL, BUILT TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN. CELLS CONTAINING REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE FILED SOLID WITH GROUT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS. BLOCKS
SHALL BE LAID UP IN RUNNING BOND UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
JOINTS: BOTH VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL JOINTS SHALL BE UNIFORMLY 3/8” TO !h”
THICK, WITH MORTAR COVERAGE FOR FULL SHELL THICKNESS AT BOTH VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL JOINTS. EXPOSED JOINTS, BOTH VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SHALL BE
CONCAVED. PROVIDE WEEP HOLES AT RETAINING WALLS PER DRAWINGS.
BED JOINTS: THE TOP SURFACE OF THE CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS OR OTHER BED JOINTS
SHALL BE CLEAN, SMOOTH CONCRETE WITH AGGREGATE EXPOSED BEFORE START OF
LAYING. TOPS OF FOUNDATIONS SHALL BE SANDBLASTED, IF NECESSARY, TO REMOVE LAITANCE FOR EXPOSING AGGREGATES IN THE CONCRETE. FOUNDATION TOPS SHALL BE KEPT CLEAN DURING THE CONSTRUCTION BY CLEANING AT LEAST ONCE A DAY. WHERE
BLOCK IS TO BE LAID ON SLABS, BED JOINTS SHALL BE ROUGHENED AND CLEANED, AND A BONDING AGENT SHALL BE APPLIED BEFORE LAYING FIRST COURSE OF BLOCK.
ALIGNMENT OF VERTICAL CELLS: MASONRY SHALL BE BUILT TO PRESERVE THE UNOBSTRUCTED VERTICAL CONTINUITY OF THE CELLS. THE VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
SHALL BE SUFFICIENT TO MAINTAIN A CLEAR, UNOBSTRUCTED VERTICAL FLUE,
MEASURING NOT LESS THAN 3” IN ALL DIRECTIONS FOR GROUTED MASONRY.
CLEANOUTS: CLEANOUT OPENING SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE BOTTOMS OF CELLS TO BE
FILLED AT EACH LIFT OR POUR OF GROUT, WHEN SUCH LIFT OR POUR OF GROUT IS IN
BEFORE GROUTING.
EXCESS OF 4’-0 IN HEIGHT. CLEANOUTS SHALL BE SEALED AFTER INSPECTION AND
REINFORCEMENT: VERTICAL REINFORCING BARS SHALL BE HELD IN PLACE BY STANDARD
REINFORCING SUPPORTS. HORIZONTAL BARS SHALL B ETIED TO VERTICAL BARS AS THE BLOCK WORK PROGRESSES AND SHALL BE EMBEDDED IN GROUT. SPLICE LAPS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 03200.
GROUTING:
1. GROUT MIX: GROUT SHALL BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH UBC 2403 FOR
MANUFACTURER DESIGNED MIXES. THE USE OF AN ADMIXTURE FOR THE PURPOSE OF REDUCING WATER CONTENT WILL BE PERMI’TTED, SUBJECT TO APPROVAL OF THE ADMIXTURE, AND PROVIDED THE STRENGTH OF GROUT IS NOT
03350 -5
IMPAIRED. WATERPROOFING ADMIXTURE SHALL BE ADDED IN AMOUNT
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER BUT NOT TO THE EXTENT THAT GROUT
STRENGTH SPECIFIED IS IMPAIRED.
2. CONSTRUCTION: GROUT SHALL CONFORM TO APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF
THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE. GROUT SHALL BE PLACED BY MEANS OF AN
APPROVED GROUT PUMP CAPABLE OF HANDLING AT LEAST 12 CUBIC YARDS PER
HOUR OF THE SPECIFIED 3/8” MAXIMUM SIZE AGGREGATE MIX.
I
3. HIGH-LIFT CONSTRUCTION: AT THE CONTRACTOR’S OPTION, GROUT MAY BE
PLACED BY MEANS OF THE HIGH-LIFT GROUTING METHOD UNDER THE
SUPERVISION OF A QUALIFIED MASONRY INSPECTOR, EMPLOYED AND PAID FOR
BY THE CONTRACTOR, IN WHICH CASE GROUTING SHALL CONFORM TO THE
UNIFORM BUILDING.
H. ANCHORAGE ITEMS: BOLTS. STRAPS, HANGERS, MSERTS, AND OTHER ANCHORAGE
IN, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, AND SHALL BE INSTALLED AS THE MASONRY WORK
PROGRESSES.
DEVICES REQUIRED TO SUPPORT FRAMING AND OTHER ATTACHMENTS SHALL BE BUILT-
3.02 CLEANING
A. AFTER ERECTION AND POINTING, MASONRY SHALL BE CLEANED DOWN WITH STIFF
BRUSHES AND WATER, FOLLOWED BY A THOROUGH RINSING WITH CLEAN WATER.
3.03 CURING:
A. ATTENTION SHALL BE GIVEN TO THE PROPER CURING OF MORTAR JOINTS AS WELL AS THE GROUT CONCRETE POUR. THE MOSONRY AT WORK AND THE TOP OF THE GROUT POUR
SHALL BE KEPT DAMP BUT NOT SATURATED FOR AT LEAST 7 DAYS TO PREVENT TOO
RAPID DRYING DURING HOT OR DRYING WEATHER, AND DRYING WINDS.
3.04 PROTECTION:
A. MASONRY SURFACES SHALL BE COVERED WITH NON-STAlNING WATERPROOF PAPER
WHEN NECESSARY TO PROTECT THEM FORM RAIN OR FROM HOT, DRY WEATHER.
SURFACES NOT BEING WORKED ON SHALL BE PROTECTED.
3.05 TOLERANCES:
A. THE FOLLOWING TOLERANCES SHALL APPLY TO THE MASONRY WORK:
1. PLUMB: IN ADJACENT UNITS - 1/8; IN 10 FEET - W; M ANY STORY OR 20 FEET
MAXIMUM - 3/8”.
LEVEL: ANY BAY OR 20 FEET MAXIMUM - W; IN 40 FEET OR MORE - V. 2.
*END OF SECTION*
SASC Inc. Phoenix Las Vw
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Carlsbad Golf Course Buildings
Including Clubhouse
SECTION TITLE
NO. OF
PAGES
00010 Table of Contents 3
00320 Geotechnical Investigation Report (incorporated by reference and available
for review at City of Carlsbad)
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
Provided under separate cover from the City of Carlsbad
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 110 Summary of Work
01290 Measurement and Payment
01312 Project Meetings
01 31 5 01330 Submittals
01 420 References 01 430 Quality Control
01 500 01600 Material and Equipment
01732 Cutting and Patching
Contractor's Requests for Information / Interpretation
Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
I) 01770 Contract Closeout
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
02300 Earthwork 02360 Soil Treatment
02620 Foundation Drainage System
02741 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
02765 Pavement Markings
02774
02890 Traffic Control Signs
Concrete Curbs Gutters, Sidewalks and Driveways
2
1
1
3
2
7
1
5
2
3
3
10 3
3
4
2
4
2
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03055 Fly Ash 2
03100 Concrete Formwork 4
03200 Concrete Reinforcement 3
03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 10
0341 1 PrecasVPrestressed Concrete Hollow Core Planks 5
03450 Architectural Precast Concrete - Plant Cast 4
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04065 Mortar and Masonry Grout
04220 Concrete Masonry Units
04270 Glass Unit Masonry
04710 Simulated Stone
04930 Masonry Cleaning
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191 -3 March 1,2005 00010-1
Carlsbad Go45Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Table of Contents
SASC Inc. Phoenix * Las Vms
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05100 Structural Metal Framing
0541 0
05500 Metal Fabrications
0551 0 Steel Stairs
05520 Handrails and Railings
05700 Ornamental Metal
Load-Bearing Metal Stud System
DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry
06172
061 73 Wood Trusses
06180 Glue-Laminated Construction
06200 Finish Carpentry
06400 Architectural Woodwork
Prefabricated Wood Beams and Joists
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL 8 MOISTURE PROTECTION
07131 Bituminous Sheet Membrane Waterproofing 0721 0 Building Insulation
0721 5 Styro Stud System
07240
07260 Weather Resistive Barriers
07500 Built-up Asphalt Roofing
07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal
07615 Sheet Metal Roofing (Copper)
07622 Copper Flashing and Trim
07720 Roof Accessories
07840 Firestopping
07900 Joint Sealers
Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems
DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS
08100 Steel Doors and Frames
0821 5 Wood Doors
0831 0
08330 Coiling Doors and Grilles
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
0871 0 Door Hardware
08800 Glazing
Access Doors and Frames
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09100 Metal Support Assemblies
09250 Gypsum Board
0931 0 Ceramic Tile
09380 Natural Stone Tile
09510 Acoustical Ceilings
09652 Resilient Tile Flooring
09680 Carpet
09720 Wall Coverings
09752 Stone Countertops
09775 FRP Wall Panels
09820 Acoustical Insulation
09900 Painting
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March I, 2005 000 1 0-2
3
2
2
7
3
8
4
3
3
2
4
6
4
5
2
2
6
10
5
5
5
6
5
4
4
5
3
4
2
1
21
Carlsbad GoiLCourse Clubhouse
C-Specs /Table of Contents
SASC InC. Phoenix - Las Vegas
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10400 Signage -- 10500 Lockers
Wood Lockers
Fire Protection Specialties
10810 Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11400 Food Service Equipment Clubhouse
11400 Food Service Equipment Halfway House
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12493 Horizontal Wood Blinds
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
None in this Project
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14240 Hydraulic Elevators (Passenger)
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15100 Mechanical General Provisions
15400 Plumbing General Provisions
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
1601 0 Electrical General Provisions
16050 Raceway Systems
16090 Wiring Devices
16120 Electrical Wire and Cable
16210 Electrical Service Entrance Equipment
16230
16240
16260 16450 Grounding
16510 Lighting Fixtures
16610 Test and Trials
16740 ' Telephone System
Electrical Overcurrent Protective Devices
Identification
Motor Control and Control Devices
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
D.F. Architects 96123EASC 05-191-3 8
March 1, 2005 0001 0-3
27
16
2
14
10
11
4
11
2 4
2
2
1
2
3
3
2
2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/lable of Contents
DOCUMENT 00320
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION
D.F. Architects 96123EASC 05-191-3 .March 1,2005 00320
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs"/Geotechnical Data
SASC souvmast. uc. Phoenix. Lat vegas
SECTION 01 I10
SUMMARY OF WORK
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project: A new 24,463 sq. ft. Golf Clubhouse for the City of Carlsbad Golf Course located
at Hidden Valley Road north of Rockefeller Drive, Carlsbad, California.
B. Base Bid: The bid shall include labor, material, equipment, services and transportation
necessary for the construction of the Project.
1.02 WORK BY OWNER
A. The Owner has awarded contracts for general golf course and amenities construction that
will run concurrent with Work of this Contract.
1.03 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE
A. Limit use of site to allow: 1. Owner occupancy.
2. Work by Other Contractors and Work by Owner.
B. Construction Operations: Limited to Clubhouse property boundaries as indicated on Site
Plan, including storage of materials and equipment.
1.04 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
A. Plan check fees have been paid by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and for other permits and
governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and
which are legally required at the time the bids are received or negotiations concluded.
This shall include, but not be limited to:
1.
2. Inspections and Certificates from State Fire Marshal and County Health
Building Permit from City of Carlsbad, California.
Department.
C. The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and lawful orders of public authority bearing on the performance of the Work.
D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that the Contract Documents are
in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, building codes and regulations. If the
Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any
respect, he shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
E. If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall
assume full responsibility therefor and shall bear attributable costs.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01 110-1 Carlsbad GollCourse Clubhouse C-Specs /Summary of Work
SASC southwest. LLC.
phoenix. Las Vegas
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
APPROVED APPLICATORS
A. Where specific instructions in the Specifications require that a particular product and/or
material be applied and/or installed by an "approved applicator" it shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to insure that any Subcontractor or Subsubcontractor used for such Work is
in fact currently certified by the particular Manufacturer for this type of installation or
application.
APPROVEDMANUFACTURERS
A. Each Section includes a list of Manufacturers whose equipment is acceptable as to
manufacture, subject to conformance with the Contract Documents. Careful checking
must be made by the Contractor and the manufacturer or equipment supplier to verify that
the equipment will meet all capacities, requirements, space allocations and is suitable to
the intended purpose.
REFERENCE DATA
A. Reference data made available to the Contractor is for the Contractor's information only,
and neither the Owner nor the Architect assume any responsibility for the Contractor's
conclusions.
B. The Contractor shall establish and maintain all buildings and construction grades, lines,
levels, and bench marks. This Work shall be performed by a licensed Civil Engineer or Surveyor under the employ of the Contractor, who shall certify to the Architect that he has
performed this service.
C. The Contractor shall not remove any property line markers or monuments or data
established by the Owner.
ARCHITECTURAL BARRIERS
A. It is the desire of the Owner that the facilities and improvements constructed under this
Contract meet or exceed the intent of applicable public law concerning prohibition of
discrimination, and that no individual be discriminated against on the basis of disability in
the full and equal enjoyment of the goods, services, facilities, privileges, advantages, or accommodations of this completed Project.
B. The designers and drafters of these Documents have intended to incorporate those
Owner's intentions into these Documents.
C. It is recognized that there may be products not incorporated into these Documents that
may more nearly meet the Owner's desires than those included.
D. The Owner hereby solicits those providing elements of this Project to bid and contract for
the Project as required by these Documents, but at the time of submitting Shop Drawings,
or sooner when appropriate, and without causing delay in the Project, to also submit
proposals for improving the accessibility of the Project to physically or mentally impaired persons.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01110-2 Carlsbad GolICourse Clubhouse C-Specs /Summary of Work
SASC souvmest, uc. Phoenix - Las vegas
SECTION 01290
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1.01 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. With first Application for Payment, submit three (3) copies of completed AIA Document
G703 Continuation Sheet indicating the scheduled value of major categories and
subcontracts for the Work, for approval of the Architect.
For each item, provide a column for listing:
1. Item number
2. Description of Work
3. Scheduled Value
4. Previous Applications
5. 6. Authorized Change Orders
7. 8. Percentage of Completion 9. Balance to Finish
10. Retainage.
B.
Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application
Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application
1.02 PAY REQUEST
A. The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized AIA Document G702, Application
and Certification for Payment, supported by approved AIA Document G703, Continuation
Sheet. A minimum of three (3) original copies of these forms shall be submitted for each
application. Submit additional copies if requested by the Owner or Architect.
1. Present required information on electronic media printout.
2. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. 3. ’ Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products.
4. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on continuation sheet, listing
Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.
B. With each Application for Payment submit lien releases for the previous payment,
substantiation for stored materials, monthly progress reports and updates, and any other
pertinent items required by the Owner or Architect and identified during the Pre-
Construction conference.
C. AIA Documents G706, Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, G706-A,
Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens, Documents G707, Consent of Surety Company
to Final Payment shall be used. If appropriate, G707-A, Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release of Retainage shall be used.
D. When acceptable to the Owner, the Contractor may submit for payment on properly stored materials not yet incorporated into the work. Materials stored on the site must be
in a secured area and be protected from damage, weather, theft or vandalism. The
Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any damaged or missing materials.
E. Materials stored off the job site must be in a bonded warehouse or bonded area in the
supplier’s storage area, separated from other materials, and clearly labeled for this
particular project. Insurance certificates for the material naming the Owner as an additional insured, loss payee shall be delivered with the pay request.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 01 290-1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Measurement and Payment
SASC sournwest, LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 01 312
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. A Preconstruction Conference to discuss the Project work will be held at a time and
location designated by the Architect at the project site.
B. Contractor, and representatives of major Subcontractors, shall meet with Owner and
Architect. The purpose of this conference is to discuss the Project in detail, including
scheduling of Work, and to answer questions. Unless followed up in writing, verbal
authorizations or acknowledgement of those present are not binding.
C. Meeting minutes will be taken by the Contractor for distribution to all attendees within 48
hours of conference.
1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. At time designated by Architect, weekly Progress Meeting will be held at Project site.
B. Contractor and representatives of major Subcontractors shall meet with Owner and
Architect .
C. Contractor is responsible for notifying Subcontractors of their required attendance. These
meetings will address progress of the Work and problems that may have developed since
the previous meeting.
D. Unless followed up in writing, verbal authorizations or acknowledgements by those
present are not binding.
E. Meeting minutes will be taken by the Contractor for distribution to all attendees within 48
hours of each meeting.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01312-1 Carlsbad GolfT$ourse Clubhouse
C-Specs /Project Meetings
SASC southwest. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 01 31 5
CONTRACTOR'S REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION / INTERPRETATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Administrative requirements for requests for infonnation /
interpretation.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Request For Information / Interpretation (RFI):
1.
2.
A document submitted by the Contractor requesting clarification of a portion of
the Contract Documents, hereinafter referred to as RFI.
A properly prepared request for information / interpretation shall include a detailed
written statement that indicates the specific Drawings or Specification in need of
clarification and the nature of the clarification requested.
a. Drawings shall be identified by drawing number and location on the
drawing sheet.
b. Specifications shall be identified by Section number, page and
paragraph.
Requests for Information: Request made by Contractor concerning items not
indicated on drawings or contained in Project Manual that is required to properly perform the work.
Requests for Interpretation: Request made by Contractor in accordance with
Architect's third party obligations to the contract for construction.
3.
4.
B. Improper RFl's:
1.
2. RFl's that are not properly prepared. Improper RFl's will be processed by the Architect at the Architect's standard
hourly rate and Architect will charge the Owner, and such costs will be deducted
from monies still due the Contractor. The Contractor will be notified by the
Architect prior to the processing of improper RFl's.
C. Frivolous RFl's:
1.
2.
RFl's that request information that is clearly shown on the Contract Documents.
Frivolous RFl's may be returned unanswered or may be processed by the
Architect at the Architect's standard hourly rate and Architect will charge the
Owner, and such costs will be deducted from monies still due the Contractor.
The Contractor will be notified by the Architect prior to the processing of frivolous
RFl's.
1.03 CONTRACTORS REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A. RFl's shall be submitted on a form prepared by the Contractor acceptable to the Architect.
1. Forms shall be completely filled in, and if prepared by hand, shall be fully legible
after photocopying or transmission by facsimile (fax).
2. RFl's shall be submitted in numerical order with no breaks in the consecutive
numbering.
3. Each page of attachments to RFl's shall bear the RFI number and shall be
consecutively numbered in chronological order.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01315-1 Carlskad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Contractor's Requests for
Information
SASC ScuVlwest, uc Phoenix . Las vegas
B. When the Contractor is unable to determine from the Contract Documents, the material,
process or system to be installed, the Architect shall be requested to make a clarification
of the indeterminate item.
1. Wherever possible, such clarification shall be requested at the next appropriate
project meeting, with the response entered into the meeting minutes. When
clarification at the meeting is not possible, either because of the urgency of the
need, or the complexity of the item, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI to
the Architect.
RFI requesting clarification of an item required of a document known to have
been prepared by a consultant to the Architect, may be sent directly to the
consultant with a copy to the Architect, if this direct communication is approved by
the Architect .
2.
C. Contractor shall endeavor to keep the number of RFl's to a minimum. In the event that
the process becomes unwieldy, in the opinion of the Architect, because of the number
and frequency of RFl's submitted, the Architect may require the Contractor to abandon
the process and submit future requests as either submittals, substitutions or requests for
change.
D. RFl's shall be originated by the Contractor.
1.
2.
RFl's from subcontractors or material suppliers shall be submitted through,
reviewed by, and signed by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect.
RFl's from subcontractors or material suppliers sent directly to the Architect,
Architect or the Architect's consultants shall not be accepted and will be returned
unanswered.
E. Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents to assure that the requested
information is not available therein. RFl's which request information available in the
Contract Documents will be deemed either "improper" or "frivolous" as noted above.
F. In cases where RFl's are issued to request clarification of coordination issues, for
example, pipe and duct routing, clearances, specific locations of work shown
diagrammatically, and similar items, the Contractor shall fully lay out a suggested solution
using drawings or sketches drawn to scale, and submit same with the RFI. RFI's which
fail to include a suggested solution will be returned unanswered with a requirement that
the Contractor submit a complete request.
G. RFl's shall not be used for the following purposes:
1. To request approval of submittals
2. To request approval of substitutions,
3. To request changes which are known to entail additional cost or credit. (A Change Order Request form shall be used.)
4. To request different methods of performing work than those drawn and specified.
H. In the event the Contractor believes that a clarification by the Architect results in additional
cost or time, Contractor shall not proceed with the work indicated by the RFI until a Change Order (or Construction Change Directive, if applicable to project) is prepared and
approved. RFl's shall not automatically justify a cost increase in the work or a change in
the project schedule. 1. Answered RFl's shall not be construed as approval to perform extra work.
2. Unanswered RFl's will be returned with a stamp or notation: Not Reviewed.
1. Contractor shall prepare and maintain a log of RFI'S, and at any time requested by the
Architect, Contractor shall furnish copies of the log showing outstanding RFI'S.
Contractor shall note unanswered RFl's in the log.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-191 -3 Carlskad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 01 31 5-2 C-Specs /Contractor's Requests for
Information
SASC SouthWest, LLC
Phoenix. LaS V-S
J. Contractor shall allow up to 5 working days review and response time for RFI'S, unless
review is required of multiple consultants, then the review and response period shall be 7
working days.
1. The Architect will endeavor to respond in a timely fashion to RFl's.
2. RFI shall state requested date/time for response, however, this requested
dateItime for response is not a guarantee that the RFI will be answered by that
datehime if that datehime is too expeditious
1.04 ARCHITECT'S RESPONSE TO RFI'S
A. Architect will respond to RFl's on one of the following forms:
1. Properly prepared RFl's:
a.
b. Architect's Supplemental Instruction.
C. Request for Proposal.
a. Notification of Processing Fee(s).
b. Unanswered RFl's will be returned with a stamp or notation: Not
Answers to properly prepared RFl's may or may not be made directly upon the
RFI form as deemed appropriate by the Architect.
Response directly upon Request for Information I Interpretation form.
2. Improper or Frivolous RFl's
Reviewed..
3.
8. Architect may opt to retain RFl's for discussion during regularly scheduled project
meetings for inclusion of responses in meeting minutes in lieu of responding on a written
form.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 961 23ISASC 05-1 91 -3
March 1,2005 01 31 5-3
Carls&ad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Contractor's Requests for
Information
SASC Southwesl, LLC
Phoenix. Las VegaS
SECTION 01 330
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL .
1 .Ol CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Submit 3 copies of the Construction Schedule, broken down by Trade or Material, to the
Architect for approval prior to the first Pay Request. Schedule shall be by CPM or bar
graph type, and shall show proposed starting and completion dates for each Trade and
activity for the Work. Submit 3 copies of updated schedule at each Pay Request field
review to the Architect.
6. Submit completed construction schedule to Architect no later than 15 calendar days after
date of Agreement and update monthly during construction. Submit current schedule with
each application for payment.
C. Submit completed material delivery schedule to the Architect no later than 20 calendar
days after the date of the Agreement. Identify material critical to the progress of the
Project and those for which long lead time in procurement is anticipated. Indicate
projected dates for submittal, order and delivery of such material.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Following Contractor's review and approval, submit to the Architect one
reproducible transparency and two prints of each Drawing for review.
2. The Architect will review the Drawings and affix a stamp to the transparency indicating the findings of the review, and will return same to the Contractor.
3. Comments, if any, will be noted directly on the transparency.
4. The Contractor shall then print and distribute the appropriate number of copies to
the various Trades and to Contractor's job personnel as required.
5. If a transparency is indicated to be corrected and resubmitted, correct and
resubmit as outlined above.
6. Fire Alarm System/Fire Sprinklers System Shop Drawings shall be submitted to
the state and local Fire Marshal and obtain approval prior to installation. Fire
Marshal inspection, test and approval of completed installations shall be obtained
prior to acceptance of the systems and Substantial Completion of the Project.
B. Product Data:
1. Following Contractor's review and approval, submit to the Architect 6 copies of
Manufacturer's catalogs and brochures as required by the Specifications.
Resubmit corrected copies for approval in accordance with original submittal.
C. Color Selection: Within 30 days of the date of Agreement, submit to the Architect for
approval, samples and appropriate information required for the selection of colors,
textures, fabric and finishes for the entire Project. Final selection of color, textures, fabrics or finishes will not be made until all applicable and related submittals have been
provided. If the Contractor fails to provide the required samples and related information
within the time period, the Architect shall have the option of selecting colors, textures,
fabric, finishes or specific materials from those specified or approved and the Contractor
shall be obligated to provide the material selected by the Architect.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01330-1
Carlsbad Golf Coursz Clubhouse
C-Specs /Submittals
SAX Southwesl. LLC
Phoenix. Las Vegas
D. Submit Shop Drawings and Samples for only those items specifically mentioned in the
Specifications. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining Shop Drawings required for the progress of the Work, even though such Shop Drawings may not require the
Architect's review.
1.03 QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Lists: Following Contractor's review and approval, submit to the Architect 6
complete lists of major items of mechanical, plumbing and electrical equipment and
materials, within 30 calendar days afler date of Agreement. Submit all items at one time.
Partial list will not be acceptable. Submittals shall include the Manufacturer's
Specifications, weights, space requirements, physical dimensions, rating of equipment
and supplemental information requested by the Architect. Submit performance curves for
pumps and fans. Where a submittal sheet describes items in addition to that item being
submitted, delete such items. Clearly note equipment and materials which deviate from
those shown or specified in size, weight, required clearances, and location of access.
Modifications to the Work as shown or specified in submittals shall be indicated and shall
be provided by the Contractor as a part of the Work.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where Specifications require Work to be furnished, installed
or performed in accordance with a specified product Manufacturer's instructions,
distribute copies of such instructions to concerned parties.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01 330-2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Submittals
SASC SOUTHWEST, LLC Phoenlx.Lasvegas
SECTION 01420
REFERENCES
1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards,
comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are
specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents.
C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents.
D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from ArchitecUEngineer before proceeding.
E. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the
Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
I .02 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES
M Aluminum Association
900 19th St. N.W., Suite 300
Washington, DC 20006
www.aluminum.org
MBC Associated Air Balance Council
1518 K. Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20005
www.aa bc hacorn
(202) 862-5100
(202) 737-0202
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664
1827 Walden Office Square, Ste 104
Schaumburg, IL 60172-4268
www.aamanet.orq
AASHTO American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol Street, N.W., Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
www.aashto.org
ACI American Concrete Institute P. 0 Box 9094 Farmington Hills, MI 48333 www.aci-int.orq
ADC Air Diffusion Council
1000 E. Woodfield Rd., Ste 102
Schaumburg, IL 601 73-5921
www.flexibleduct.org
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 01 420-1
(202) 624-5800
(248) 848-3700
(847) 706-6750
Carlsbad Golf Cou$te Clubhouse
C-Specs /References
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - La?. Vegas
AFPA
AI
AIA
AlSC
AIS1
AlTC
AMCA
ANSI
APA
AP I
American Forest and Paper Association
(Former%: National Forest Products Association
11 11 19 St., NW, Suite 800
Washington, DC 20036
www.afandpa.orq
Asphalt Institute
Research Park Drive
P.O. Box 14052
Lexington, KY 40512-4052
www.asphaltinstitute.orq
American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20006-5292
www.aia.orq
American Institute of Steel Construction
1 E. Wacker Dr., Suite 3100
Chicago, IL 60601
www.aisc.orq
American Iron and Steel Institute
1101 17th Street, N.W., Suite 1300
Washington, DC 20036
www.steel. org
American Institute of Timber Construction 7012 S. Revere Pky, Suite 140
Englewood, CO 801 12 www.aitc-alularn.orq
Air Movement and Control Association
30 West University Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004
www.amca.orq
American National Standards Institute
25 West 43rd Street
New York, NY 10036
www.ansi.org
Engineered Wood Association
(Formerly: American Plywood Association)
P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma, WA 9841 1
www.apawood.orq
American Petroleum Institute
1220 L Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20005
www.aDi.orq
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01 420-2
(202) 463-2700
(859) 288-4960
(800) 242-3837
(31 2) 670-2400
(202) 452-7100
(303) 792-9559
(847) 394-01 50
(212) 642-4900
(253) 565-6600
(202) 682-8000
Carlsbad Golf Cou\te Clubhouse, C-Specs /References
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - Las veeas
(703) 524-8800 ARI Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
4301 N. Fairfax Dr., Suite 425
Arlington, VA 22203
www. a ri. orq
(800) 527-4723
(404) 636-8400 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and Air Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, N.E.
Atlanta, GA 30329 www. as h rae.org
ASME (800) 843-2763
(973) 882-1 167
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Three Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016
www.asme.orq
ASTM (610) 832-9716 American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Dr
West Conshohocken, PA 19428
www.astm.org
Awl (703) 733-0600 Architectural Woodwork Institute
1952 Isaac Newton Square West
Reston, VA 20190
www.awinet.orq
(81 7) 326-6300 AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
PO Box 5690
Granbury, TX 76049
www.awDa.com
(800) 443-9353 (305) 443-9353 AWS American Welding Society
550 NW LeJeune Road
Miami, FL 33126
www. aws.org
AWWA (303) 794-771 1
(212) 297-2122
(703) 620-0010
(21 2) 251 -7200
American Water Works Association
6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235
www.awwa.orq
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturer’s Association
355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor New York, NY 10017
www.buildershardware.com
B IA Brick Industry Association
11490 Commerce Park Drive Reston, VA 20191 www. brickinfo.org
CDA Copper Development Association
260 Madison Ave.
New York, NY 10016
www.cower.org
Carlsbad Golf Cou$te Clubhouse
C-Specs /References
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 01 420-3
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - Las vegas
CECA
CLFMI
CRI
CRSl
CSSB
DHI
EJMA
FMG
GA
GANA
Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1 919
1500 Lincoln Highway, Suite 202
St. Charles, IL 60174 www. cisca.orq
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583
1001 5 Old Columbia Rd, Ste 6-21 5
Columbia, MD 21046
wwwxhainlin kinfo. org
The Carpet and Rug Institute
Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048
www.carpet-rua.com
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, IL 60173
www. crsi. org
(Formerly: Red Cedar Shingle and Handsplit Shake Bureau)
PO Box 11 78
Sumas, WA 98295
www.cedarbureau.org
Cedar Shingle and Shake Bureau (604) 820-7700
(706) 278-3176
(800) 882-8846
(847) 51 7-1200
Door and Hardware Institute
14150 Newbrook Drive, Ste 200
Chantilly, VA 201 51
www.dhi.orq
(703) 222-201 0
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (914) 332-0040
25 North. Broadway
Tarrytown, NY 10591
www.eima.org
FM Global
(Formerly: Factory Mutual Sytem)
1301 Atwood Ave
P.O. Box 7500 Johnston, RI 02919
www.allendale.com
Gypsum Association
810 First St. NE #510
Washington, DC 20002
www.avDsum .org
(401) 275-3000
(202) 289-5440
Glass Association of North America (785) 271 -0208
(Formerly: Flat Glass Marketing Association)
331 0 SW Harrison St
Topeka, KS 66611
www.Qlasswebsite.com/qana
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 01 420-4
Carlsbad Golf Cour&e Clubhouse
C-Specs /References
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC
PhOenlX - bs veeas
ICC
IEEE
MBMA
MIL
MUSFA
NAAMM
NCMA
NEBB
NEMA
NFPA
International Code Council
Headquarters
5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 600
Falls Church, VA 22041
Los Angeles District Office
5360 S. Workman Mill Road
Whittier, CA 90601
703-931 -4533
800-284-4406
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (212) 419-7900
3 Park Ave 17* Floor
New York, NY 1001 6
www. ieee.org
(800) 678-4333
Metal Building Manufacturer's Association (21 6) 241 -7333
1300 Sumner Ave.
Cleveland, OH 441 15
www. mbrna.com
Military Specification
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19120
Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
(A Division of NAAMM)
8 South Michigan Ave., Suite 1000
Chicago, IL 60603
www.naamm.orgimlsfa
National Association of Architectural
Metal Manufacturers
8 South Michigan Ave, Suite 1000
Chicago, IL 60603
www.naamrn.orq
National Concrete Masonry Association
2302 Horse Pen Rd.
Herndon, VA 20171
www.ncrna.org
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
8575 Grovernont Circle
Gaithersburg, MD 20877
www.nebb.org
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1300 N 1 7'h St, Ste 1847
Rosslyn, VA 22209
www. nema.orq
National Fire Protection Association
1 Battery March Park
Quincy, MA 02269 www.nfPa.org
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3
March 1,2005 01 420-5
(31 2) 332-0405
(312) 332-0405
(703) 71 3-1 900
(301) 977-3698
(703) 841-3200
(800) 344-3555
(61 7) 770-3000
Carlsbad Golf Cou$$e Clubhouse C-Specs /References
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC
Phoenix * Las vegas
NRCA
NTMA
PCA
PC I
PDCA
PS
RIS
RCSHSB
RFCl
SDI
SDI
SIGMA
National Roofing Contractors Association
10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018
www.roofonline.org
National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
110 E Market St, Ste 200A
Leesburg, VA 201 76
www.ntma.com
Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, IL 60077
www. portcement.org
Precast/ Prestressed Concrete Institute
209 W. Jackson Blvd
Chicago, IL 60606
www.Dci.orq
Painting and Decorating Contractors of'America
3913 Old Lee Hwy., Second Floor
Fairfax, VA 22030
www. pdca.com
Product Standard
U. S. Department of Commerce
1401 Constitution Avenue NW
Washington, DC 20203
Redwood Inspection Service
405 Enfrente Rd
Novato. CA 94949
Red Cedar Shingle and Handsplit Shake Bureau
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
401 E. Jefferson St., Ste 102
Rockville, MD 20850
www.rfci.com
Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, IL 60021-0025 www. sdi. org
Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit Rd.
Cleveland, OH 44145
www.steeldoor.orq
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 401 N. Michigan Ave
Chicago, IL 6061 1
www.siqmaonline.orq
(847) 299-9070
(800) 323-9736
(703) 779-1022
(847) 966-6200
(312) 786-0300
(703) 383-0800
(4 1 5) 382-0662
Refer to CSSB
(301) 340-8580
(847) 462-1930
(440) 899-0010
(312) 664-6610
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 0 1420-6 Carlsbad Golf Cour..e Clubhouse C-Specs /References
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - Las Vegas
SJI
SMACNA
SSPC
TCA
UL
WCLlB
WDMA
WWPA
Steel Joist Institute
3127 10" Ave North Extension
Myrtle Beach, SC 29577
www.steelioist.org
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151
www.srnacna.orq
The Society for Protective Coatings
(Formerly: Steel Structures Painting Council)
40 24th Street, 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222
www.sspc.orq
Tile Council of America, Inc.
100 Clemson Research Blvd
Anderson, SC 29625
www.tileusa.com
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
333 Pfingston Road
Northbrook, IL 60062
www.ul.com
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
Box 23145
Portland, OR 97281
www.wclib.org
(843) 626-1995
(703) 803-2980
(877) 281-7772
(412) 281-2331
(864) 646-8453
(800) 704-4050
(847) 272-8800
(503) 639-0651
Window and Door Manufacturing Association
1400 E. Touhy Avenue, Ste 470
(800) 223-2301
(847) 299-5200
(Formerly: National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
Des Plaines, IL 60018
www. wd ma. com
Western Wood Products Association 522 S.W. 5th Ave., Ste 500
Portland, OR 97204
www.wwDa.orq
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005
END OF SECTION
01 420-7
(503) 224-3930
Carlsbad Golf CouEe Clubhouse C-Specs /References
SASC southwest. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 01430
QUALITY CONTROL
PART I GENERAL
1.01 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.02
A.
B.
Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to
perform specified testing.
Contractor shall furnish samples for such tests and deliver them to the testing agency as
directed by the Architect.
The testing laboratory shall distribute copies of reports as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2 copies to the Architect
1 copy to the Structural Engineer 2 copies to the Contractor
Costs for retesting required due to Contractor's failure to comply with specified
requirements shall be paid for by the Contractor.
The following list is intended as a guide to the Contractor to aid in the determining testing
requirements for the project, however, the requirements specified in the technical sections
shall take precedence over this list and this list is not to be interpreted as being complete.
1.
2. 02360 - Soil treatment: Field test termite treatment
3.
4.
6.
7.
9.
10. 11.
12.
02300 - Earthwork: Test imported fill materials if required
02740 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Smoothness tests
03300 - Cast-ln-Place Concrete: Test cylinders, slump test(s)
04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Test of grout mix
04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Prism testing
05100 - Structural Metal Framing: Welded connection test
0531 1 - Composite Steel Deck: Deck testinghspection when required.
05410 - Load-Bearing Metal Stud System: Steel framing properties, when
required.
09652 - Resilient Tile Flooring: Moisture content of concrete sub-floors.
CONTRACTORS QUALITY CONTROL
Where Specifications require that a particular product be installed and/or applied by an
Applicator approved by the Manufacturer, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure
that Subcontractor employed for such Work is approved. Such Subcontractor(s) shall
provide evidence of being approved when requested by the Architect.
Work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in the Work required. Conform to the
methods, standards and accepted practices of the Trade or Trades involved.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005
END OF SECTION
01 430- 1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Quality Control
SASC Southwesl, LLC
Phoenix. Las Veps
SECTION 01 500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
A. Comply with codes and regulations regarding potable drinking water, sanitation, dust
control, fire protection, and other temporary controls.
Remove temporary office facilities, toilets, storage sheds and other construction of
temporary nature from the site as soon as, in the opinion of the Architect, the progress of
the work will permit. Recondition and restore to a condition acceptable to the Architect,
areas of the site occupied by temporary facilities.
Obtain written approval from the Owner a minimum of 72 hours prior to disconnection or shutting off service or utility.
B.
C.
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Provide and pay for power service required from Utility and make arrangements for such
service.
Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at location as directed.
Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution
boxes. Provide flexible power cords as required.
Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location.
Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.
Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide branch circuits for power and lighting.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. Provide incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 wattslsq. ft.
Provide adequate floodlights, clusters and spot illumination to work areas after dark.
Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors,
pigtails, and lamps as required.
Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
B.
C.
D.
TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATING
A. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 01 500-1 CarlsbadTMGolf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
SASC swvmest. LLC Phoenix ' LaS V-S
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that
installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place.
Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn
or consumed parts.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F. in areas where construction is
in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
C.
D.
TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. At time of project mobilization, provide telephone for field office. A pay phone is not
acceptable. Maintain and pay for telephone service, including costs for long distance
service and calls.
1. Provide a fax machine with its own separate dedicated telephone line in the field
office.
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Provide, maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required for continued
operations.
Extend branch piping throughout the site to provide outlets for hoses with threaded
connections. B.
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facilities shall not be
used.
At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition than originally found. B.
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
BARRIERS
A.
Provide adequate number of fire extinguishers to protect the Work.
Comply with fire insurance and governing regulations.
Provide UL labeled ABC all-purpose fire extinguishers adequate in size and number.
Provide temporary office and storage areas with fire extinguishers.
Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.
Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.
Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.
Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage.
B.
C.
D.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 0 1 500-2 CarlsbatMGolf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
1.10 FENCING
A.
B.
Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.
Provide 6'-0" (1 830mm) high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and
pedestrian gates with locks.
0
C. Locate gates for access to work areas, as required. Close and lock after working hours.
1.1 1 TEMPORARY USE OF PERMANENT ELEVATORS
A. Elevators may be used for temporary service during construction after hoistway
enclosures are complete and electrical power is available. Use temporary machines or
permanent machines if they are operational. Work shall include, but is not limited to,
protection of hoistway openings, construction of temporary cars, protection of permanent
cars used for temporary service and staffing with qualified operating and maintenance
personnel. Upon completion of the Work, remove temporary elevator components,
restore finishes to original condition and replace worn or damaged parts of the permanent
system.
1.12 NOISE AND DUST CONTROL
A. Exercise controls to keep noise and dust during construction to a minimum. Traffic or
construction areas shall be sprinkled with water or chemicals as required and in
accordance with applicable regulatory requirements.
1.13 WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain pumping equipment.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect
site from soil erosion.
I .I4 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable
working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and
maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification
Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-
closing hardware and locks.
1.1 5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual
specification Sections.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. B.
C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or
movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1, 2005 0 1 500-3
Carlsba!$olf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Construction Facilities
and Temporary Controls
SASC Southwest. LLC
Phoenix. bs Vegas
1.16
1 .I7
1.18
1.19
1.20
E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. F.
SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work and existing facilities, and Owner's
operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism or theft.
Provide and pay for watchman service if necessary for adequate protection. B.
ACCESSROADS
A. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve
construction area.
B. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for
unimpeded traffic flow.
Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic.
C.
D.
E.
PARKING
A.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
Provide temporary surface parking areas to accommodate construction personnel.
Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and
orderly condition.
Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue
cleaning to eliminate dust.
Regularly remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off-site. Do
not allow to accumulate.
B.
C.
D.
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide 8 foot wide x 4 foot high project sign of exterior grade plywood and wood frame construction, painted to Architect's design and colors.
List title of project, names of Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Contractor.
Erect on site at location established by Architect.
No other signs are allowed without Owner's permission except those required by law.
B.
C.
D.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbaqiolf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 01 500-4 C-Specs /Construction Facilities
and Temporary Controls
SASC southwest. uc phoenix. L~S veeas
1.21 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table. A.
B. Locate offices and sheds as approved by Architect.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 0 1 500-5
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Construction Facilities
and Temporary Controls
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .Ol DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver manufactured materials in the original packages, containers or bundles, with the seals unbroken, identified by the name and mark of the Manufacturer. '
B. Deliver fabrications in as large assemblies as practicable. Fabrications specified to be
shop-primed or shop-finished shall be packaged or crated as required to preserve such
priming or finish intact and free from abrasion.
C. Store materials in a manner to properly protect from damage. Materials or equipment
damaged by handling, weather, dirt or other cause will not be acceptable.
D. Store materials so as to cause no obstructions. Store off sidewalks, roadways, and
underground services. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting materials and
equipment furnished under the Contract.
E. When a room in the Project is used as a shop or store room, the Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs, patching or cleaning necessary due to such use. Location of
such storage space shall be subject to approval of the Architect.
1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Whenever a product is specified by using a proprietary name or the name of a particular
Manufacturer or Vendor, the specific item mentioned shall be understood as establishing
type, function, dimension, appearance, and quality desired.
B. Other manufacturers' products will be accepted provided sufficient information is
submitted to allow the Architect to determine that products proposed are equivalent to
those named.
C. Requests for approval after award of a Contract:
1. Made only if the specified product is not available and shall be in the hands of the
Architect a minimum of 14 days prior to date Contractor is required to place an
order for the product.
Contractor shall request approval of such substitution, in writing, to the Architect.
The request shall specifically state the reason that the product is unavailable with
evidence to substantiate the reason.
Requests made directly to Architect by suppliers, subcontractors and distributors
that are not from the Contractor will not be accepted by the Architect or Owner.
Architect will approve or reject substitution in writing and in such form as the Architect directs.
Substitutions will not be considered if they are indicated or implied on Shop
Drawings or if acceptance will require substantial revision to the Contract
Documents.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3
March 1,2005 Carlsb$d Golf Course Clubhouse 01600-1 C-Specs /Materials and Equipment
SASC Swlhwest. LLC
Phoenix. Las Vegas
D. Contractor shall submit descriptive brochures, drawings, samples and other data as is
necessary to provide direct comparison to the specified materials after reviewing and
determining that product meets specified requirements. Submittals shall be well marked
and identified as to types and kind of the items being submitted for approval. Lack of
sufficient information will be cause for rejection. Reference to catalogs will not be
acceptable unless catalog is submitted with approval request.
E. In submitting a substitution, the Contractor makes the following representations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or
superior to specified product.
Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified
product.
Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is
available.
Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not
affect or delay progress schedule. Cost data included on the substitution request is complete. Claims for additional
costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent
are to be waived.
Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
Payment will be made for changes to building design, including NE design,
detailing, and construction costs by the substitution.
Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted
substitution will be complete in all respects.
6.
7.
8.
END OF SECTION
Carlstgd Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Materials and Equipment
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01 600-2
SAX SOUTHWEST, LLC
Phwnix * Las vegas
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SECTION 01 732
CUTTING AND PATCHING
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cutting, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill required to
complete Work, and for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Making several parts fit together properly.
Uncovering portions of Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
Removing and replacing defective and non-conforming Work.
Removing samples of installed Work required for testing, as directed by Architect.
Providing routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping
and electrical conduit.
SUBMITTALS
A. In advance of executing any cutting or alterations, submit written request to Architect
requesting consent to proceed with cutting which affects:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Work of Owner or other trades.
Structural value or integrity of any element of Project.
Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or
systems.
Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements.
Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
B. Include in request:
1. Identification of Project.
2. Description of affected Work.
3.
4.
5. Description of proposed Work:
Necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation.
Effect of Work of Owner or other trades, or structural or weatherproof integrity of
Project.
a.
b.
C.
d.
Alternatives to cutting and patching.
Written permission of trades whose Work will be affected.
Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
Trades which will execute Work.
Products proposed to be used.
Extent of refinishing to be done.
6.
7. Cost proposal, when applicable. a.
C. Submit written notice to Architect designating time Work will be uncovered to provide for
observation.
PAYMENT FOR COSTS
A. Cost caused by ill-timed . or defective Work or Work not conforming to Contract
Documents, including costs for additional services of Architect and Engineer to be paid by
Contractor.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01 732-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Cutting and Patching
SASC SOUTHWEST. UC Phoenix. Las vepas
B. Cost of Work done on written instructions of Architect, other than defective or
nonconforming Work, will be paid by Owner on approval of written Change Order.
Provide written cost proposals prior to proceeding with cutting and patching proposed by
Architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide for replacement of Work removed. Comply with Contract Documents for type of
Work standards and Specification requirements for each specific product involved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of Work, including elements subject to movement or damage
during cutting and patching, and excavating and backfilling. After uncovering Work,
inspect conditions affecting installation of new products and verify procedures with
Architect.
B. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions in writing to Architect/ Engineer. Do not
proceed with Work until further instructions are received.
PREPARATION
A. Provide shoring, bracing and supports as required to maintain structural integrity of Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Work from damage, including
elements which may be exposed by cutting and patching Work. Maintain excavations
free from water.
ERECTION, INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Performance:
1.
2.
3.
Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to
comply with and match specified tolerances and finishes.
Execute cutting and demolition by methods which prevent damage to other Work
to provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new Work.
Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which prevent damage to other
Work and settlement as specified in Section 02300.
B. Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for:
1.
2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.
Weather-exposed surfaces and moisture-resistant elements such as roofing,
sheet metal, sealants and waterproofing.
C. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes as shown on Drawings and as
specified.
D. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through
surfaces. Conform to fire code requirements for penetrations and maintain integrity of fire
walls and ceilings.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 0 1 732-2 C-Specs /Cutting and Patching
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - LaJ Vegas
E. Restore Work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide completed
Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and as required to match
surrounding areas and surfaces.
F. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even, matching finish as follows:
1.
2.
Painted Walls or Ceilings: To nearest intersection with another finish or corner.
Where Applied Finishes Occur (Le wallcovering, tile, wood paneling): To nearest
intersection of finish without damage to adjacent material. Where match of
pattern, grain, texture, or similar finish cannot be made, refinish area to
intersection with other finish or corner.
Manufactured or Shop Fabricated Materials: Replace entire affected surface or
material. 3.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 01 732-3
Carlsbad golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Cutting and Patching
SASC southwest. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
.
SECTION 01 770
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
FINAL CLEANING
A. Perform the following special cleaning for trades at completion of Work.
experienced workmen or professional cleaners for the final cleaning:
1.
2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
a.
Employ
Remove marks, stains, fingerprints, soil and dirt from paint, stain and wall
Remove spots, soil, paint and mastic from tile work and wash same.
Clean fixtures, equipment and piping; remove stains, paint, dirt and dust.
Remove temporary floor protections; clean and polish floors.
Clean concrete walks and slabs of plaster or cement droppings, paint and other
objectionable materials to present a neat, clean appearance.
Clean exterior and interior metal surfaces, including doors and windows and their
frames.
Remove oil, stains, dust, dirt, paint and the like from items required to have a
polished finish; polish and leave without fingermarks or other blemishes.
Wash glass inside and outside.
- .. covering.
B. Make building(s) ready for occupancy in every respect. Lay heavy building paper in main
circulation areas to protect the floors until final inspection and acceptance.
C. Existing improvements, inside or outside the property which are disturbed, damaged or
destroyed by the Work under the Contract shall be restored to the condition in which they
originally were, or to the satisfaction of the Architect.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate record of
changes or deviations from the Contract Documents and Shop Drawings, indicating the
Work as actually installed. Record information in the appropriate locations on a record
set of blueline prints of the Drawings and Shop Drawings and a copy of the Specifications
which are maintained solely for the purpose of this documentation. Keep this record set
of Contract Documents and Shop Drawings at the project site for review by the Owner
and Architect. Information contained in the record documents shall include, but not be
limited to:
1. Modifications made by Addenda, Change Orders, Construction Change
Directives and Architect's Supplemental Instructions which shall be transferred to
the record documents.
2. Location of site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, cables and similar work, dimensioned horizontally to permanent points of reference and located vertically
by indicating depth of burial. Dimensions shall be accurate within 26 inches.
Location of building plumbing piping, sprinkler piping, control valves, heating and
air conditioning equipment, mechanical piping, ductwork, major conduit runs,
power, control and alarm wiring, etc., dimensioned horizontally to permanent
points of reference. Dimensions shall be accurate within 6 inches. By notation, describe the vertical location of the item such as "below slab," "above ceiling,"
etc.
3.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 01 770-1
Carlsbad Go!fNICourse Clubhouse
C-Specs /Contract Closeout
SASC SaNnVest, LLC
Phoenix. Las vegas
4.
5.
6.
Modifications made to accommodate field conditions.
Location and function of mechanical and electrical control devices and shut-off
valves.
Revise Drawings and panel schedules to show final circuiting of electrical fixtures
and equipment.
B. The Architect will provide the Contractor with a set of reproducible drawings, of the
complete original bidding documents, at Contractor's expense. Seals and signatures of
Registrants shall be completely removed and/or permanently obscured. Contractor shall
provide the following on the Drawings:
1. Changes in the Contract Documents, secured with prior approval of the Architect,
recorded in a neat readable manner, in black ink or pencil, by a competent
drafter. Deletions shall be made by erasure or sepia eradicator only.
Prior to application for final payment, transfer all changes, information and
notations made to the record blueline prints to a set of sepia mylar transparencies.
2.
C. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, deliver the complete set of Record Documents
including blueline prints, sepia mylar transparencies, Shop Drawings and annotated
Specifications to the Architect for approval.
D. Owner's Manual: Prior to final payment, submit one (1) hard-back, loose-leaf binder
containing the following required submittals and any others required in other Sections,
suitably typed, indexed and labeled for ready reference:
1. Subcontractors, major suppliers list with companies names, addresses and telephone numbers.
2. Warranties and certifications.
3. Affidavit from general and subcontractors on use of asbestos free materials.
4. Maintenance/operation instructions and parts list (other than Divisions 15 and 16).
5. List of Extra Materials supplied to Owner, signed by Architect.
6. Other items required by the Specifications.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work specified under Divisions 15 and 16, furnish two (2) complete bound copies of operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists
for materials, equipment and systems, including electrical and control items, being
supplied. Furnish separate copies for each Division.
B. Operating instructions shall include complete operating sequence, control diagrams,
description of method of operating machinery, machine serial numbers, factory order
numbers, parts, tests, instruction books, suppliers phone numbers and addresses and
individual equipment guarantees. Parts lists shall be complete in every respect, showing
parts and part numbers for ready reference.
C. Maintenance instructions shall include a written list of required and suggested
maintenance for mechanical, plumbing, electrical or other equipment or features in the
project. Each item shall contain a brief description of the maintenance required as well as
the recommended time frame or period for the maintenance. Include lists of filter sizes
for air handling equipment, indicated "washable" or "disposable" and for which unit the
filter is for. Shut off valves, etc., must be clearly marked on as-constructed drawings.
D. Assemble maintenance manual and operating instructions in hard back loose leaf
binders. Suitably label and index material for ready reference.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 01 770-2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Contract Closeout
1.04
1.05
E. Upon substantial completion of the Project Work, submit one copy of the Maintenance
Manual and Operating Instructions to the Architect for approval. Upon receipt of Notice of
Approval, deliver the additional copy to the Owner.
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Deliver spare parts, tools, extra stocks of material and similar physical items required by
individual specification sections to the Owner with a copy of the transmittal to the
Architect. Obtain signed receipts from the Owner for all items.
B. Change over construction locks to permanent keying system. Deliver required number of
keys to the Owner with a copy of the transmittal to the Architect. Obtain receipts from the
Owner for delivered items.
WARRANTIES
A. Provide duplicate, notarized copies of documents required in Section 9.10.2 of the
General Conditions.
B. Submit warranties required by individual specification Sections in duplicate, assembled in
durable binders with a Table of Contents.
C. The date of commencement of warranties shall be the date of Substantial Completion
except as may be modified by AIA Document G-704, Certificate of Substantial
Completion, or by other written agreement with the Owner.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 0
March 1,2005 01 770-3 Carlsbad GojLCourse Clubhouse C-Specs /Contract Closeout
SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Site preparation and grading.
2. Building excavating and backfilling.
3.
4. 5. Finish grading.
Trenching, backfilling and compacting for building and site utilities.
Excavation and grading for site paving, curbs and sidewalks .
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Native or natural soils: Undisturbed soils present at site in their natural state or
conditions. Materials which are essentially free of vegetation or organic matter and do not
include trash or other deleterious materials.
B. Existing fill soils: Materials present at site that have been disturbed, possibly transported,
and are not in their natural undisturbed state.
C. Imported fill soils: Materials transported onto site.
D. Finished Grade: Floor level for interior footings, and the lowest adjacent grade (either
floor level or outside grade) within 5’4” of foundations for perimeter wall or exterior
column footings.
E. Building Perimeter: The extreme outer edge of footing. This location of the building
perimeter is to be used in determining the required lateral extent of engineered fill.
F. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within building lines.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports:
1.
2.
Submit test results for imported fill materials, if required, to be used directly to the
testing laboratory with a copy to Architect in accordance with Section 01430.
Test results shall clearly indicate:
a.
b. Hardness
C. Compactability.
d. Presence of organic contaminants, whether or not below EPA action
levels. e. Presence of hazardous and/or regulated wastes and contaminants,
whether or not below EPA action levels.
f. Suitability for proposed usage.
Testing laboratory shall notify Architect of non-conforming fill material submittals.
Types of materials and composition.
3.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191 -3
March 1.2005 02300-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Earthwork
SASC souvmesl, LLC Phoenix - Las VegaS
B. As-Built Drawings:
1. Maintain previously recorded utilities and accurately record location of:
a. Newly encountered utilities remaining.
b. Rerouted utilities.
C. New utilities by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope
gradients.
Submit in accordance with Section 01 770. 2.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances
including the City of Carlsbad grading requirements and Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction. Where geotechnical report, General Structural Notes, or
notes on drawings state more restrictive requirements, the requirements of the
geotechnical report, General Structural Notes, or notes on drawings shall govern.
B. Staking: Staking shall be performed by a Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor currently
registered in the state where the Project is located. One person only shall be responsible
for staking the Project, however, additional staff may be used (under direct supervision of
responsible person) for larger projects.
C. Observation of Geotechnical Engineer: Every phase of the earthwork shall be performed
under observation and testing directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.
1.05 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Soil Report:
1. Soil report provided by the Owner for design of this Project was prepared by
Leighton and Associates Geotechnical Consultants and is entitled: Geotechnical
Investigation for the Proposed Carlsbad Municipal Golf Course, Carlsbad,
California, project number 4841 363-006.
Neither the Owner or Architect guarantees the accuracy of the report nor the
continuity of the soil conditions indicated at boring locations.
Portions of the soil report incorporated, either by reprint or reference, into these
Specifications are those which relate to the quality of materials and workmanship
and become a part of the Contract Documents. Quantities of excavation and fill
materials shall be as indicated on Drawings, or as required by actual conditions
as depicted by the soil borings presented in the Soil Report.
2.
3.
B. Existing Conditions:
1.
2.
Bidders are expected to visit the site to form their own conclusions as to the
character of the Work under this Section.
Due to previous site development, special attention shall be given to locating and
removing existing subsurface remnants of former facilities, backfilled zones, and
soils disturbed by demolition operations.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02300-2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Earthwork
SASC southwest. LLC
phoenix * Las vegas
C. Environmental Requirements: Place, spread or roll fill materials during favorable weather
conditions. When the Work is interrupted by rain, do not resume fill operations until
evidence is furnished which establishes that moisture content and density of the
previously placed fill are as specified.
1. Surface drainage: Provide and maintain positive surface drainage during
excavation. Prevent infiltration of water into utility or foundation excavations from
whatever sources as may exist.
2. Dust control: Comply with requirements of governing authorities. Use whatever
means necessary to control dust on and near the Work and on and near off-site
borrow, storage and spoil areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor's
operations during performance of the Work, or if resulting from the conditions in
which the Contractor leaves the site. Thoroughly moisten surfaces as required to
prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent
performance of other Work on the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fill Soil: The onsite soils are generally suitable for use as compacted fill provided they are
free of organic material (fill material shall not contain more than 1 percent of organic
materials by volume), debris, and rock fragments larger than 6 inches in maximum
dimension.
B. Imported fill materials:
1. Clean, free of:
a. Vegetation.
b. Organic contaminants.
C. Debris.
d. High expansion potential material.
e. Low strength.
f. Oversized material.
9- The gradation of imported engineering fill material is determined by ASTM C136,
and shall be within the following limits:
Hazardous and/or regulated wastes and contaminates.
2.
Sieve Size
{Sauare Openings)
8 inches
No. 200
Percent Passing
By Drv Weight
100
50 max.
3. Material shall have a plasticity index of no more than 10 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D4318.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02300-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsN/Earthwork
C. Under-Slab Fill:
1. Fill directly under slabs-on-grade shall be granular base having gradation as
determined by ASTM C136 within the following limits:
Sieve Size
{Sauare ODeninas)
Percent Passing
BY DW Weiclht
1-118" 100
No. 4 38-65
No. 8 25-60
No. 30 10-40
No. 200 3-1 2
2. The material shall have a maximum plasticity index of 5 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D4318. The coarse aggregate shall have a percent of
wear when subjected to the Los Angeles Abrasion Test (ASTM C131) of no
greater than 50.
D.
E.
Backfill: Material excavated from the site, provided it is free of debris or vegetation.
Pipe Bedding Fill: Material with a sand equivalent greater than 30 conforming to the
.Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify survey data. Stake out work and verify as to location and elevation. Carefully
maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points; if disturbed or destroyed,
replace as directed.
B. Prior to grading, all areas to receive structural fill or structures shall be cleared of surface
and .subsurface obstructions, including any existing debris, potentially compressible
material (such as topsoil, colluvium, alluvium, weathered formation materials, and
undocumented fill soils), and stripped of vegetation such as brush, grass, roots, and other
deleterious material.
C. In general at all areas of proposed structural fill, alluvium, colluvium, topsoil, weathered
formational soils, and undocumented fill soils shall be excavated, moisture conditioned or
dried back to obtain a near optimum moisture content, and then compacted prior to
placing any additional fill. Area of removal below structural irn provements shall be
projected downward at a 1 :1 (horizontal to vertical) to competent formational material
(where applicable) prior to the placement of additional fill soils.
D. After clearing and stripping operations and prior to placement of any additional fills, all areas proposed to receive structural fill or slopes with inclinations greater than 3 to 1 shall
be scarified to a minimum depth of 6 inches, moisture conditioned and recompacted.
Scarification shall continue until soils are broken down and free of large clay lumps or
clods and the working surface is reasonably uniform, flat, and free of uneven features that
would inhibit uniform compaction.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02300-4 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-S pecs TM/Earthwork
SAX souvlwesf uc
Phoenix * Las V-s
E. Alluvial removals in the commercial area located in the southwestern portion of the site,
(adjacent to Palomar Airport Road and Hidden Valley Road) are estimated to be generally
in the order of up to 18-20 feet in depth, and will be limited by the depth of ground water in
this area. The colluvial removals will generally range from 3 to 7 feet, while removals of
topsoil and near-surface soil will be on the order of 2 to 4 feet.
1. Deeper removals may be required in areas proposed for structural improvements
due to localized thicker zones of compressible soils.
2. In the central canyon area alluvial depths of approximately 50 feet were
encountered.
3. Other areas of undocumented fill although limited in extent may require complete
removal and recompaction at areas of structural improvements.
4. Remedial removal depths are estimates only. The actual extent of removal shall
be determined by the Geotechnical Engineer based on the field evaluation of
exposed conditions during grading.
F. Soft, loose, dry, saturated, spongy, organic-rich, highly fractured or otherwise unsuitable
ground shall be overexcavated to full depths encountered as directed by the Geotechnical
Engineer.
G. Slopes steeper than 5 to 1 (horizontal to vertical units) shall be stepped or benched with
the lowest bench or key a minimum of 15 feet wide and 2 feet deep into suitable
subgrade. Other benches shall be a minimum of 4 feet high into suitable subgrade.
Slopes less than 5 to 1 shall also be benched or otherwise overexcavated to provide a flat
subgrade for fill materials.
H. Holes resulting from removal of buried obstructions which extend below finish site grades
should be replaced with suitable compacted fill material.
I. Existing Utilities:
1.
2.
3.
Identify known below grade utilities. Stake and flag locations.
Identify and flag above grade utilities.
Maintain, re-route, extend and protect as required existing utilities remaining
which pass through Work area as indicated. Utilities which are discovered during
the course of construction which are unrecorded on Contract Documents shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect immediately upon discovery. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities obstructing the Work.
Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, discontinue affected
Work; notify Architect.
Pay costs for this Work, except that covered by utility company.
4.
5.
6.
3.02 SUBGRADE
A. Prepare subgrade at building areas to proper elevation to receive under-slab fill and sand
layer over subgrade barrier membrane. See Section 03300.
B. Prepare subgrade at paved areas to proper elevation to receive base course materials.
See Section 02741.
C. Grade as required to bring entire remainder of site to finished grade as indicated on
drawings.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3
March 1,2005 02300-5 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-S pecs /Earthwork
3.03 EXCAVATION - GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Excavate for foundations and footings to provide vertical walls and corners square. Keep
entire excavation free from loose material. Conform to dimensions and elevations
indicated with allowances for erection of forms, shoring, waterproofing, and inspection of
footings.
Material to be excavated shall be non-classified and shall include earth or other materials
encountered in excavating.
Excavations of the onsite materials may generally be accomplished with conventional
heavy-duty earthwork equipment. It is not anticipated that blasting will be required or that
significant quantities of oversized rock (Le. rock with maximum dimensions greater than 6
inches) will be generated during grading (excluding Santiago Peak Volcanics). However, if
oversized rock is encountered, it should be placed as fill in accordance with the
Geotechnical Investigation Report.
Drawings show predetermined elevations or depths for bottoms of footings. Should additional depth of excavation be necessary, the Contractor will be paid for the Work in
accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions.
Shore and brace excavations if necessary to prevent cave-ins. Remove shoring before
backfilling is completed, but not until permanent supports are in place.
If excavation is carried below depth indicated, scarify, moisture condition and recompact
exposed subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches and replace area of overexcavation
with properly placed and compacted fill material.
Place excess excavated material on the site in the area designated or as directed by
Architect.
Protect utility services uncovered by excavation.
1.
2.
Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or
seal such lines and identify at grade.
Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or
extended, on Project Record Documents.
3.04 EXCAVATION - UTILITIES
A. Trenching:
1. General:
a.
b.
2. Width:
a.
b.
Perform trenching .required for the installation of items where the
trenching is not specifically described in other Sections of these
Specifications.
Excavate for underground utilities, including water, steam, condensate,
natural gas pipe lines, fire protection lines, sewers, electrical lines,
cables, ducts and other electrical items.
Make trenches open vertical construction with sufficient width to provide free working space at both sides of the trench and around the installed
item as required for caulking, joining, backfilling, and compacting.
Provide for a minimum net clearance of 6 inches and a maximum net
clearance of 12 inches on each side of the barrel of the pipe and to allow
the backfill to be placed and properly compacted. Exceptions to these
clearances will occur at encasement or special construction.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 02300-6 C-Specsm/Earthwork
SASC southwst uc Phoenix - Las Vegas
3. Depth:
a.
b.
Trench as required to provide the elevations shown on the Drawings.
Where elevations are not shown on the Drawings or specified in other
sections of the specifications, trench to sufficient depth to give a
minimum of 18 of fill above the top of the pipe, measured from the
adjacent finished grade.
Where the bottom of excavation is found to be soft and cannot support
the pipe, the depth shall be extended until solid bearing is reached.
Backfill to pipe foundation grade with granular material or earthfill and
thoroughly compact to assure a firm foundation for the pipe.
Where excavation is in rock, or caliche, cut to depth of at least 8 inches
below pipe invert elevations.
a. Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and
support of pipes and conduit.
b. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and
barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading.
d. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and
flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms
and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape
bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference.
Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.
Do not disturb any portion of or remove support from a piping system that has
thrust blocks or other constraints against movement while the system is in
service.
Correction of faulty grades: Where trench excavation is inadvertently carried below proper elevations, backfill with pipe bedding material and compact to
provide a firm and unyielding subgrade or foundation without additional
compensation.
a.
b.
C.
d.
4. Trench Bottoms:
e.
5.
6.
7. Trench bracing:
Properly brace and support trenches in accordance with requirements of
governing authorities.
Brace, sheet, and support trench walls in such a manner that the ground
alongside the excavation will not slide or settle, and that existing
improvements of every kind, whether on public or private property, will be
protected from damage.
Arrange bracing, sheeting, and shoring so as not to place stress on
portions of the completed Work until the general construction thereof has
proceeded far enough to provide sufficient strength.
Repairs and replacement: In the event of damage to such improvements,
immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the
Architect without additional compensation.
Removal of trench bracing: Exercise care in the drawing and removal of
sheeting, shoring, bracing, and timbering to prevent collapse and caving of the excavation faces being supported.
Grading and stockpiling trenched material: Control the stockpiling of trenched
material in a manner to prevent water running into the excavations. Do not
obstruct surface drainage, but provide means whereby storm water is diverted
into existing gutters, other surface drains, or temporary drains.
C.
8.
9.
IO.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 02300-7
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs"/Earthwork
SASC southwest. LLC
Phoenix * Las Vegas
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
B. Crossing Protection
1. Provide adequate temporary crossover for pedestrian and vehicular traffic
including guard rails, lamps and flags, as required by agencies having jurisdiction
and as directed. Remove provisions for crossing protection when they are no longer needed. 2.
C. Underpinning: Where excavation work is required under or adjacent to existing footings,
under-pin as required to prevent damaging existing construction.
BEDDING AND BACKFILL*OF UTILITIES
A. General: All bedding and backfill of utility trenches shall be done in accordance with the
applicable provisions of Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
B. Pipe Bedding: Bedding shall be placed to 1 foot over top of the conduit and densified by
jetting. The Geotechnical Engineer shall observe jetting of bedding around the conduits.
C. Backfill shall be placed and densified to a minimum of 90 percent of maximum from 1 foot
above the top of the conduit to the surface.
UNDER-SLAB FILL
A. Place under-slab fill to the thickness and grade indicated, smooth and even, free of voids.
Compact to specified density. Grade to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
BACKFILLING - GENERAL
A. After completion of the foundations, walls and other construction, and removal of forms,
clean the excavations of trash and debris.
B. Place the backfill symmetrically against each side of the walls to prevent eccentric
loading. Place backfill in horizontal 6 inch layers with the proper moisture content for the
required degree of compaction.
C. Backfill pipe and conduit trenches in a manner to prevent disturbance to the pipes or
conduits. Fill under and around pipes thoroughly to a point approximately 12 inches
above the top of the pipe and compact. Backfill remainder of trench in 6 inch layers and
compact.
BACKFILLING - UTILITIES
A. Backfill pipe and conduit trenches in a manner to prevent disturbance to the pipes or
conduits. Fill under and around pipes thoroughly to a point approximately 12 inches
above the top of the pipe and compact. Backfill remainder of trench in 6 inch layers and
compact.
B. Backfilling prior to approvals: Do not allow or cause portions of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of this Section prior to required
inspections. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been
inspected, uncover such work at no additional compensation.
C. Backfill simultaneously on both sides of utility to prevent displacement.
D. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated
within 18 inches of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 02300-8 C-Specsm/Earthwork
3.09
3.10
3.1 1
E. Provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 2'-6" below
surface of roadways. After installation and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in
a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6
inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
F.
COMPACTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Compacting of fills and foundation soils shall be in near-horkontal lifts not exceeding 8
inches in loose thickness, or greater thickness as approved by the Geotechnical
Engineer.
Fill soils shall be watered, dried back, blended, and/or mixed, as necessary to attain a
relatively uniform moisture content at or slightly above optimum in accordance with ASTM
D1557.
After each layer has been moisture conditioned, mixed and evenly spread, uniformly
compact to not less than 90 percent of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM
D1557.
Compaction equipment shall be adequately sized and be either specifically designed for
soil compaction or of proven reliability to efficiently achieve the specified level of
compaction with uniformity.
Placement and compaction of fill on slopes shall be accomplished as indicated in the
Geotechnical Report and as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.
Soil disturbed during construction shall be compacted to the applicable percent
compaction as specified herein.
Utilize mechanical compaction equipment in grading operations. In no case shall water
settling or "jetting" be employed. Vibratory compaction equipment employed shall be
subject to the approval of the Architect to ensure that vibrations will not be created that
will affect existing construction or slopes.
FINISH GRADING
A. After construction and final clean-up of exterior, and removal of debris, grade building site
to slopes and elevations directed.
B. Leave graded areas raked smooth.
C. Remove excess material from the site or as otherwise directed by the Architect.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Earthwork, footings depths, and excavations for foundations shall be inspected by the Geotechnical Engineer to verify allowable soil bearing and low settlement and swell
potential, and to make any additional recommendations.
B. Tests: Inspection and testing of earthwork shall be performed by a testing laboratory in
accordance with Section 01430.
1. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.
2. Tests of materials may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 02300-9 C-Specsm/Earthwork
SASC Swthwest LLC
Phoenix - Las Vegas
3. Field tests for moisture content and relative compaction of fills shall be done at
locations and frequency at the discretion of the Geotechnical Engineer based on
field conditions encountered. Compaction test locations will not necessarily be
selected on a random basis. Test locations shall be selected to verify the
adequacy of compaction levels in areas that are judged to be prone to inadequate
compaction.
Provide one field density test of under-slab fill for every 2,000 square feet of
building area.
Field density tests shall be taken at intervals not exceeding 2 feet in vertical rise
and/or 1,000 cubic yards of compacted fill soils embankment.
Provide at least one test on slope faces for each 5,000 square feet of slope face
and/or each 10 feet of vertical height of slope.
Provide two field density tests of wall backfill at locations and elevations directed.
Provide at least two field density tests for every 300 feet of trench and 2 feet of
trench fill.
Provide one field density test of prepared subgrade for every 2,000 square feet of
building area.
Soil compaction which does not meet the specified requirements shall be
recompacted and reworked as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer through the
Architect.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
3.1 3 PROTECTION
A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, keep areas free of trash and debris.
Repair and establish grades in any areas settled, rutted or eroded.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse 02300-10 C-Specs m/Earthwork
~~
SA.% SouVlwest. LLC Phoenix. Las vegas
SECTION 02360
SOIL TREATMENT
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pretreatment to provide chemical barrier to protect buildings and contents against
attack by subterranean termites.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit label indicating Manufacturer's chemical analysis of treatment
materials prior to application. Submit evidence of EPA approval and State registration.
B. Test Reports: Submit reports of field tests for termite treatment.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Registered applicator with 5 years experience and licensed by
the State of California.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the State of California.
Chemicals shall be approved for use and registered by
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform to Manufacturer's instructions and Governmental Agencies' requirements.
B. Deliver materials to Project in original sealed and labeled containers of Manufacturer.
1.05 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply chemicals in inclement weather or when there is a possibility of rain.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of soil treatment, and as a condition of final acceptance, provide Owner
with written unlimited warranty providing:
1. Application was made at concentration, rate, and method in compliance with
Specifications contained herein.
2. Warrants effectiveness of the soil treatment against subterranean termite
infestation for a period of not less than 5 years from acceptance and completion date of Project.
Warrants effectiveness of soil treatment against vegetation growth for a period of
six (6) months.
3.
B. Upon evidence of subterranean termite activity within warranty period, re-treat area to
stop infestation of affected areas and repair damage to building and contents at no cost to
Owner.
1. Re-treatment under warranty sufficient to prevent termites from attacking building
or its contents during remainder of initial warranty period, plus one additional year
for each time re-treatment under warranty is required.
D.F. Architects 961 231SASC 05-1 91 -3 Carlsbad Golf C#rse Clubhouse March 1,2005 02360-1 C-Specs /Soil Treatment
SASC souvmesl uc Phoenix. Las V-
2. Complete re-treatment of the building shall be rendered upon the third recurrence
of subterranean termites in the same structure within 5 year period from the date
of project acceptance.
Damage caused by infestations and by re-treatment shall be repaired at no cost
to the Owner.
3.
C. Draft warranty in favor of Owner, successors or assigns.
1.
2.
Pre-printed FHA or VA guarantee forms shall not be acceptable.
The Owner and the applicator reserve the option to renew termite protection on
an annual basis after the expiration of the warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Termite Treatment: Apply one of the following chemicals as a water emulsion (no oil
solutions permitted):
1. Dragnet FSR (Permethrin), FMC Corporation www.fmc.com
2. Torpedo (Permethrin); IC1 Americas, Inc.
3. Biflex TC (3rd generation synthetic pyrethroid), FMC Corporation www.fmc.com
4. Prelude (Permethrin); Zeneca Professional Products, W ilmington DE
wwwzenecam-oducts.com
5. Prevail FT (Cypermethrin); FMC Corporation www.fmc.com
6. Talstar (Bifenthrin), FMC Corporation. www.fmc.com
7. Premise (Imidacloprid)
8. Demon TC (Cypermethrin)
9. Termidor (Fipronil), Termidor Termite Control - www.termidorhome.com.
B. Mix solutions in accordance with Manufacturer's directions to highest concentration allowable
by label.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION - TERMITE CONTROL
A. Time of Application:
1.
2.
3.
Notify Architect to be present during application, at least 24 hours prior to application of
materials.
Apply chemical treatment during normal working hours in order to be subject to
inspection.
Do not treat soil and fill areas that are excessively wet or after heavy rains to avoid
surface flow of toxicants.
B. Application:
Department of Agriculture Forest Service Home and Garden Bulletin 64, revised 1986.
1. Provide applicator trucks with approved measuring flow meters. 2. Apply chemicals on soils and compacted ABC fill materials under entire
subsurfaces of concrete floor slabs, entrance platforms, and slabs abutting
building walls, in minimum quantities stated on label.
a. Under slabs on grade.
b.
In accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations, local codes and U.S.
Along exterior perimeter of slab, apply in strip one foot wide.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02360-2 Carlsbad Golf Cgurse Clubhouse C-SpecsT /Soil Treatment
c.
d.
Applied adjacent to interior side of foundation of buildings.
Applied beneath sidewalk(s), entrance(s) and other slab(s) abutting the
structure for a distance not less than 3'-0" extending from and adjacent to
the building
Apply a strip one foot wide along interior and exterior sides of foundation stem
walls. Provide treatment on both sides of interior partitions where slab has been
thickened or at stem foundation walls. Treat expansion and cold joints, and other areas where concrete slabs will be
penetrated by plumbing mechanical, electrical or other construction features.
Treat interior cell voids within concrete masonry unit (CMU) foundation walls and
piers below floor line and apply with emulsion type treatment that will adhere to
interior surfaces of block cavities.
Vertical barriers shall be established around the base of foundations, plumbing
lines, foundation walls, along expansion/contraction and cold joints, at slab
penetrations and wherever required by the manufacturer's instructions.
If the above specified method(s) of treatment are not possible, rodding and
trenching may be used only under the observation(s) of the Owner's
representative, and if rodding and trenching is approved by the Architect prior to
proceeding. Rodding and trenching shall extend from the finished floor to the top
of the footings and special care shall be taken not to disturb applied waterproofing
or other buried facilities. Rodding and trenching applications shall be done in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C. Do not disturb aggregate base course and treated soil between application of poison and
pouring of concrete.
1. Re-treat soil or compacted fill which has been disturbed after soil poisoning, due
to plumbing and electrical changes or omissions.
2. Should rainy weather occur prior to pouring concrete slab over treated ABC, re-
treat the complete area at the discretion of Architect, and at no additional cost to
Owner.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: Chemical analysis tests shall be made of materials used on the basis of one test
for each 10,000 square feet of treated area. Samples and test may be taken of both concentrates and the dilute materials as being applied. See Section 01430 for provisions
covering payment for testing.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Adjacent property, trees and plants shall be protected from injury and damage as result of
operations in this Section.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123EASC 05-191-3 March 1.2005 02360-3 Carlsbad Golf C,turse Clubhouse C-Specs /Soil Treatment
SA.% sou~l. LLC Phoenix ' Las vegas
SECTION 02620
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Footing and under-floor drain pipe and drainage gravel fill as shown on
Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, design data and installation
instructions.
B. Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification that products furnished meet specification
requirements.
C. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01770 -
Contract Closeout.
1. Project Record Documents: As-built drawings indicated final location and
elevation of drainage piping.
2. Certification: Certification signed by Contractor indicating that drain pipe system
was successfully tested for proper operation and drainage.
1.03 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping:
packaging with labels intact.
Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened
B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Drainage Pipe and Fittings: Perforated polyvinyl chloride pipe comforming to ASTM
D2729, complete with bends, reducers, adapters, couplings, collars, and joint materials
B. Filter Fabric: Geotextile filter fabric of polypropylene or polyester fibers, or both.
2.02 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense water
impervious composite.
B. Drainage Fill: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and
natural sand with 100 percent passing a 1/2-inch sieve and 0-5 percent passing a No. 50
sieve.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 June 5,2000 C$rlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse 02620-1 C-Specs /Foundation Drainage System
C. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone
and natural sand with 100 percent passing a l-ln-inch sieve and 0-5 percent passing a
No. 50 sieve.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be
concealed by this Work.
PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Remove debris and soil materials larger than 6 inches in size and
provide level base at excavation to receive foundation drainage system.
INSTALLATION
A. Impervious Fill Base at Footings: Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to
bottom of completed footing. Place and compact impervious fill continuous along footing
to not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Pipe Bedding Filtering Material: Place supporting layer of filtering material over
compacted impervious fill material at footings and compacted subgrade at underfloor
drainage system where drainage pipe is to be laid to a loose depth of not less than 4
inches (1 OOmm), unless indicated otherwise. Slope as required for proper pipe drainage.
C. Drain Pipe: Begin installation at low-point of system. Lay drain pipe solidly bedded in
filtering material with perforations down and joints tightly closed. Provide full bearing for
each pipe section throughout its length to true grades and alignment, and continuous
slope in direction of flow. Provide bends, reducers, adapters, couplings, and collars as
required for complete installation.
D. Water Testing: Water test drain lines prior to placement of final filtering material and
drainage fill to assure free flow without obstruction or back-up. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and retest system until proper drainage is obtained.
Filtering Material: After successful testing and approval of drain piping, place additional
filtering material to a depth of 4 inches around sides and top of drain piping.
Drainage Fill: Place drainage fill over drain lines after satisfactory testing and covering of
drain lines with filtering material. Completely cover drain lines to a width of at least 6
inches on each side of pipe and extend 6 inch vertical layer adjacent to foundation wall to 12 inches below finished grade elevation. At underfloor drainage system place
compacted thickness of drainage fill material to elevation of compacted subgrade below
under-slab fill material.
E.
F.
G. Place 6 inch compacted thickness of impervious fill material over drainage fill material to
6 inches below finished grade.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 June 5,2000 Cgrlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse 02620-2 C-Specs /Foundation Drainage System
SASC southwesl. uc Phoenix. Las Vegas
H. Place filter fabric between drainage fill material and backfill materials lapping all edges a
minimum of 4 inches.
3.05 CLEANING
A. During.the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of
excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean
condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191 -3 Cgrlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse June 5,2000 02620-3 C-Specs /Foundation Drainage System
SASC southwest uc Phoenix - Las Vegas
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUBMITTALS
SECTION 02741
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
A. Design Mix: Submit design mix-formula for asphalt concrete not less than 7 days in
advance of actual placement of material.
8. Certificates: Submit Certificate of Compliance indicating that materials to be incorporated
in Work meet Specification requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Transport bituminous mixtures to site in clean trucks and in manner to prevent
segregation of materials or inclusion of foreign substances.
B. Mix to consist of specified aggregate and bitumen.
C. Asphalt surface course mixture to have minimum temperature of 285 degrees F. (and
maximum temperature of 350 degrees F..
SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1.
2.
Place asphaltic concrete when surface is dry, when the ambient temperature in
shade is 40 degrees F. and rising, or above 50 degrees F. if falling.
Do not place asphaltic concrete when weather is foggy, rainy, or when base on
which material is to be placed is wet or frozen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate Base Course: Base course shall conform to ASTM C136 and C117. The percentage composition by weight shall be within the following limits:
1. Sieve Size
Square ODening
i -1 /a“
No. 4
No. 8
No. 30 No. 200
Percentage by
Weiaht Passinq
100
38 - 65
25 - 60
10 - 40
3-12
The material shall have a maximum plasticity index of 5.
2. Aggregate: Clean and free of organic matter and of such a nature that it can be compacted to a dense and firm layer capable of supporting loaded trucks and self-propelled pavers without rutting.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02741-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs”/Asphaltic Concrete Paving
SASC Southwest, UC Phoenix - Las Vegas
3. Deliver aggregate to site in thoroughly blended condition and handle in manner to
prevent excessive segregation. Do not mix underlying soil or subbase with
aggregate base material. Do not mix underlying soil or subbase with aggregate
base material.
6. Tack Coat: Emulsion SSlH diluted in the proportion of approximately 50 percent water
and 50 percent emulsion.
C. Asphaltic Concrete Paving:
1. Asphalt cement: Conform to the requirements of AI PCD-7 in accordance with
schedule below. Mixing temperature to be not less tyhan 250 degrees F., or
higher than 325 degrees F.
Grade Time of Asphalt Placing
AR40 October through May
AR80 June through September
2. Mineral aggregate: Consist of coarse aggregate of crushed stone or gravel
composed of hard, durable particles and a filler of finely crushed stone, sand or
other finely divided mineral matter. The composite material to be uniformly graded from coarse to fine and conform to the following grading:
Mix Desinnation - Percent Passing
Sieve Size
1"
314"
112"
318" No. 4
No. 8 No. 30
No. 200
- 6-1
100
80-1 00
65-85
55-75
40-60.
25-45
10-30
2- 8
c-314
100
90-1 00
75-1 00
65-90
45-70
30-55
15-35
2- 8
- D-I /2
1 00
97-100
85-100
70-90
50-75
35-65
20-40
2- 8
Normal amount of asphalt cement to be added to the aggrege.3, by weight, to be 5.
6.0 percent of the weight of the admixture. to
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Placing Equipment: Self-contained power machine for spreading, shaping, and finishing,
capable of producing the specified degree of smoothness. Additional placing equipment
shall consist of hand tools, such as shovels and rakes, required to correct irregularities in
the pavement.
6. Rolling Equipment: Adequate power-drive rolling equipment. Rolling wheels to be
equipped with adjustable scrapers and sprinkling devices to keep the wheels wet and
prevent adhesion of the mixture. Furnish a pneumatic-tired roller.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02741 -2 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTMIAsphaltic Concrete Paving
2.03 MIXES
A. Job-mix formula shall indicate percentage passing for each specified sieve size of mineral
aggregate and percent of asphalt to be used for each asphalt concrete mixture to be
incorporated on Project. Job-mix formula (gradation), with allowable tolerances for a
single test, to be used for job control. Single test variation tolerance is shown in following
table. In no event shall less than 2 percent of mineral aggregate pass a No. 200 sieve.
1. 2. No. 30: 2 5
3. No. 200: 5 2
4.
No. 4 and larger: 5 7
Asphalt, percent by weight of mix: 5 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Backfill curbs prior to paving.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Base Course:
1. Construct aggregate base course on subgrade and compact to a minimum of 100
percent of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D1557.
2. Thickness: As described in Soils Report, unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
3. See Drawings for extra heavy duty areas requiring extra thickness for aggregate
base course and asphaltic concrete.
B. Tack Coat:
1. Apply tack coat to vertical surfaces of existing pavement, curbs, gutters and
construction joints, against which additional material is to be placed, to a new or old pavement to be overlaid, and to other surfaces as designated by Architect.
Tack coat to be slow setting type emulsion as specified. If emulsion is applied undiluted, apply at rate of 0.02 to 0.10 gallons per square yard; if emulsion is
applied diluted 1:l with water, apply at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gallons per square
yard, as directed by Architect.
Clean surfaces of loose and foreign material prior to application of tack coats.
2.
3.
C. Asphaltic Concrete:
1. Place asphaltic concrete in thicknesses of not less than 1-112 inches or more
than 4 inches compacted to total compacted thickness described in Soils Report,
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
If pavement is constructed in lifts using an asphalt concrete base in the first lifts,
base to be thoroughly cleaned by whatever means necessary prior to application
of tack coat and placement of surface layer.
2.
D. Compaction:
1.
2.
Compact asphalt concrete surfacing to a density of 95 percent of 75 blows (ASTM D 1 559).
Measure asphalt density by means of a nuclear density gauge, or core testing.
Nuclear gauge method will be preferred.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 02741 -3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs”/Asphaltic Concrete Paving
SASC soumwest, LLC PhOenlX - Las vegas
E. Upon completion, pavement surface to be smooth, dense and of uniform texture and
appearance.
1. All areas to properly drain and be free of standing water. Compacted thickness to
be not less than 1/4 inch of that shown on Drawings.
2. Finished surface not to vary more than 1/4 inch in a 20 foot distance as
determined by a straight-edge placed in any position on finish surface, except
across flow lines.
F. Paving Termination:
1.
2.
Provide thickened edge at paving terminations that do not have wood header
forms or concrete curbs.
Pavement termination to be minimum 12 inches wide x 8 inches deep or as
shown on Drawings.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Smoothness Tests:
1.
2.
Test conformance of crown and grade of pavement as indicated. Finished
surface to be smooth and finished within specified tolerances.
Immediately after initial rolling, correct variations by adding or removing material
as required. Cut out and replace any spots deficient in thickness with fresh
mixture which is properly bonded to existing pavement.
After final rolling, retest surface and correct irregularities in excess of specified
tolerance by removing defective Work and replacing with new material.
3.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 0274 1 -4 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs m/Asphaltic Concrete Paving
SASC Southwest. LLC Phoenix * Las Vw
SECTION 02765
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Traffic marking and striping for pavement and curbs as shown on
Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's specifications for paint.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Traffic Surface Paint: Provide one of following or as approved.
1. Dunn-Edwards: Vin-L-Stripe W8D1 Series acrylic latex. www.dunnedwards.com 2. Sherwin-Williams: Acrylic Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint. www.sherwin-
williams.com
3. IC1 Dulux: 22683 (white), 22685 (yellow), 26564 (red) or 20090 (handicap blue)
IC1 Performance Coatings waterborne traffic paint. www.dulux.com
4. Frazee: 502 Traffic Line Paint - Acrylic. www.frazee.com
5. Pervo: 3080 (white), 3082 (yellow), 3083 (green) or 3084 (black) Water Borne
Traffic Coating and 3033 Dark Handicap Blue Traffic Line Paint - WaterBorne. www. De rvo . co m
6. TMT-Pathway: 1030A9 (white), 1056A9 (yellow) Traffic and Airfield Water
Emulsion Base Marking Paint www.tmtpathwav.com
B. Colors: As noted on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prepare chalk layout and obtain Architect's approval prior to start of marking and striping.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean surfaces of substances which may inhibit bonding.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint with equipment suited for that purpose in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
B. Paint lines straight and true to pattern layout. Correct errors by sandblasting. Apply two
coat minimum or more if required to obtain complete opacity. Dry film thickness: 8 mils minimum.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02765-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs m/Pavement Markings
C. Stall Divisions: Provide between standard size parking stalls, a single 4 inch wide stripe,
stall width as shown on Drawings.
D. Arrows and Pavement Signs: Paint directional arrows with stencils or other approved
method. Strokes of letters, islands and “No Parking“ areas to have 3 inch wide strips.
E. Handicap Stalls: Provide symbol and other markings as approved by Architect.
F.
G.
Fire Lanes: Provide red painted curbs as required.
Protect completed Work until dry.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02765-2 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Pavement Markings
SASC souttmesl. uc Phoenix - Las Vews
SECTION 02774
CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete curbs, gutters, sidewalks and driveways as shown on the
Drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances.
Where geotechnical report, General Structural Notes, or notes on drawings state more
restrictive requirements, the requirements of the geotechnical report, General Structural
Notes, or notes on drawings shall govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete for Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks: Complying with applicable requirements of
Section 03300.
B. Concrete for Driveways: Comply with City of Carlsbad Standard Specifications.
C. Expansion Joint Filler: Expansion joint filler materials shall consist of premolded strips of
a durable resilient compound and comply with ASTM D-1751, D-1752, or D-2628..
D. Epoxy Resin: Sta-Crete Epoxy Resin No. 15-J or 20.
E. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B; acrylic type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Cut existing pavements and concrete joined by new construction as follows:
1.
2.
The removal of existing improvements shall be conducted in such a manner as
not to injure utilities or any portion of the improvement that is to remain in place.
Sidewalks shall be removed to a distance required to maintain a maximum slope for the replaced portion of sidewalk, for one inch per foot and all driveways shall
be removed to a distance as required by standard details.
3. Existing concrete driveway curbs and gutters shall be removed to the right-of-way
line and the new end of curb faced.
4. Portland cement concrete pavements, curbs and gutters and sidewalks
designated on the plans for removal shall be saw-cut at match lines, and
removed.
5. Removal of trees, stumps, irrigation structures, storm water inlets, headwalls and
other items in the right-of-way shall be done in accordance with Section 201.
6. Backfill and comDaction of all excavated areas shall be ComDacted to the densities as presciibed in Section 02300.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 02 774- 1 C-SpecsTM/ Concrete Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks and Driveways
SASC southwest. LLC
PhOenix.LaSV~
7.
8.
All surplus materials shall be immediately hauled from the jobsite and disposed of
in a legal manner.
Pavement Widening or Extensions: Existing pavements which are to be matched
by pavement widening or pavement extension shall be trimmed to a neat true line
with straight vertical edged free from irregularities with a saw specifically
designed for this purpose. The minimum depth of cut shall be 1 1/2 inches or D14,
whichever is greater.
a. The existing pavement shall be cut and trimmed after placement of
required ABC and just prior to placement of asphalt concrete for
pavement widening or extension, and the trimmed edges shall be painted
with a light coating of asphalt cement or emulsified asphalt immediately
prior to constructing the new abutting asphalt concrete pavements. No
extra payment shall be provided for these items and all costs incurred in
performing this work shall be incidental to the widening or pavement
extens ion.
b. The exact point of matching, termination, and overlay may be adjusted in
the field, if necessary, by the Owner’s Representative.
Pavement to be Removed: Existing asphalt pavement to be removed for trenches
or for other underground construction or repairs shall be cut by a device capable
of making a neat, straight and smooth cut without damaging adjacent pavement that is not to be removed. The Owner’s Representative’s decision as to the
acceptability of the cutting device and manner of operation shall be final. If saw
cutting, only is to be utilized, it will be so specified in the plans or special
provisions.
a. Pavement replacement for cuts essentially parallel to the street centerline
and greater than 50 feet in length shall be two course pavement
replacement as hereinafter specified.
Pavement replacement for ,cuts parallel to the street centerline less than
50 feet in length, transverse cuts, bell holes and similar small areas shall
match gradation and thickness of the existing pavement. These one
course pavement patches shall be compacted with vibratory roller to the
same density specified for asphalt concrete pavements. In lieu of cutting pipe trenches across driveways, curbs and gutters,
sidewalks, alley entrances, and other types of pavements, the Contractor
may, when approved by the Owner’s Representative’s, elect to tunnel or
bore under such structures and pavements.
9.
b.
C.
B. Construct subgrade and compact true to grades and lines shown on Drawings and as
specified in Section 02300.
C. Remove soft or unsuitable material to a depth of not less than 18 inches below subgrade
under access drives and truck parking areas, and 12 inches below subgrade under
automobile parking areas. Replace with approved materials.
D. Material displaced during construction shall not be placed on base or surfacing material
already in place on roadway, Do not place excavated material in manner as to interfere
with access to property or traffic flow in street.
E. Remove concrete sidewalks and driveways which are necessarily disturbed by
construction to a distance required to maintain a slope as indicated by Standard Details or
not to exceed one inch per foot where sidewalks are concerned.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02774-2
Carlsttad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs / Concrete Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks and Driveways
SASC southwest. uc Phoenix - Las Vegas
3.02 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct concrete curbs, gutters and sidewalks by conventional use of forms, or by
means of a curb and gutter machine when approved by Construction Manager.
1. If machines designed specifically for such work and approved by the Construction Manager are used, results must be equal to or better than that produced by use
of forms.
If the results are not satisfactory to Construction Manager, discontinue use.
Requirements applicable to use of forms shall apply to use of machines.
2.
3.
B. Extruded Concrete Curbs Without Gutter: Provide extruded concrete formed-in-place
curbs to cross section and locations as shown on Drawings and as specified.
C. Concrete for Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks: 40 percent stone by weight and extruded in a
zero slump condition.
D. Jointing: Install cold joints every 20 linear feet and at each end of radius corners. Install
2 inch diameter weep holes every 5 feet unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
E. Bonding:
1.
2.
Bond extruded concrete curbing to asphalt surfacing by use of slow setting
cutback asphalt tack coat.
Apply tack coat in a manner approved by Construction Manager to provide a
uniform continuous coating 1/8 to 3/16 inch in thickness and a width one inch less
than the base width of curbing.
Take care to prevent spills or running of tack coat over surface of finished asphalt
pavement.
Bond extruded concrete curbing to concrete surfaces by use of an epoxy resin.
3.
4.
F. Forms:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Carefully set forms to line and grade, securely staked in position and conforming
to dimensions of curbs, gutters, sidewalks, driveways and alley intersections.
Moisten forms and subgrade immediately in advance of placing concrete.
Clean forms thoroughly each time they are used, and coated with a light oil, or
other releasing agent of a type which will not discolor concrete.
Thoroughly spade concrete away from forms so that there will be no rock pockets
next to forms.
Concrete may be compacted by mechanical vibrators approved by Construction
Manager.
Continue tamping or vibrating until mortar flushes to surface, and coarse
aggregate is below concrete surface.
G. Expansion Joints: 1. Constructed vertical, and at right angles to centerline of drive and match joints in
adjacent pavement or sidewalks.
2. Concrete drives: Maximum 15 feet O.C.
3. Construct joints at radius points, driveways, alley entrances and at adjoining structures.
H. Construct contraction joints as detailed.
1. Shape edges with tool formed to round edges to radius indicated on standard details.
D.F. Architects 96123EASC 05-191-3 0
March 1,2005 02774-3
Carkkad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs / Concrete Curbs, Gutters,
Sidewalks and Driveways
J. Form Removal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not remove front face form before concrete has taken initial set and has
sufficient strength to carry its own weight. Do not remove gutter forms and rear forms until concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent damage to the edges.
Take special care to prevent damage. Repair any portion of concrete damaged while stripping forms. If damage is
severe, replace at no additional cost to Owner.
K. Finishing and Curing:
1.
2.
Comply with Section 03300 and as noted on Drawings.
Spray extruded curbs with curing agent sealer immediately after placing to
achieve a surface comparable to a uniform broom finish. Take care in extruding
radiuses and comers to prevent cracking and breaking of concrete curbing.
3. Thoroughly fill, bond, and finish breaks or cracks to match remaining installation
in manner approved by Construction Manager. 4. Curbing found unacceptable by Construction Manager to be replaced at
Contractor's expense.
. L. Backfilling: Unless otherwise specified, backfill behind curbs or sidewalk with native soil
to lines and grades shown on Drawings.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:
I.
2.
3.
4. Gutters:
Test face, top, back and flow line of curb and gutter with a 10 foot straightedge or
curved template, longitudinally along surface.
Correct deviations in excess of 114 inch.
Test surface of concrete sidewalks with a 5 foot straight edge. Correct deviations
in excess of 1/8 inch.
a. When required by Construction Manager, water test gutters having a
slope of 0.8 foot per 100 feet or less, and where unusual or special
conditions indicate gutter may not drain satisfactorily.
Water testing consists of establishing flow in length of gutter to be tested
by supplying water from a hydrant, tank truck or other source.
One hour after supply of water is shut off, inspect gutter for evidence of
ponding or improper shape.
In the event water is found ponded in gutter to a depth greater than 1/2
inch, or on the adjacent pavement, correct defect or defects in a manner
acceptable to Construction Manager.
Remove and replace sections of Work deficient in depth or not conforming to
Drawings or Specifications.
b.
C.
d.
5.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Leave work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02774-4 Carl.skad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs / Concrete Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks and Driveways
SASC southwest. LLC Phoenix. Las Veps
SECTION 02890
TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Traffic Control Signage as shown on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, shop drawings and samples in accordance with Section 01330.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Metals: New stock, free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance.
1. Steel Shapes, Plates, Rod, Bars and Bar-size Shapes: ASTM A36.
2. Hot-dip Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653, with G90 zinc coating.
3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500.
4. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 having strength and durability meeting 5005-Hi 5,
.080 inch minimum thickness.
B. Plastics: New stock, free from defects and of the best quality available.
C. Paints: Type made for the surface material on which it is to be applied and recommended
by the manufacturer of the paint. No paint that will fade, discolor or delaminate as a result
of proximity to UV light sources or heat therefrom shall be used.
D. Signage Supports: Steel pipes with welded steel caps. Paint with acrylic polyurethane
enamel.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in accordance with City of Carlsbad Standard Details and as indicated on
Drawings.
B. ShoplFactorylFinishing:
1.
2.
3.
Paint shall be thoroughly and evenly applied and shall be well worked into corners
and joints and shall not have edge or joint buildups.
Paint shall be evenly applied and without pinholes, scratches, orange peeling, application marks, etc.
Workmanship in connection with finishes shall conform to the standard of the
trade. Prime coats or other surface pre-treatments, where recommended by the
manufacturer for paints, shall be included in the work.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02890-1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Traffic Control Signs
SASC southwesl. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
A. Install items square, plumb, true and accurately fitted. Leveling is to be done only by
instruments.
B. Embed signage support pipes in concrete filled holes as detailed.
3.02 CLEANING
A. After installation, surfaces marred during erection, and exposed bolts, bolt heads, etc., shall be retouched with the same paint used previously.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 02890-2 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Traffic Control Signs
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC
phoenix. Lao vqs
SECTION 03055
FLY ASH
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Fly ash admixture for incorporation into concrete mixes specified in the
following specification sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Section 02774 - Concrete Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks and Driveways.
Section 03300 - Cast-In Place Concrete.
Section 0341 1 - PrecastlPrestressed Concrete Hollow Core Planks.
Section 04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout.
Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry Units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
1. Sampled and tested in accordance with the current edition of ASTM C 311,
Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete.
Conform to the requirements of the current edition of ASTM C 618, Standard
Specification of Coal Fly Ash and Raw and Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as
a Mineral Admixture in Concrete, as follows:
a. Meet the requirements of ASTM C 618, Table 1 Chemical Requirements
and Table 1A Supplementary Optional Chemical Requirements.
b. Meet the requirements of ASTM C 618, Table 2 Physical Requirements
and Table 2A Supplementary Optional Physical Requirements in the
following areas:
2.
Effectiveness in Controlling AI kali-Silica Reaction.
Effectiveness in Contributing to Sulfate Resistance, Procedure A.
Uniformity Requirements when air-entraining concrete is
specified:
1)
2)
3)
3. Source Quality Control:
a. Fly ash shall come from sources with an established quality control
program to demonstrate that the fly ash consistently conforms to ASTM C
61 8 specification and uniformity requirements. The quality history shall
include a minimum of 40 test results representing a minimum of the
previous 6 months production of fly ash.
Per the current edition of ACI 232, Use of Fly Ash in Concrete, section
5.6, the fly ash quality history shall be available that demonstrates at least
monthly ASTM C 618 certification results from a Cement and Concrete
Reference Laboratory (CCRL) accredited laboratory. A minimum of 20 reports representing at least 6 months of fly ash production is required.
b.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 03055-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Fly Ash
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - Las Vegas
2.02 MIXES
A. Provide fly ash admixture for incorporation into concrete mixes as specified in the
following specification sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Section 02774 - Concrete Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks and Driveways.
Section 03300 - Cast-In Place Concrete.
Section 0341 1 - PrecastlPrestressed Concrete Hollow Core Planks.
Section 04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout.
Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry Units.
B. Proportioning:
1. Per ACI 232, Use of Fly Ash in Concrete, section 4.1, the most effective method
for proper proportioning of concrete for a specific application is by use of a trial
batch and testing program per ACI 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting
Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. When necessary, a
series of mixtures shall be prepared and tested to determine the proper
proportions for the specific project requirements.
Fly ash proportioning is normally at the rate of 15 to 35 % by mass of total
cementitious material. Fly ash shall not be proportioned at less than 15% of total
cernentitious material.
2. "
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 03055-2 Carlsbad Golf Course Ckubhouse C-Specs /Fly Ash
SASC southwast. LLC phosnix.Lasvagas
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
0 1.05
1.06
1.07
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, including, but not limited to:
1. Shoring, Bracing and Anchorage, including openings for other Work
2. Form Accessories
3. Form Stripping.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and
code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing dimensions, materials, bracing, and
arrangement of joints and ties.
B. Product Data: Provide data on accessory materials and installation requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer
experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the place where the Project is located.
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
B.
C.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site to prevent deterioration and damage.
Deliver void forms and installation instructions in Manufacturer's packaging.
Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from
moisture.
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of Work which require attachment of
components to formwork.
If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over B.
' reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3 March 1,2005 031 00-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs"/Concrete Formwork
SASC souurwest, LLC
Phoenix Las VesaS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; APA grade-trademarked; BB Plyform, Class 1 , Exterior
Grade as per PS1.
B.
C.
Lumber: Spruce, Pine or Fir species; construction grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.
Fiber: Seamless Sonotube as manufactured by Sonoco Products Co., or as approved,
for round columns.
2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Removable or snap-off type, free of defects that could leave holes larger than
one inch in concrete surface.
6. Form Release Agent: Colorless, which will not stain concrete, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete
C. Corners: Chamfered wood strip type or vinyl bead; one x one inch size; maximum
possible lengths.
D. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel 22 gage thick, longest possible lengths, with
alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to
concrete formwork.
E. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient
strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
F. Waterstops: Polyvinyl chloride or rubber, flat or dumbbell type, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F working temperature range,
maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded
jointing; width as shown on Drawings. Comply with Corps of Engineers CRD-C572 for
PVC and CRD-C513 for rubber.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions
agree with Drawings.
3.02 EARTH FORMS
A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil in pour cavity prior to
. placing concrete.
3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 031 00-2 C-Specsm/Concrete Formwork
3.04
3.05
3.06
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage
concrete during stripping.
Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
Obtain approval from Architect before framing openings in structural members which are
not indicated on Drawings.
Provide chamfer strips on external corners of beams and columns.
D.
E.
F.
APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommendations.
Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive applied coverings
which are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water.
Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
B.
C.
INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work.
Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.
Coordinate Work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,
recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
Install accessories in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, straight, level and
plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
B.
C.
D.
E. Install waterstops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints watertight.
Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and
inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
F.
G.
FORM CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds.
Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 03 1 00-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs"/Concrete Formwork
sAscsarthwesfuc
phoenix - Lar VeQaS
3.07
3.08
3.09
3.10
FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
B. Camber slabs and beams 1/4 inch per 10 feet in accordance with ACI 117.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that Work is in accordance with
formwork design, and that support, fastenings, wedges, ties and items are secure.
B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 3 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to
view. Do not patch formwork.
FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its
own weight and imposed loads. Forms shall be removed in accordance with the
requirements of the General Structural Notes.
8. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not
be damaged. Discard damaged forms.
C.
D. Forms for walls, columns, pilasters and the like shall not be removed or disturbed for at
least 7 days from the date of last pouring.
E. Forms for slabs, girders, beams and the like and retaining walls shall not be removed or
disturbed for at least 14 days from date of last pouring. It may be required that such
forms be left in place longer than the above specified period. The length of time they shall
remain in place will depend on the system of forming and shoring, and the length of time
shall in accordance with the requirements of the General Structural Notes.
F. Formwork for stem walls and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete may be
removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage.
G. Cure exposed concrete in accordance with Section 03300 whenever the formwork is
removed during the curing period.
REMOVAL STRENGTH
A. When formwork removal is based on the concrete reaching its specified 28 day strength
(or a specified percentage thereof), the concrete shall be presumed to have strength
when either of the following conditions has been met:
1. When test cylinders, field cured under the most unfavorable conditions prevailing
for any portion of the concrete represented, have reached the required strength.
2. When the concrete has been cured for the same length of time as the age, at
test, of laboratory cured cylinders which reach the required strength. The length
of time concrete has been cured in the field shall be determined by the
cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive,
during which the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50
degrees F. and the concrete has been damp or thoroughly sealed from
evaporation and loss of moisture.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March I, 2005 031 00-4 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Concrete Formwork
SASC soulhwesl. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete reinforcement as shown on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Comply with ACI-301, Chapter 5, except where more exacting requirements are specified.
Comply with requirements in AWS-D12.1, except where more exacting requirements are
specified in the Contract Documents.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing bending and placing of reinforcing. Include
diagrammatic elevations of walls at a scale sufficiently large to show clearly the position
and erection marks of marginal bars and their dowels and splices and bar arrangement
for more than one layer of reinforcing steel in concrete sections.
B. Certificates: Submit certified mill test reports for review prior to fabrication.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Shipping: Deliver reinforcement to the Project site bundled, tagged and marked to facilitate sorting and placing. Tags shall indicate bar sizes, lengths, grade and other
information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams.
B. Storage and Protection: Store reinforcement at the site off the ground and in a manner to
prevent damage to the materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Steel: New billet-steel, deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60,
with a minimum yield of 60,000 psi for bars #4 and larger, Grade 60 or ASTM A82 for
spirals, and ASTM A615, Grade 40, with a minimum yield of 40,000 psi for #2 and #3
bars, unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
B. Welded Anchors: ASTM A706.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 using bright steel wire meeting the requirements of ASTM A82. Gauges and dimensions as noted on the Drawings.
Chairs: Galvanized steel or plastic tipped.
Tie Wire: ASTM A82, 16 gauge or heavier, black annealed.
D.
E.
F. Welding Rods: E-70 Series for A615 Grade 40 reinforcing, and E-90 Series for A706
reinforcing; low hydrogen conforming to AWS A-5.1.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 CarMZd Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 03200-1 C-Specs /Concrete Reinforcement
SASC souulw& LLC Phoenix, Las vegas
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate bars as far as is practical. Bend bars cold. Make bends for stirrups and
ties around pins in accordance with ACI 318.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Determine weldability of reinforcing steel by laboratory chemical analysis of steel. Only
steel conforming to chemical requirements specified in AWS D12.1 may be welded.
3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Place in accordance with ACI 31 8 and as shown. Accurately place reinforcement and securely tie at intersections with 16 gauge
(1.6mm) black annealed wire.
Maintain reinforcing in proper position by chairs, bar supports or other approved
devices. Bars in footings shall be supported on precast concrete blocks.
The bending or field cutting of bars around openings or sleeves will not be
permitted.
B. Bars shall lap 32 diameters at splices or a minimum of 12 inches, unless otherwise
indicated in the current edition of the ACI Detailing Manual. Stagger splices in adjoining
horizontal bars at least 6 feet. Hook horizontal bars around corners not less than 24
diameters, with a minimum of 12 inches as per typical details.
C. Concrete protection of reinforcing shall be not less than the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
3 inches where concrete is poured against and permanently exposed to ground.
1-1/2 inches where concrete is poured against forms but may be in contact with
ground, #5 and under; 2 inches for #6 and larger.
1-1/2 inches minimum in exterior face of exterior walls (exposed to weather but
not in contact with ground).
314 inch minimum in interior walls and interior face of exterior walls.
1-1/2 inches in beams, girders and columns.
1 inch in interior slabs.
D. Clear distance between bars shall be not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum size of
coarse aggregate unless noted otherwise.
E. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel,
conduits or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter or enough to
exceed code tolerances, resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to review of
Architect.
F. Bars with kinks or bends not indicated shall not be used. Reinforcement shall not be bent or be straightened in a manner that will weaken the material, or be bent after being partially embedded in hardened concrete.
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 03200-2 Carlsbid Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Concrete Reinforcement
SASC SoUthweJt. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
G. Wire mesh in slabs:
1.
2.
3.
Lap welded wire fabric at least 1-1/2 meshes plus end extension of wires but not
less than 12 inches in structural slabs.
Lap fabric at least 1/2 mesh plus end extension of wires but not less than 6
inches in slabs on ground.
Extend mesh across supporting beams and walls.
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove excess materials, equipment
and debris and dispose of off premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 03200-3
Carls!gd Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Concrete Reinforcement
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cast-in-place concrete including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
Building foundations and slabs on grade.
Site structures including, but not limited to, site lighting supports, electrical and
mechanical equipment support pads, and other site furnishing and equipment
requiring cast-in-place concrete items.
Topping Composite with metal deck.
Subgrade barrier membrane below slabs on grade. 3.
4.
B. Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Section 02774 - Concrete Curbs and Gutters
Section 031 00 - Concrete Formwork
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
Section 0341 1 - PrecasVPrestressed Concrete Hollow Core Planks
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Interior slabs on grade scheduled to received applied floor
finishes (VCT, carpet, etc.) shall be tested as specified herein under Field Quality Control
Calcium chloride test requirements. Moisture vapor from the floor must be less than 3
pounds per 1.000 square feet per 24 hours.
S U BM IlTALS
A. Mix Design: Submit mix design for each class of concrete to the Owner’s Representative
for review.
B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s Specifications and performance data for accessory
products.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing showing proposed location of construction joints,
expansion/contraction joints and control joints and obtain approval of same from Owner’s
Representative prior to construction.
D. Samples: Submit 4 inch long samples of expansion/contraction joint and control joint.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1.
2.
Standard for measuring, mixing, transporting and placing of concrete shall be
ACI-301 and ACI-304.
Standard for measuring, mixing and delivery of ready mixed shall be ASTM C94,
except that time in mixer after water has been added at batch plant is limited to 1-
1/2 hours.
Job-mixed concrete shall be subject to Owner’s Representative’s review of design, mixing and handling procedures. 3.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 03300-1 Carlsbyi Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Field Samples: Provide on-site sample(s) of each type of exposed flatwork concrete finish
showing texture and color before proceeding with finish to be used on this
Project.
Sample(s) shall be minimum 4’4” square and have at least one longitudinal and
one transverse joint.
Construct sample panels in ample time to allow for finishing and curing before
requesting Owner’s Representative to review.
Construct where directed by Owner‘s Representative and prepare successive
sample panels as required until finish acceptable to Owner’s Representative is
produced.
Since sample panels will constitute a basis of acceptance or rejection of the
completed Work, do not remove sample panels until authorized in writing by the
Owner’s Representative. Dispose of sample panels in a legal manner when
authorized.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Rain protection: Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection has been
provided.
B. Cold weather protection:
1. Comply with ACI-306R.
2.
3.
Provide sufficient protection material in advance of the time when daily mean
temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F.
Provide strong and secure weather protection around the building for at least one
story above and one story below the floor being concreted to prevent infiltration of
wind.
Distribute unit heaters throughout the floor to maintain temperatures between 50
degrees F and 70 degrees F.
Obtain one temperature reading of air at floor level for each 600 square feet of
floor area just prior to concreting and provide additional heat should the
measured temperature be less than 50 degrees F.
Record and submit temperature readings for Owner’s Representative’s review no
later than 24 hours after concreting.
4.
5.
6.
C. Hot weather protection: 1. Comply with ACI-305R.
2. When air temperature or form temperature exceed 100 degrees F, control
concreting as follows.
a.
b.
C.
d.
Cool forms to a maximum 90 degrees F. Cool concrete to a maximum 90 degrees F leaving the mixer;
Adjust concrete mix to retard set with retarding admixture if included in
design mix and adequately tested; and
Take additional measures as directed by concrete supplier.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, alkali content not to exceed 0.6 percent, use ASTM C150, Type V sulfate resistant concrete where in contact with soil. Use one brand
and type of cement throughout Project unless otherwise specified.
D.F. Architects 96123BASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 03300-2 CarlsbTi Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Cast-In-Place Concrete
sAscsovthwesf LLC Phoenix. Las VWS
2.02
B. Aggregate:
1. Structural Concrete: Clean, coarse aggregate and gravel, free from foreign
matter, conforming to ASTM C33. Aggregate shall be graded from coarse to fine in accordance with ASTM C33, Size 67.
Light weight aggregates: Clean, coarse aggregate and gravel free from foreign
matter conforming to ASTM 330 (Maximum air dried concrete weight =110 psf
plus or minus 3 psf).
2.
C. Admixtures:
1.
2.
3.
Air entraining admixture: ASTM C260. Use of calcium chloride is not permitted.
Fly ash admixture: In accordance with Section 03055. Use of fly ash is permitted
only in unexposed structural concrete and is not permitted in exposed or
lightweight concrete. Limit use of fly ash to 15 percent of the cement by weight.
Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Owner's
Representative.
4.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Coloring Agent:
1. ASTM C979.
2. As manufactured by Frank Davis Company or L.M. Scofield Company or
3.
Solomon Grind-Chem Service, Inc.. Provide colors as indicated on Drawings.
Color-weight shall not exceed 10% of the weight of the cement.
ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent:
1.
2.
Interior Only (PVA): Sika Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod 300 series
Exterior and Interior (acrylic latex): Euclid Eucobond, or Dayton Bond J40.
B. Non-Shrink Grout:
1. Premixed or prepackaged, non-metallic, non-gaseous, bleed free compound; non-shrink when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1107, Grade B at a fluid (flow
cone) consistency of 20 to 30 seconds.
2. Attain minimum compressive strength of 7,500 psi in 28 days at above fluid
consistency.
3. Fluid grouts: Remain workable, flow through flow cone after 30 minutes with slight agitation, in temperatures from 40 to 90 degrees F.
4. Acceptable manufacturer and products: Dayton Superior (Suregrip High
Performance), Sika (Sikagrout 212), Master Builders (Masterflow 928) and L&M
Construction Chemicals (Crystex).
C. Formed Construction Joint: Standard design plastikey, tongue and groove key joint; 3-112
inch vertical dimension for 4 inch slabs.
D. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM 0994.
E. Liquid Curing Compound: 1.
2.
VOC compliant, ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B; acrylic type.
W. R. Meadows Sealtight VOCOMP-20, L&M Construction Chemicals Dress &
Seal WB or Dayton Superior J-18 are acceptable products.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 03300-3 Carlsbq; Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Cast-In-Place Concrete
SAX Southwesl. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
3. Verify that specified curing compound is compatible with the floor finish
material(s) and adhesive(s) that will be applied to floor surface prior to delivery of
curing compound to jobsite. If it is determined that the curing compound is not compatible with the floor finish material(s) and adhesive(s) that will be applied to
floor surface, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner's Representative.
F. Sealer: VOC compliant, acrylic copolymer type.
1. Interior: W. R. Meadows Sealtight VOCOMP-25, Euclid Flor Seal VOX, L&M
Construction Chemicals Dress & Seal WB #30 or Dayton Superior J-24 are
acceptable products.
Exterior: Euclid Diamond Seal VOX, or L&M Construction Chemicals Lumiseal
WB are acceptable products. 2.
G. Leveling Agent: Sonneborn Sonoflow, Euclid Flo-Top, Ardex K-15, L&M Construction
Chemicals Levelex or Dayton-Superior Levelayer 1 are acceptable products.
H. Vapor Retarder: Minimum 15 mil polyolefin sheet. Provide manufacturer's recommended
joining and repair tape. The following are acceptable products:
1. Stego Wrap as manufactured by Stego Industries, L.L.C., (877) 464-7834
2. 3. Vapor Blockm 15 as manufactured by Raven Industries (800) 635-3456
www.steqoindustries.com
Soco-Shield VB-15 as manufactured by Socopac Co.
www.vaDorblock.com
I. Concrete Accessories: Gateway Engineering Company, Dayton-Superior Corporation, or
Burke Concrete Accessories.
J. Evaporation Retarder:
1. Type: Monomolecular film, compatible with subsequent coatings and floor
2. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products: L&M Construction Chemicals (E-Con),
finishes.
Master Builders (Confilm), or Dayton Superior (Surefilm J-74).
2.03 MIXES
A. Design of Mixes: ACI 301 and ACI 304, except as otherwise specified.
B. Selection of proportions for normal weight concrete: ACI 301.
C. Mix and deliver ready-mixed concrete in accordance with requirements of ASTM C94,
Option A.
1. Not more than 90 minutes shall elapse from time water is introduced into the
concrete mixture until completion of placement.
2. Do not add water to mix that has stiiened to increase its workability.
3. At no time shall concrete mix exceed a bulb thermometer reading of 90 degrees
F. or over. 4. Use ice or other method as reviewed by Owner's Representative, to keep
concrete below 90 degrees F. temperature.
D. Use of water reducing admixture, if needed, shall be submitted for approval. Proportion water reducing admixture in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Delivery
tickets shall state the amount and kind of admixture.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 03300-4 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Cast-ln-PIace Concrete
E. Air Entraining Admixture:
1. Concrete such as exterior slabs, perimeter foundations, and exterior curbs and
gutters which will be subject to freezing temperatures while wet during the life of
the structure, shall have a water cement ratio not exceeding 0.53 and contain
entrained air in accordance with ACI 212.3R.
Limit air content for lightweight concrete to 4-7% 2.
F. Compressive strength (28 day): As shown on Drawings.
G. Slump:
1. 2.
For consolidation by vibration: As shown on Drawings.
For exposed aggregate concrete: 7 inches to 8 inches.
Hi Mix coloring agent for integrally colored exposed aggregate concrete in strict compliance
with the Manufacturer's printed instructions
1. Lightweight concrete:
1.
2.
110 Ibs per cubic foot, plus or minus 3 percent, dryweight.
Splitting tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 496, shall be the minimum as follows for given compressive strength: a.
b.
3. Modulus of elasticity shall be a minimum of 2,400,000 Ibs per square inch (secant
modulus at 0.3 fc).
4. Drying shrinkage, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 330, shall be a
maximum 0.06% at age 1 year or 0.035% at 28 days.
5. Base cement factor and water-cement ratio on degree of saturation and
absorption characteristics of the lightweight aggregates stockpiled for use.
6. Shrinkage compensated cement may be used to control drying shrinkage if
acceptable to the Owner's Representative.
7. Substitute natural sand for lightweight fines.
4,000 psi, fct equals 425 psi;
5,000 psi, fct equals 475 psi.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prior to placing concrete:
1. Clean equipment involved.
2.
3.
4.
Remove debris and foreign material from the forms.
Remove concrete laitance from reinforcing steel.
Wet wood forms and masonry units in contact with concrete.
B. No wood other than built-in bucks or nailing blocks will be permitted to remain
permanently inside the forms.
C. Coordinate the necessary Trades as required to provide the sleeves, bolts, anchors,
holes, etc., to be built in.
D. Place vapor retarder over subbase immediately prior to placing of floor slab at locations
indicated on Drawings. Install vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 and
manufacturer's printed instructions. Vapor retarder shall be continuous over entire floor
area and turned up a minimum of 2 inches at perimeter walls and penetrations. Tears,
punctures and penetrations shall be taped to maintain the moisture vapor resistance
integrity of vapor retarder.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3 March 1,2005 03300-5 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Cast-ln-Place Concrete
3.02 PLACING OF CONCRETE
A. Concrete Work shall be performed in accordance with ACI-301 except as amended by
this Section.
B. Convey concrete from the mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will prevent
segregation of aggregate or loss of material. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete
is at all times plastic and to insure a practically continuous flow of concrete. Concrete not in place 1-1/2 hours after water has been added at batch plant may be rejected by
Owner’s Representative.
C. Place concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing. Do not deposit concrete that has partially hardened or been
retempered.
D. Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection has been provided.
E. Thoroughly compact concrete by suitable means during the placing, and work around the
reinforcement and embedded items into the corners of the forms.
1. Use vibrators to aid in the placement of the concrete, operated by experienced
personnel. 2. Keep at least one spare operating vibrator on the job at all times during the
concrete operations.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, EXPANSION/CONTRACTION JOINTS AND CONTROL JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Provide as required to facilitate construction in ’ accordance with
reviewed shop drawings.
B. Expansion/Contraction and Control Joints: Place expansion/contraction joints and control
joints where required to ensure that undesirable thermal and shrinkage cracking of slabs
is minimized.
1. See Drawings for locations of expansion/contraction joints and control joints in
slabs-on-grade and in topping pours.
2. If drawings do not indicate locations, verify with Owner’s Representative prior to
placement of slabs-on-grade and topping pours.
3. At exterior slabs-on-grade provide a 1 /2 inch wide expansionkontraction joint
wherever slabs abut vertical construction elements whether indicated or not.
C. Additional reinforcing may be required at some construction, expansion/contraction and
control joints, and shall be supplied and installed at no additional cost.
D. Reinforcing shall be continuous through construction joints except for slab on grade or
where specifically noted on plan. No concrete pour shall be longer than 100 feet or more
than 4,000 square feet in area. Provide shear keys as detailed.
E. Provide support of formed construction joint materials by means that does not puncture or
otherwise damage under floor vapor retarder at interior floor slabs on grade.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 03300-6
Carlsby Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Cast-In-Place Concrete
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
FINISHING VERTICAL (FORMED) SURFACES
A. Formed surface finishes:
1.
2.
Pits, tunnels, mechanical rooms and concealed surfaces: Remove fins, patch tie
holes.
Interior exposed surfaces and exterior exposed surfaces: Remove fins, patch tie
holes, stone joint marks and out-of-plane surfaces to within 1/16 inch of flush, to
produce uniformity, dense and smooth concrete.
FINISHING HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A. Rake concrete into place, screed and compact with a light tamp, except do not tamp
topping and slabs not on grade. Screed with sawing motion and float surface to bring
fines to the top.
B. Mix and apply evaporation retarder in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions
immediately after floating. In extreme drying conditions, apply additional material as
needed. Apply lightly on hard to trowel floor areas.
C. When concrete has hardened sufficiently so that excess fines will not be brought to the
surface, trowel slab with a steel trowel to a smooth surface free of pinholes and other
imperfections. A mechanical trowel with rotating steel blades, approved by Owner's
Representative, may be used for this operation.
D. After the surface has hardened sufficiently to ring under a trowel, trowel again with a steel
trowel to a hard, burnished surface free of blemishes. A mechanical rotating trowel will
not be permitted for this operation.
E. Concrete slabs scheduled to receive ceramic tile, concrete topping or similar finishes shall
have a screeded finish but true and even to plane with no sharp projections or ridges.
Use a small radius edger on edges of exposed Work. Use a deep cutting, scoring tool to
provide scoring as indicated.
F.
G. Exterior flatwork to receive heavy broom finish unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
H. Finish floors shall meet requirements of ACI 302.1R for a Flat (3/16 in 101-0")
Classification. Floors scheduled to receive thin-set tile applications shall meet Very Flat
(1/8 inch in 10'-0" ) Classification.
SLABS
A. Saw cut pattern indicated on Drawings. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cutting 1/4 of depth of
slab thickness. Saw cut joints as soon as possible, but in no case more than 24 hours
after placing slab.
B. Slope to drains 114 inch per foot nominal across entire room or area to be drained.
SPECIAL FINISHES
A. General: 1.
2.
Obtain cement and aggregates from a single source for specialty concrete
finishes to provide uniformity in appearance and color.
Place concrete at a maximum slump of 5 inches. Rake concrete into place,
screed and float. Do not tamp.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 CarlsbmJ Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 03300-7 C-Specs /Cast-ln-Place Concrete
SASC swnwe%t. LLC Phoenix. las vegas
B. Integral Colored Concrete
1.
2.
3.
Provide cement, aggregate, and pigment as required to produce consistent colors
matching approved mock-up using the materials specified.
Plant-Mixed Concrete: Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix
times from batching until discharge.
Concrete Paving: Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun
before curing materials are applied. Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow or frost
is forecast within 24 hours. Protect fresh concrete from moisture and freezing.
a.
4. Formed Surfaces
Stripping: Leave forms in place as long as practical. Remove forms
when concrete has reached a consistent age to maintain uniformity of
curing conditions throughout Project.
Broomed Finish: Do not dampen brooms.
Trowel Finish: Do not over-trowel or start troweling late.
Fill holes and defects in concrete surface within 48 hours of form
removal.
Use the same patching materials and techniques that were approved on
mock-up.
Make patches with a stiff mortar made with materials from the same
sources as the concrete. Adjust mortar mix proportions so dry patch
matches dry adjacent concrete. Add white cement to mortar mix if necessary to lighten it.
Maintain concrete between 65 and 85 F (1 8 to 29 C) degrees during
curing.
Cure concrete using curing compound; apply curing compound in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
5. Floors and Paving
6. Patching Concrete
a.
b.
a.
b.
C.
7. Curing
a.
b.
Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete, which are similar to natural
variations in color and appearance of unpigmented concrete, are acceptable.
8.
3.08 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, detail and elevations.
B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed, resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete except upon
express direction of Owner's Representative.
C. After forms are removed, fill tie rod holes, correct honeycomb spots, remove fins and
clean and finish damaged surfaces. Wipe off excess mortar and rub to match adjoining
surfaces.
D. When excessive honeycombing is revealed, remove the defective material immediately
after stripping forms to a depth of 3/4 inch to 1 inch. Cut edge of area perpendicular to
surface to avoid feathered edges. Saturate with water for several inches beyond cutout
and brush-in a grout consisting of equal parts Portland cement and sand. Follow
immediately with the patching mortar. Leave the patch slightly higher than the
surrounding surface. After an hour or two, finish flush with the adjoining surface. Wipe
and rub patch to match adjoining surfaces. Keep patches moist for 7 days.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191 -3 March 1,2005 03300-8
Carlsbqt Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Cast-ln-Place Concrete
SASC Southwest. UC
Phoenix. LaS VeoaJ
E. Patching mortar shall consist of the same materials and proportions as the original
concrete except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted. When color match is
required, adjust mixture to produce a finished color to match the adjoining concrete
surfaces.
F. Cracks caused by expansion, shrinkage and the like that occur in natural color concrete
up through final acceptance of building shall be carefully patched with floorstone, epoxy
grouting mortar or other method acceptable to the Owner's Representative.
3.09 CURING
A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and maintain without drying at a
relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the
cement and proper hardening of the concrete.
B. Curing Methods: Cure concrete surfaces receiving finish materials, including (but not
limited to) cementitious toppings, paint, and flooring, using one of the following two
methods immediately after finishing operations. Consideration shall be given to the
construction schedule impact and the compatibility of finish materials with the concrete
when selecting a method.
1. Keep concrete continuously moist for at least 7 days using polyethylene film or
other acceptable covering.
2. Apply liquid curing compound in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Remove curing compound before finish materials are applied unless it has been
demonstrated that the curing compound can satisfactorily serve as a base for finish materials. Method of removal shall result in a satisfactory base for finish
materials.
C. Prevent rapid drying of the concrete at the end of the curing period.
D. During the curing period, protect the concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances,
particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibrations. Protect finished
concrete surfaces from damage caused by construction equipment, materials or
methods.
3.10 LEVELING AGENT
A. Apply leveling agent to correct unsatisfactory floor surface due to undue settlement,
shrinkage or cracking.
B. Apply material when, in the opinion of Owner's Representative, it is necessary to provide
an acceptable surface.
C. Application to be in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
3.1 1 FLOOR SEALER
A.
B.
At areas indicated on Drawings, provide 2 coats of sealer.
Surface must be clean, dry and free of loose dirt, oil, wax, curing and parting compounds and other foreign matter.
C. Apply each coat in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 03300-9 Carlsb:; Golf Course Clubhouse . C-Specs /Cast-ln-Place Concrete
SASC southwesl LLC Phoenlx - las vegas
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by a testing laboratory in
accordance with Section 01430.
1. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.
2. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with
specified requirements.
3. Four concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 100 or less cubic yards of
concrete placed. One cylinder shall be tested after 7 days for information. Test
two cylinders after 28 days. Hold one cylinder for additional information, as
required.
Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, and cure on job
site under same conditions as concrete it represents.
Take one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken.
Concrete which does not meet the compressive strength requirement at 28 days
will be rejected and removed from the Project, and disposed of in a legal manner.
4.
5.
6.
B. Calcium chloride test requirements:
1. Two weeks before installation of the ceramic tile, VCT, vinyl, wood, carpet, epoxy
flooring and/or other finish flooring systems over the interior concrete slabs,
provide calcium chloride test to determine the level of water vapor transmission in
the slab.
Conduct testing in accordance with ASTM F1869 or ASTM E1907 (quantitative
anhydrous calcium chloride test).
Conduct calcium chloride tests after HVAC system has been in continuous use
for 36 hours with a minimum ambient temperature of 72 degrees F. Water vapor
transmission levels are directly affected by ambient room temperature and
readings conducted without a sustained ambient temperature is NOT acceptable.
Document test results and provide copy to Architect with a marked up floor finish plan showing test results.
Provide a written clarification on status of HVAC system before and during the
test and the length of time the ambient air temperature was maintained before the
tests.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished surfaces from stains or abrasions. Protect surfaces or edges by leaving
forms in place or by providing temporary covers. Protect concrete from rain, flowing
water or mechanical injury.
B. Protect floor slabs from the droppings of plaster, paint, dirt, and other marring by covering
with polyethylene plastic sheet, or other acceptable floor protection covering, well lapped
and sealed.
1. Where concrete slabs are scheduled to be the finished floor surface, or where
slab is treated with a special concrete finish serving as the finished floor surface,
provide a continuous covering of 1/2 inch particle board, joints tightly butted and
cut to sizes tight to wall construction, over entire floor area over polyethylene
plastic sheet, or other acceptable floor protection sheeting. Maintain covering (polyethylene and particleboard) in good condition until danger of damage is past.
3.14 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of
excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-1 91 -3 March 1,2005 Carlsbq; Golf Course Clubhouse
03300-1 0 C-Specs /Cast-In-Place Concrete
SASC southwesl. LLC Phoenix ’ Las VegaS
SECTION 0341 1
PRECASTIPRESTRESSED CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Structural precast/prestressed concrete floor members, including supports, anchors and attachments as shown on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design units to withstand design loads and erection forces. Calculate structural
properties of units in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318, or PCI MNL-120.
B. Structural analysis shall include evaluations of the effects of connections, holes,
discontinuities, concentrated loads, and joints,
C. Design units for work of other trades, concrete topping indicated, and all loading and
restraining conditions from fabrication, handling and erection.
D. Design units to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural
members and clearances of intended openings. Sum of immediate deflection due to live
load and additional long-term deflection shall not exceed deflection limitations indicated.
E. Design to compensate for the weight of the additional topping required by the camber in
order to achieve the minimum topping thickness used in the design.
F. Design component connections to accommodate building movement and thermal
movement. Provide adjustment to accommodate misalignment of structure without unit
distortion or damage.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating layout, unit locations, unit identification
marks, reinforcement, conrlection details, support items, dimensions, openings, and relationship to adjacent materials, sealed by a Structural Engineer registered in the State
of New Mexico.
B. Samples: Submit two 24 x 24 inch samples illustrating surface finish treatment.
C. Design Analysis: Submit design analysis and load charts including mixture proportion,
concrete strength, stress calculations; complete camber calculation showing initial
camber, estimated long term camber, and anticipated long term camber and deflection.
Design analysis shall indicate which code the design was based upon.
Test Reports: Certified copies of test reports including all data and results of tests performed as required by PCI Mnl-116. D.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Perform Work in accordance with PCI MNL-116, ACI-301 and ACI-318.
B. Welding: Comply with ANSI/AWS D1 .l.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 C-SpecsmlPrecastlPrestressed Concrete Hollow Core Planks 0341 1-1
SASC swvlwesf LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
C. Qualifications:
1.
2.
Fabricator: Firm specializing in production of floor units under plant-controlled
conditions, with minimum of 5 years documented experience.
Welders: Qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with ANSVAWS
D1.l and ANSVAWS D1.4.
D. Design:
experienced in design of this work and licensed in State of New Mexico.
Design units under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Handle precast units to position, consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support
only from support points.
Lifting or Handling Equipment: Capable of maintaining units during manufacture, storage,
transportation, erection, and in position for fastening.
Blocking and Lateral Support During Transport and Storage: Clean, non-staining, without
causing harm to exposed surfaces. Provide temporary lateral support to prevent bowing
and warping. Separate stacked members by battens across the full width at bearing
points.
Protect units to prevent staining, shipping, or spalling of concrete.
Mark units with date of production in location not visible to view when in final position in
structure.
1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Type It. Use same brand throughout.
B. Aggregate: ASTM C33
C. Water: Potable.
D. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, deformed steel bars, ASTM A185, welded steel wire
fabric ASTM A41 6, prestressing strand; plain finish, strength and size commensurate with
precast unit design.
E. Tensioning Steel Tendons: ASTM A416, Grade indicated in General Structural Notes as
required for member design.
F. Admixtures: Water reducing, retarding, accelerating ASTM C494 and air-entraining
ASTM C260, as recommended by the precast manufacturer.
G. Grout: Non-shrink, minimum 10,000 psi, 28 day strength.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 0341 1-2 C-Specs TM/Precast/ Prestressed Concrete Hollow Core Planks
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
SUPPORT DEVICES
A.
B.
Connecting and Support Devices: ASTM A36 weldable steel.
Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307 and ASTM A325, high strength steel as indicated
on drawings.
Primer: Zinc rich alkyd type, unless prohibited by VOC requirements. C.
ACCESSORIES
A.
MIX
A.
Bearing pads: As shown on Structural Drawings.
Concrete:
accordance with ACI-301. Minimum 5000 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent in
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Fabrication procedure to conform to PCI MNL-117.
Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of units. Make
records available upon request.
Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast unit uniform in shape, size and finish.
Maintain consistent quality during manufacture.
Fabricate connecting devices, plates, angles, items fit to steel framing members, inserts,
bolts, and accessories. Fabricate to permit initial placement and final attachment.
Embed reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts plates, angles, and other cast-in items as indicated on Shop Drawings.
Maintain temporary bracing in place until final support is provided. Protect members from
staining.
Adjust differential camber between members to tolerance before final attachment.
Level differential elevation of adjoining horizontal members with grout to maximum slope
of 1:12.
Grout underside of columns, beams, bearing plates and joints between members.
Secure units in place Perform welding in accordance with ANSIIAWS D1 .l .
Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as
non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.
Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing structural adequacy and appearance of
units is not impaired.
Tension reinforcement tendons as required to achieve design load criteria.
Exposed Ends at Stressing Tendons: Fill recess with non-shrink epoxy grout, trowel
flush.
D.F. Architects 96123ISASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
0341 1-3 C-Specs m/Precast/Prestressed Concrete Hollow Core Planks March 1,2005
SASC Southwest. UC Phoenix. LS V-S
FINISHING 2.06
2.07
2.08
A. Ensure exposed-to-view finish surfaces of precast concrete members are uniform in color
and appearance.
B. Cure members under identical conditions to develop required concrete quality, and
minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.
C. Finish members to PCI MNL-116, Commercial Standard grade.
D.
E.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter.
Galvanize after fabrication to 2.0 oz./sq. ft. in accordance with ANSVASTM A386.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Plant Quality Control Program: Sampling, testing and inspections shall be conducted by
the precast concrete manufacturer's plant and personnel currently certified by the PCI,
Plant Certification Program.
B. Testing shall be in compliance with applicable testing provisions in MNL-116, Manual for
Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products.
TESTS
A. Provide testing and analysis of stressing tendons under provisions of Section 01430.
B. Test samples in accordance with applicable ASTM standard.
C. Tests to be performed by an independent testing laboratory or in the manufacturer's
approved laboratory if the manufacturer has a PCI certified plant with proof of current
certification.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of
this Section.
PREPARATION
A. Provide for erection procedures and induced loads during erection. Maintain temporary
bracing in place until final support is provided.
B. Provide necessary hoisting equipment.
ERECTION
A.
B.
Erect units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged panels.
Erect units level within allowable tolerances of MNL-117.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 0341 1-4 C-SpecsTM/Precast/Prestressed Concrete Hollow Core Planks
SA% Soulhwesl. LLC
Phoenix. ks vagas
3.04
3.05
C. When units require adjustment beyond design or tolerance criteria, discontinue affected
work; advise Architect.
D. Fasten and weld units in place. Perform welding in accordance with ANSVAWS D1.1
Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanized surfaces.
E. Field-cut openings for utilities penetrations are not permitted unless recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Architect.
F. Bearing surfaces to be level and free from irregularities. Level irregularities in masonry
bearing surfaces as recommended by manufacturer or with stiff cement grout. Allow
grout to harden before installing units.
G. Install units at right angles to bearings, drawn up tight without forcing or distortion, and with sides plumb, and align slab ends.
H. Underside of slabs to present true ceiling surface when ceiling is exposed to view. Where shown on approved detail drawings, the keyways between units and other spaces shall be
cleaned and filled solid with grout. Grout that may have seeped through to surfaces in
spaces below shall be removed before hardening. Joints in ceilings that will be exposed
to view or painted shall be caulked as specified in Section 07900.
PROTECTION
A. Protect units from damage.
B.
CLEAN1 NG
Provide non-combustible shields during welding operations.
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
B. Clean weld marks, dirt, or blemishes from surface of exposed members.
C. Remove stains in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 I)
March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse 0341 1-5 C-Specsm/PrecastlPrestressed Concrete Hollow Core Planks
SASC southwest. LLC.
Phcenix . Las Vegas
SECTION 03450
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST
PART 1 SUMMARY
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Architectural items as follows, including supports, anchors and
attachments as shown on the Drawings and as specified:
1. Wall caps.
2. WindowNVall opening sills.
3. Chimney caps.
4. Other items as indicated.
1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design units to withstand design loads and erection forces. Calculate structural
properties of units in accordance with ACI-301.
B. Design units to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural
members and clearances of intended openings.
C. Design component connections to accommodate building movement and thermal
movement. Provide adjustment to accommodate misalignment of structure without unit
distortion or damage.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, unit locations, configuration, unit identification marks,
reinforcement, connection details, support items, location of lifting devices, dimensions,
openings, and relationship to adjacent materials. Provide erection drawings.
B. Samples: Submit two panels, 24 x 24 inch in size illustrating surface finish, color and
texture.
C. Calculations: Submit design calculations and design mix.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Perform Work in accordance with PCI MNL-117, PCI MNL-123, PCI MNL-
120, PCI Manual for Structural Design of Architectural Precast Concrete, and ACI-318.
B. Qualifications:
1.
2.
Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with
minimum 5 years documented experience.
Precast Manufacturer and Erectors: Qualified in accordance with PCI MNL-117.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle precast units to position, consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support
only from support points.
B. Lifting or Handling Equipment: Capable of maintaining units during manufacture, storage, transportation, erection, and in position for fastening.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 03450-1 C-Specsm/Architectural Precast Concrete
Plant Cast
0
SASC southwest, LLC. Phocnlx. Las vegas
C. Blocking and Lateral Support During Transport and Storage: Clean, non-staining, without
causing harm to exposed surfaces. Provide temporary lateral support to prevent bowing
and warping.
D. Protect units to prevent staining, shipping, or spalling of concrete.
E. Mark units with date of production in location not visible to view when in final position in
structure.
1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurem‘ents are as indicated on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Concrete Designs Inc., or as approved.
2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement:
otherwise required for selected color of finished units. Use same brand throughout.
ASTM C150, Portland Type Ill - High Early Strength, gray color, unless
B. Aggregate: ASTM C33.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, deformed steel bars, ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric; epoxy finish, strength and size commensurate with precast unit design.
E. Admixtures: Water reducing, retarding, accelerating ASTM C494 and air-entraining
ASTM C260, as recommended by the precast manufacturer.
F. Coloring Agent:
1. ASTM C979.
2. As manufactured by Frank Davis Company or L.M. Scofield Company or
Solomon Grind-Chem Service, Inc..
a. Color: Concrete Designs Inc., “Old Pewter G040, or as approved.
Color weight shall not exceed 10% of the weight of the cement. 3.
G. Grout: Non-shrink, minimum 10,000 psi, 28 day strength.
2.03 SUPPORT DEVICES
A. Connecting and Support Devices: ASTM A36 weldable steel.
B.
C.
Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307 and ASTM A325, high strength steel.
Primer: Zinc rich alkyd type, unless prohibited by VOC requirements.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 03450-2 C-Specsm/Architectural Precast Concrete Plant Cast
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
MIX
A. Concrete:
accordance with ACI-301.
Minimum 5000 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent in
FABRICATION
A.
B.
Fabrication procedure to conform to PCI MNL-117.
Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast units.
Make records available upon request.
Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast unit uniform in shape, size and finish.
Maintain consistent quality during manufacture.
Fabricate connecting devices, plates, angles, items fit to steel framing members, inserts,
bolts, and accessories. Fabricate to permit initial placement and final attachment.
Embed reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts plates, angles, and other cast-in items as
indicated on Shop Drawings.
Locate hoisting devices to permit removal after erection.
Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as
non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.
Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing structural adequacy and appearance of
units is not impaired.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
FINISH - PRECAST UNITS
A. Smooth Finish: Ensure exposed-to-view finish surfaces of precast units are uniform in
color and appearance with smooth or smooth rubbed finish as selected by Architect.
FINISH - SUPPORT DEVICES
A.
B.
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Conform to PCI MNL-117.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter.
Galvanize after fabrication to 2.0 oz./sq.ft. in accordance with ASTM A386.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of
this Section.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 0 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse 03450-3 C-Specsm/Architectural Precast Concrete
Plant Cast
March 1.2005
SASC southmst LLC. Phoenix. Las VeJaS
t 3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide for erection procedures and induced loads during erection. Maintain temporary
bracing in place until final support is provided.
B. Provide necessary hoisting equipment.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Erect units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units.
B. Erect units level and plumb within allowable tolerances of MNL-117.
C. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints as erection progresses.
D. When units require adjustment beyond design or tolerance criteria, discontinue affected
work; advise Architect.
E. Fasten and weld units in place. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.l
F. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanized surfaces.
G. Set vertical units dry, without grout, attaining joint dimension with lead or plastic spacers. Pack grout to base of unit.
H. Exposed Joint Dimension: 112 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect units from damage.
B.
3.05 CLEANING
Provide non-combustible shields during welding operations.
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises.
B. After erection is completed clean precast members with brushes, soap and water, then
rinse with clear water.
C. Remove stains in accordance’with manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3
March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse 03450-4 C-Specs”/Architectural Precast Concrete Plant Cast
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - Las Vesas
SECTION 04065
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART I GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Designs:
1. Submit mix designs and samples to the Architect for review prior to delivering
materials to the site or commencing the Work.
a.
b. Grout Mix Design: Furnished by either the grout supplier or an
Submit comprehensive strength data
Mortar Mix Design: Furnish in accordance with ASTM C270.
independent testing laboratory.
with mix design submittals when pozzolans are used.
B. Product Data: If alternative mortar materials are to be provided, submit current
instructions stating the actual quantities and mixing instructions for alternative mortar
materials to conform to specified requirements.
1. Submit test report data substantiating compliance with specified performance
requirements.
2. Submit current ICC Evaluation Report.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Protection: Cementitious materials shall be stored off the ground, under
cover and shall be kept dry.
B. Preblended Mortar Mix Delivery System: The use of dry preblended mortar silos and bulk
bags shall be acceptable. Bulk bags and silos shall be sealed to prohibit contamination of
the ingredients and to keep the materials dry until mixed.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Hot Weather Requirements: Wet mortar board before loading and cover mortar
to retard drying when not being used.
2. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with "Recommended Practices and
Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" by IMIAC; provide
adequate equipment for heating the mortar and grout materials, when air
temperature is below 40 degrees F.. Temperatures of the separate materials,
including water, shall not exceed 140 degrees F. when placed in the mixer.
When air temperature is below 32 degrees F., maintain mortar temperature on
boards above freezing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS I
A. Mortar:
1. Cement: Type I1 Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1, 2005 04065-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Mortar and Masonry Grout
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC
phoenix.Lasvegas
2. Aggregate: Clean, sharp and well graded and free from injurious amounts of
dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings and organic matter, conforming to
ASTM C144, except that no less than 3 percent nor more than 10 percent shall
pass a No. 100 sieve.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 3.
4. Water: Clean and potable.
5. Admixtures:
a.
b. Mineral: In accordance with Section 03055.
C. Alternative Plasticizer: Pozzolanic formulation consisting of a
combination of hydroxy aluminum silicates and diatomite:
1 ) Alternative Plasticizer Manufacturer: Engaged in producing
materials with a satisfactory performance record for at least 5
years.
2) Mortar mix design shall be in accordance with ICC Evaluation Report, in accordance with the mortar type specified elsewhere in
this specification.
3) Provide alternative plasticizer in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, including specific mixing instruction.
4) No other admixtures shall be used in conjunction with the
alternative plasticizer unless approved in writing by the alternative
plasticizer manufacturer.
5) Packing and Shipping: Mortar admixture(s) shall be delivered to
the job site in manufacturer's original containers with seals
unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's batch number.
Chemical: The use of accelerator admixtures, water reducing plasticizers
and other chemical admixtures shall not be allowed.
B. Grout:
1.
2.
Cement: Type II Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150.
Aggregate: ASTM C404 and as follows:
a.
b.
Sand: Size No. 1 for fine aggregate.
Pea Gravel: Size No. 8 for coarse aggregate.
3. Water: Clean and potable.
2.02 MIXES
A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type S.
1. Measurement: Accurately measure materials by ASTM C270 by the Property
Method per Table 2..
2. Mix cementitious materials and aggregates 3 to 5 minutes in a mechanical mixer.
Small amounts of mortar may be mixed by hand. Adjust consistency of the
mortar depending on the absorptive quality of the units being laid, and to the
satisfaction of the mason.
If mortar begins to stiffen, it may be retempered by adding water within a basin
formed by the mortar, and remixing.
Use within 2-1/2 hours of initial mixing and no mortar shall be used after it has
begun to set or after is has become harsh or non-plastic. Mix color in a specific and exacting ratio in accordance with the Architect's
reviewed submittals.
Preblended Mortar Mix: Provide mortar as specified herein, except that dry
ingredients may be preblended and bulk packaged for delivery to a jobsite silo
(which loads into batch mixer) or bagged for hand loading into mixer. Moisture
shall be extracted from sands. Digital printouts displaying the proportions of each
batch shall be submitted to the Architect upon request. Mixing shall be
accomplished by mechanical mixer in accordance with instructions provided by
Preblended Mortar Mix Distributor.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 04065-2 C-Specs"/Mortar and
Masonry Grout
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - Las V-s
B. Grout:
1. Job-Site Mixed: In accordance with ASTM C476.
2. Transit-Mixed:
a. Designed by the supplier or an independent testing laboratory with a
minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi (140mPa) in 28 days, unless
higher strength is required by the Structural Drawings and Notes.
Slump: Not to exceed 8 inches, unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
Use within 1-1/2 hours of initial mixing and use no grout after it has begun
to set or after it has become harsh or non-plastic.
Course grout may be used in cavity walls with a horizontal dimension of 2
inches or more, and in hollow cell construction 4 inches or more in both
horizontal directions.
b.
C.
d.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of mortar and grout shall be as specified under each of the following Sections:
1.
2.
Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry
Section 0471 0 - Simulated Stone
B. Temperature: Mortar and grout shall have a temperature between 50 degrees F. and 90
degrees F. while being used.
C. Grout may be poured by hand bucket, concrete hopper or though a grout pump. Grout
spaces shall not be wet down prior to pouring grout.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Tests and inspections as necessary to verify quality and strength of mortar and
grout. Laboratory tests shall conform to applicable ASTM standards and tests.
B. Tests:
1. Frequency: As determined by the Architect based upon total time for construction
of masonry with not less than two tests per each level of masonry construction,
foundation to roof or floors.
Testing Laboratory: Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by a
testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01430. The testing laboratory, in
addition to meeting requirements of ASTM E329, must be an approved laboratory
competent to perform cement physical testing. Distribution of Results of Tests: Within 24 hours of results of tests, copies of the
results shall be submitted to the Architect, Contractor, masonry contractor, and
the grout supplier if applicable.
2.
3.
C. Mortar:
1.
2.
Property Specification (ASTM C270): Testing in accordance with ASTM C 780.
For determining hardened mortar properties, prepare 3 test specimens for each
test age and property. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of the
specimens tested at the age specified. Specimens shall be tested at 7 and 28
days.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 04065-3
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Mortar and Masonry Grout
SASC SOUTHWEST. UC Phoenix - Las Vegas
D. Grout: 1. Testing per ASTM C1019.
2.
3.
4.
Three test specimens shall constitute one sample. A strength test shall be the
average of the strengths of the specimen tested at the age specified.
Specimens shall be tested at 7 and 28 days.
The compression strength will be considered satisfactory if the average of three
consecutive tests of the grout is equal to or greater than the specified strength
and no individual strength test falls below the specified strength by more than 500
psi.
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123EASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 04065-4
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs"/Mortar and Masonry Grout
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART I GENERAL
1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
Masonry Structures", except as otherwise indicated.
Comply with the requirements of ACI 530.11ASCE 6 "Specifications for
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1.
2.
Masonry materials and workmanship shall meet requirements of building codes
which are applicable to jurisdiction in which Project is located.
Fireplace Construction: In conformance with NFPA 21 1, "Chimneys, Fireplaces,
Vents and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances."
1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle masonry units in such a manner as to prevent chipping and
breakage.
B.
C.
Deliver and store materials in dry, protected areas.
Keep free of stain or other damage.
D. Locate storage piles, pallets, stacks or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy or
unnecessary traffic.
E. Replace damaged material at no cost to Owner.
1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Hot Weather Requirements:
1. When ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F., or when ambient air
temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. and wind velocity is greater than 8 mph,
Masonry Contractor shall implement hot weather protection procedures as
submitted to Architect.
Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 feet ahead of placing block units.
Place block units within one minute of spreading mortar.
2.
3.
B. Cold Weather Requirements:
1.
2.
Fully protect concrete masonry units against freezing by a weather-tight covering
which shall also prevent accumulation of ice.
Do not lay concrete masonry units when temperature of surrounding atmosphere
is below 40 degrees F. or is likely to fall below 40 degrees F. in the 24 hour period
after laying, unless adequate protection is provided.
Verify measurements shown on Drawings by taking field measurements.
Proper fit and attachment of concrete masonry units is required.
C. Field Measurements:
1.
2.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 I)
March 1,2005 04220-1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/ Concrete Masonry Units
SASC southwesl uc Phoenix - Las VWs
1.04 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A. Coordination: Coordinate with other Trades whose Work relates to concrete masonry unit
installation for placing required blocking, backing, furring, conduits and other items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General Requirements for Concrete Masonry Unit:
1. Concrete masonry units shall meet ASTM C90, Grade I requirements except that
when CMU will be exposed in final construction, ASTM C90-98, paragraph 7.2.1
shall be modified to read: "Three percent of a shipment containing chips not
larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension, or cracks not wider than 0.02 in. and not
longer than 10% of the nominal height of the unit is permitted."
Units shall be in the same condition in wall as they were upon delivery.
Unit sizes shall be 8 by 8 by 16 inches or as shown on Drawings.
Surface of units shall be clean and free from dirt when laid in walls.
Units not complying with the appropriate ASTM Standards shall not be laid in the
wall where exposed to view. Any unit that is chipped in excess of the
requirements will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced.
Provide special block sizes and shapes required or as shown on Drawings.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B. Hollow CMU Classifications: The following requirements shall apply to all shapes, colors,
textures and sizes of CMU provided.
1. Lightweight units: Weighing less than 105 Ibs. per cubic foot and manufactured
from volcanic scoria aggregate per ASTM C331.
2. Medium weight units: Weighing 105 Ibs. per cubic foot to less than 125 Ibs. per
cubic foot and manufactured from a combination of volcanic scoria aggregate
conforming to ASTM C331 and sand conforming to ASTM C33.
Normal weight units: Weighing 125 Ibs. per cubic foot or more and manufactured with sand conforming to ASTM C33. 3.
C. Accessory Units: Provide units as required for window sills and jambs, doors, control
joints, bond beams, lintels, pilaster, caps and other locations as indicated on Drawings with a minimum of block cutting. Accessory units shall match adjacent unit color and
texture unless noted otherwise.
D. Fireplace:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Firebrick: ASTM C27, Medium Duty.
Clay Flue Liner: ASTM C315, 5/8" wall thickness, shape as indicated on
drawings.
Damper: Manufacturer acceptable to Architect, size as required for fireplace
opening(s).
Refractory Mortar: Medium-duty mortar as determined by ASTM C199. Provide
at firebrick locations
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Precast Concrete Sills, wall caps and chimney caps are specified in Section 03450.
6. Joint Reinforcing: Ladder type, galvanized steel rods of width 2 inches less than wall
thickness conforming to 1997 UBC Standard 21-10, Part 1.
C. Reinforcing Steel: As specified under Section 03200.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 04220-2 C-Specsm/ Concrete Masonry Units
SAX souvlwest. LLC Phoenix * Las Vegas
D. Control Joints: 1. Rubber: Extruded, solid section, ASTM D2000 2AA-805 with a durometer
hardness of 70 or 80 when tested per ASTM D2240.
2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): ASTM D2287, Type PVC 654-4 with a durometer
hardness of 85 (+5) when tested per ASTM D2240, minimum tensile strength of
1750 psi with minimum 300 percent elongation per ASTM D638, and cold crack
brittleness of 50 degrees F per ASTM D746.
Sizes and Profiles: As indicated on Drawings. 3.
E. Mortar and Grout: As specified under Section 04065.
F. Nailing Strips: See Section 061 00.
G. Sheet Metal Flashings: See Section 07600.
H. Steel Lintels: As indicated or scheduled on Structural Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
EXAMINATION
A. Installer shall examine supporting structure and conditions under which unit masonry is to
be installed, and notify Contractor, in writing, conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of Work. Do not proceed with the installation of unit masonry Work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
B. Do not use units with chips, cracks, or other defects which might be visible in the finished
Work unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.
C. Do not build on frozen Work; remove and replace unit masonry Work damaged by frost or
freezing.
D. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not lower
freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents, and do not use
calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect sills, ledges, offsets and other projections from dropping of mortar
and grout.
ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
A. General Requirements for Concrete Masonry Walls:
1. Workmanship:
a. Concrete masonry units which will be exposed in the finished work shall
be treated as an architectural finish and shall be handled carefully to
ensure that chippages do not occur during handling and laying. Handling shall be minimized on the jobsite to eliminate chances for chippage.
Lay units in uniform and true courses, level and plumb to height indicated on
Drawings.
Lay concrete unit masonry in such a way that cracks are not formed at time unit is
placed in wall. Units shall not be wetted before being used and shall be laid dry.
2.
3.
4. - D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 04220-3 C-Specsm/ Concrete Masonry Units
SAX SouVlwest. LLC Phoenix * Las Vegas
5. Adjusting Units:
a. Units shall be adjusted to be level, plumb and straightened into final
position in wall while mortar is still soft and plastic enough to ensure a
good bond.
b. Avoid over-plumbing and pounding of corners and jambs to fit stretcher
units after they are set in position.
C. If position of unit is shifted after mortar has stiffened, or bond is broken or
cracks are formed, re-lay unit in new mortar.
Bearings on Walls: Provide 3 courses of solid units or grouted hollow masonry
units below steel bearing plates or beams bearing on walls. Extend bearings
each side of contact with load as required to properly transfer loads into wall.
Openings: Provide openings in masonry walls where required or indicated. Steel
lintels shall be provided unless otherwise noted.
Cutting of masonry: When required, exposed block units shall be cut with a
power driven Carborundum or diamond disc blade saw. When using "wet" cutting
methods, clean water shall be used on exposed units.
Anchor masonry units facing against or abutting concrete members to concrete
by use of dovetailed flat bar anchors inserted in slots built into concrete.
a. Space anchors not more than 16 inches vertically and 24 inches
horizontally.
b. Maintain a space not less than 1/2 inch width between masonry and
concrete members, keeping space free of mortar or other rigid materials
6.
7.
8.
9.
~~~~~ ~ - ~~- so as to permit differential movement,
B. Bonding:
1.
2.
Bond pattern shall be regular running bond unless indicated otherwise on the
drawings.
Bond shall be plumb throughout face of wall.
C. Bearing Wall Intersections:
1. Intersecting block bearing walls shall not be tied together in a masonry bond,
except at corners.
2. One wall shall terminate at face of other wall with a control joint at intersection.
3. Tie intersecting wall together with a metal tie bar, 1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inches x 2'4' long with a 2 inch right angle bend at each end of bar, spaced vertically at 2 feet
Bends at ends of tie bars shall be embedded in grouted cells.
Rake out vertical joint between intersecting walls to a depth of 3/4 inch after
mortar has stiffened.
Provide sealing of control joint as specified in Section 07900.
~~ on center.
4.
5.
6.
D. Non-Bearing Wall Intersections:
1. Tie non-bearing wall together with strips of metal lath or galvanized 1/4 inch mesh
- -hardware-cloth placed across joint between 2 walls placed in alternate horizontal
block courses.
Rake out vertical joint between intersecting walls to a depth of 314 inch after
mortar has stiffened.
Provide sealing of control joint as specified in Section 07900.
__~ ~ -~
2.
3.
- - - . E. Joining of Work:
1. Where fresh masonry joins partially set masonry the exposed surface of the set
masonry shall be cleaned and lightly wetted so as to obtain the best possible
bond.
Remove loose concrete block and mortar. 2.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 04220-4
Carlstrad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsmI Concrete Masonry Units
SASC soulhwest, LLC Phoenix * Las vegas
3.
4.
F. Mortar
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Stop-off a horizontal run of masonry by racking back 112 brick length in each
course and, if grout is used, stopping the grout 4 inches back of the rack.
Toothing will not be permitted, except upon written approval of the Architect.
Joints:
Joints shall be straight, clean and a uniform 3/8 inch thickness on exposed wall
face.
Exposed vertical and horizontal joints shall be tooled when mortar is "thumbprint"
hard with round or other approved jointer, slightly larger than the width of the
joints to produce a dense, slightly concave surface which is well bonded to block
at edges, or as indicated.
Joints shall be struck flush at surface to receive dampproofing, waterproofing,
ceramic tile, or other finishes requiring flush joints that are to be concealed.
Where interior walls are to receive plaster or other finishes, strike joints flush.
Solidly fill joints from face of unit to depth of face shell, except where specified
otherwise.
Full bedding to be provided for first course on foundation and wherever maximum
strength is required.
Butter vertical head joints well and shove these joints tight so that mortar bonds
well to both units.
Full coverage to be provided on bed of face shells and webs surrounding cells to
be filled.
Bee-holes or other open joints shall be filled and tooled with mortar while mortar
is still fresh.
G. Control Joints:
1. Provide control joints, as detailed, at vertical masonry walls where such walls
exceed 40.feet in length. In long length of walls, provide joints at approximately
24 feet on center or as detailed. Control joints shall be continuous full height of walls.
At bond beams, control joints shall separate both block and grout; however, steel
reinforcing shall be continuous.
Horizontal wire reinforcing shall not run through control joint.
Control joints shall not occur at wall corners, intersections, ends, within 24 inches
of concentrated points of bearing or jambs or over openings unless specifically indicated on Structural Drawings.
Control joint materials shall be held back from finished surface as required to
allow for sealant and back-up materials.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing:
1.
2.
Place horizontal joint reinforcing every 16 inches vertically throughout wall
construction.
Continuously reinforce first bed joint immediately above and below openings.
Provide reinforcing in second bed joint above and below openings which extends
2 feet beyond each side of opening.
Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches at splices.
Cut and bend reinforcing at corners.
3.
4.
I. Vertical Reinforcing and Bond Beam Reinforcing:
1.
2.
Place in accordance with requirements of Drawings.
Vertical Reinforcement: Provide continuous reinforcing full height of wall at wall ends, corners, intersections, jambs of openings and each side of control joints.
Vertical reinforcing shall match and lap dowels which are at top of foundation
walls and precast concrete beams.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 04220-5
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/ Concrete Masonry Units
SASC southmst, LLC Phoenix. Las vepas
3.
4.
5.
Bond Beams: Provide horizontal reinforcing of 2 bars in minimum 8 inch deep
grouted continuous bond beam at roof and elevated floor lines.
Parapets: Provide horizontal reinforcing of 1 bar in minimum 8 inch deep grouted
continuous bond beam at top of parapets. Bond Beam and Parapet Reinforcing at Vertical Control Joints: Place bars
continuous through control joint and wrap mastic tape around bars for 18 inches
each side of control joint.
Bond Beam and Parapet Reinforcing at Corners and Wall Intersections: Provide
bent bars to match reinforcing at comers and wall intersections.
Lap splices in reinforcing not less than 40 bar diameters for #7 and larger bars;
30 bar diameters for #6 and smaller bars.
Use spacers to position reinforcing steel in center of grout at center of wall as
required by code.
6.
7.
8.
J. Grouting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
- Reinforcing steel is to be in place and inspected before grouting starts.
Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous cell
area.
Keep cell to be grouted free from mortar.
Fill cells solidly with grout in lifts not to exceed 4 feet.
Grout may be poured by hand bucket, concrete hopper or through a grout pump. Do not wet down grout space prior to pouring of grout.
Stop pours 1 -1/2 inches below top of cell to form a key at pour points.
Grout shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration during placing before loss of
plasticity in a manner to fill grout space. Grout pours greater than 12 inches shall be reconsolidated by mechanical vibration to minimize voids due to water loss.
Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be mechanically vibrated, or rodded.
Grout barrier below bond beams shall be continuous wire lath or other approved
material.
Grout beams over openings and bond beams in a continuous operation.
Solidly grout in place bolts, anchors and other items within wall construction.
Fully grout jambs and head of metal door frames connected to masonry. Filling
of frames shall be done as each 2 feet of masonry is laid.
Use extreme care to prevent grout or mortar from staining face of the masonry.
Immediately remove grout or mortar which is visible on face of masonry.
K. Provisions for Other Trades and Built-in Items:
1. Build in items required and indicated, including; but not limited to, reinforcing
steel, anchors, flashings, sleeves, frames, structural steel, loose lintels, anchor bolts, nailing blocks, door and window frames and miscellaneous iron.
Enclosures for pipes, stacks, ducts and conduits: a.
b.
C.
2.
Construct slots, chases, cavities, and similar spaces as required.
Where masonry is to enclose conduit or piping, bring it to proper level
indicated and as directed.
Cover no pipe, conduit chases or enclosures until advised that Work has
been inspected and approved.
L. Tolerances:
1. Standard and Economy Level of Quality: a. External corners and other conspicuous lines and levels: +/- 1/2 inch in
any 10’-0 section.
b. Line of sealant filled movement joints (allowable deviation from specified or indicated): +/- 1/2 inch in any 10’-0” section.
C. Actual cross sectional dimension of columns and walls (allowable
deviation from specified or indicated): - 3/8 inch, + 3/4 inch.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 04220-6 C-SpecsTM/ Concrete Masonry Units
SASC southwast. LLC Phoenix - Las Vegas
d. Adjacent unit faces in plane (allowable deviation from specified or
indicated): +/- 3/16 inch.
e. Mortar bed joint thickness (allowable deviation from specified or
indicated): -1/8 inch, +1/4 inch.
f. Mortar head joint thickness (allowable deviation from specified or
indicated): - 1/4 inch, + 3/8 inch.
9- Vertical alignment of the centerline of corresponding head joints in
alternate courses when using other than stack bond (allowable deviation
from specified or indicated): +/- 5/8 inch.
Vertical alignment of the centerline of all head joints in a total wall height
not to exceed 30’4” when using other than stack bond (allowable
deviation from specified or indicated): +/- 2 inches.
Vertical alignment of the centerline of all head joints in total wall height
not to exceed 30’-0 when using stack bond: (allowable deviation from
specified or indicated): +/- one inch.
h.
1.
M. Joint and Crack Control: In accordance with NCMA TEK 10-1.
N. Flashing: In accordance with NCMA TEK 19-2 and 19-4 and as per manufacturer’s
flashing and weep hole diagrams.
0. Fireplace construction:
1. Support for extended hearth and combustion chamber:
a.
b.
Corbel masonry foundation wall, or provide concrete slab as indicated. Supporting concrete slab shall be reinforced, capable of resisting thermal
stresses resulting from exposure to high temperatures and shall have
blockouts for external combustion air dampers and ash drops.
C. Permanent forming materials shall be non-combustible.
a. Isolate firebrick and clay flue liner from concrete masonry by a nominal
one inch air space.
b. Provide fiberglass batt insulation or other non-combustible material in air
space to ensure that air space does not become filled with mortar.
C. Height of chimney shall be as indicated on drawings and in accordance with building code requirements.
d. Mortar joints for refractqry mortar shall not exceed 1/4 inch.
Lintel and damper installation: Do not solidly embed ends in mortar to allow for
expansion.
a.
b.
C.
2. Firebox and Chimney:
3.
4. Smoke chamber:
Provide damper, smoke shelf, smoke dome and surrounding concrete
masonry as indicated on drawings.
Smoke shelf shall be constructed of mortar and shall be curved to assist
in checking down drafts.
Smoke dome shall be constructed so that the side walls and front wall
taper inward to form the support of the chimney and shall be parged to
reduce friction and to prevent leakage of gases and smoke.
Void Areas: Provide void areas at base for form air passageway for external
combustion air or ash pit as indicated. Non-essential void areas shall be solidly filled with masonry.
5.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Masonry Tests:
laboratory in accordance with Section 01430.
1.
Inspection and testing of masonry will be performed by a testing
Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.
D.F. Architects 96123KASC 05-191-3 0
March 1,2005 04220-7 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/ Concrete Masonry Units
3.05
3.06
3.07
2. A set of 3 masonry prisms shall be built and tested in accordance with ASTM
C1314 (formerly E447) Method B for each 5,000 square feet of wall area, but not
less than one set of 3 masonry prisms for the Project.
ADJUSTING
A. Pointing of Mortar Joints:
1.
2. 3.
4.
Point and fill holes and cracks in exposed mortar joints.
Cut out defective mortar joints to a depth of at least 114 inch.
When cutting is complete, remove dust and loose material by brushing or
vacuuming.
Prehydrate mortar for pointing by mixing dry ingredients with only sufficient water
to produce a damp mass of such consistency that it will retain its form when it is
pressed into a ball with hands, but will not flow under trowel.
Allow mortar to stand for a period of not less than one hour nor more than 2
hours, after which remix with addition of sufficient water to produce satisfactory
workability.
Pointing mortars shall be identical to adjacent mortar in similar joints and finish
results shall match and be indistinguishable from original mortar used.
Premoisten joint and apply mortar tightly.
Tool to match adjacent joints.
Moist cure for 72 hours.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B. Patching: If approved by Architect, patching of exposed masonry walls shall be done at
conclusion of general Work and shall conform as closely as possible to similar
surrounding or adjoining Work.
CLEANING
A. Daily Cleaning: Keep walls clean. Soiled masonry from mortar and grout spills which will
exposed to view at completion of Project shall be cleaned immediately with stiff fiber
brushes until wall is free of dropped or spattered mortar.
B. Remove scaffolding and equipment used in Work.
C.
PROTECTION
Clean up debris, refuse and surplus material and remove from premises.
A.
B.
Furnish temporary protection for exposed masonry corners subject to injury.
Carefully cover tops of walls left incomplete at conclusion of day's Work with tarpaulins or
other approved covering.
C. In hot and dry weather, protect masonry against too rapid drying.
D. Protect finished Work against freezing for a period of not less than 48 hours by means of
enclosures, artificial heat, or such other protective methods as may be required.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 04220-8 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTMI Concrete Masonry Units
SAX SOUTHWEST. UC Phoenix. bs Vegas
SECTION 04270
GLASS UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
I .03
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product and installation data.
B. Submit samples to the Architect for review prior to delivering materials or commencing
the Work. Provide 2 samples of glass unit masonry, showing type, pattern and color, to
be used on the Project. Units shall match these samples.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards and Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Section 04220.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. comply with Section 04220, and the following:
1.
2.
Store glass unit masonry on wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining,
waterproof membrane.
Protect stored glass unit masonry from weather with waterproof, non-staining
covers or enclosures, but allow air to circulate around glass units.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Comply with Section 04220.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, subject to compliance with
Specification requirements.
1. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. w.Dittsburqhcornina.com
2. Weck. www.qlashaus.com
3. As approved by the Architect.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Glass Masonry Units:
1. General Requirements:
a. Surface of units shall be clean and free from dirt when laid in walls.
b. Provide a minimum thickness of 3 inches at the mortar joint for vertical
walls.
C. Mortar contact surfaces shall be treated to ensure adhesion between
mortar and glass. d. Units not complying with ASTM Standards shall not be laid in the wall.
Any unit that is chipped, broken, or otherwise defective will be rejected
and shall be removed and replaced.
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 04270-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Glass Unit Masonry
SASC SOUTHWEST, UC phoenix. Las Vega3
2. Size: 7 314 inches x 7 314 inches x 3 118 inches (8 x 8 x 3 Nominal), unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3. Pattern: Flat pattern, translucent design as selected by Architect, unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Mortar Materials: As specified in Section 04065, and as follows:
1. Integral Type Waterproofer: Provide metallic-stearate-type; Hydracide Powder B.
by Sonneborn, Sika Red Label, or equal.
C. Mortar Mix: ASTM C 270, Type S mixed in accordance with Section 04220.
1. Provide mortar mix with an integral type waterproofer. If a waterproof Portland
cement is used, omit the integral type waterproofer. Omit the waterproofer for
interior panels.
Mortar prepared from masonry cement meeting requirements of ASTM C91,
Type II, incorporating a metallic-stearate-type waterproofer and mixed to the
Manufacturer's recommendation is an acceptable alternative.
2.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Panel Anchors: No. 20 gauge perforated steel strips 24 inches long by 1-314 inches wide,
punched with 3 rows of elongated holes, pattern staggered, galvanized after perforating.
1. Provide panel anchors as furnished by the Glass Block Manufacturer.
2. Panel anchors shall be bent within expansion joints, and shall generally be placed
24 inches apart occurring in the same joint as panel reinforcing and shall be
completely embedded in the mortar joint of the glass block panels.
Size and location as recommended by the Glass Block Manufacturer. 3.
6. Panel Reinforcing: Provide panel reinforcing of galvanized steel double wire mesh
formed of two parallel wires either 1438 inch or 2 inch, on centers with electrically welded cross wires at regular intervals.
C. Expansion Strips: Dense fibrous glass batt used in expansion spaces at the jambs and
heads, installed per the Glass Block Manufacturer's recommendations. Color to
approximately match mortar color.
D. Steel Lintels: As scheduled on Structural Drawings and as specified in Section 05100.
E. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide and install packing, sealant, asphalt emulsion, and
other items not supplied by others, as required to provide a complete installation per the
Glass Block Manufacturer's product and installation recommendations.
2.04 MIXING
A. Mortar: Comply with Section 04065.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Examination and Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 04220.
Do not use glass units with chips, cracks, or other defects which might be visible in the
finished Work unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 04270-2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Glass Unit Masonry
SASC SOUTHWEST, LLC Phoenix - Las 'degas
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
B.
Comply with Section 04220, and the following:
Sill area to be covered by mortar shall have a heavy coat of water based asphalt
emulsion.
C. Adhere expansion strips to jambs and head with sufficient quantities of a water based asphalt emulsion. Verify expansion strip extends to sill.
D. When emulsion on sill is dry, place full mortar bed joint-do not furrow.
3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
A. General Requirements for Glass Unit Masonry Walls:
I. Workmanship: Provide workmanship in accordance with Glass Block
Manufacturer and the following. Where these specified requirements conflict with
the Manufacturer's printed instructions, Manufacturer's printed instructions shall
govern.
Erect glass masonry units and accessories in accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions. When emulsion on sill is dry, place full mortar bed joint.
Do not furrow, and set lower course of block. Mortar joints must be full and not
furrowed.
Provide spacers as required by Glass Block Manufacturer.
Lay glass masonry units in uniform and true courses, level and plumb to height
indicated on Drawings.
Steel tools must not be used to tap blocks into position.
Units shall be adjusted to be level, plumb, and straightened into final position in
the wall while the mortar is still soft and plastic enough to ensure a good bond. If
the position of the unit is shifted after the mortar has stiffened, or bond is broken
or cracks are formed, re-lay unit in new mortar.
Place succeeding courses in the same fashion.
Isolate panel from adjacent construction on sides and top with expansion strips
concealed within perimeter trim. Keep expansion joints voids clear of mortar.
Shore placed units until setting bed will maintain panel in position without
movement.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B. Mortar Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Exposed vertical and horizontal joints shall be tooled to produce a dense slightly
concave joint which is well bonded to the block at edges.
Place full mortar bed for joints not requiring panel reinforcing - do not furrow.
Unexposed joints shall be full and not furrowed.
Joints shall be straight, clean and of uniform thickness on exposed wall face.
Strike joints smooth while mortar is still plastic and before final set.
Butter vertical head joints well and shove these joints tight so that the mortar
bonds well to both units. Bee-holes or other open joints shall be filled and tooled with mortar while mortar
is still fresh.
Rake out spaces requiring sealing to a depth equal to the width of the spaces.
Remove surplus mortar from faces of glass blocks and wipe dry.
Tool joints smooth before mortar takes final set.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 04270-3
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Glass Unit Masonry
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - Las Vegas
C. Bonding:
1.
2.
3.
Bond pattern shall be stack bond unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
Bond shall be plumb throughout face of wall.
Arrange pattern to provide consistent joint work throughout.
D. Panel Reinforcing: Install panel reinforcing in horizontal joints where required and as
follows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Place lower half of mortar in bed joint. Do not furrow.
Press panel reinforcing in place.
Cover panel reinforcing with upper half of mortar bed and trowel smooth. Do not
furrow.
Panel reinforcing must run from end to end of panels. Lap joints in reinforcing where used continuously not less than 6 inches.
Panel reinforcing shall not bridge expansion joints.
Reinforcing shall be embedded in joints immediately above and below openings
within panels.
Cut and bend reinforcing at corners.
E. Anchors:
1.
2.
Set panel anchors in mortar bed directly over coating.
Panel anchors shall be bent within expansion joints, and shall generally be placed
24 inches apart occurring in the same joint as panel reinforcing and must be
completely embedded in the mortar joint of the glass block panels.
Set glass blocks in accordance with Drawings and final Shop Drawings.
Provide anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments shown or necessary
to secure glass unit masonry in place.
Shim and adjust accessories for proper setting of glass unit. masonry.
3.
4.
5.
F. Tolerances: Comply with Sect6ion 04220.
G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints where shown or where recommended by the
Glass Block Manufacturer.
1. Do not fill with mortar.
2. Install continuous strips of preformed joint filler to allow for installation of backer
rod and sealant, specified in Section 07900.
H. After final mortar set, pack oakum lightly between glass block panel and jamb and head construction. Leave space for sealant.
Seal panels as indicated on details, and per requirements of Section 07900. I.
3.04 POINTING
A. Pointing of Mortar Joints: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Point and fill holes and cracks in exposed mortar joints.
Cut out defective mortar joints to a depth of at least 114 inch, refill solidly with mortar and tool as specified.
When cutting is complete, remove dust and loose material by brushing or
vacuuming.
Prehydrate mortar for pointing by mixing the dry ingredients with only sufficient
water to produce a damp mass of such consistency that it will retain its form when
it is pressed into a ball with the hands, but will not flow under the trowel.
Allow mortar to stand for a period of not less than one hour nor more than 2
hours, after which remix with the addition of sufficient water to produce
satisfactory workability.
5.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 04270-4
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Glass Unit Masonry
6.
7. a.
9.
Pointing mortars shall be identical to adjacent mortar in similar joints and finish
results shall match and be indistinguishable from original mortar used.
Premoisten joint and apply mortar tightly.
Tool to match adjacent joints.
Moist cure for 72 hours.
B. Patching:
1. If approved by the Architect, patching of exposed glass unit masonry walls shall
be done at the conclusion of the general Work and shall conform as closely as
possible to similar surrounding or adjoining Work.
Remove and replace glass block units which are broken, chipped, or otherwise
damaged. Where directed, remove and replace units which do not match
adjoining glass unit masonry. Provide new matching units, install as specified
and point-up joints as required to provide a neat, uniform appearance.
2.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Daily Cleaning:
1.
2.
Keep glass unit walls and panels clean.
Soiled glass unit masonry from mortar and grout spills which will exposed to view
at the completion of the Project shall be cleaned immediately in a Manufacturer
approved manner acceptable to the Architect.
B. Clean-up: Comply with Section 04220.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Comply with Section 04220.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123EASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 04270-5
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Glass Unit Masonry
SASC SOUTHWEST, UC
phOeniX.LasV~
SECTION 04710
SIMULATED STONE
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .Ol
1.02
1.03
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples to the Architect for review prior to constructing job-site mock-
ups, delivering materials to the site or commencing the work in this Section.
1. Simulated Stone Samples:
a. Provide 8 samples of simulated stone, in size and shape consistent with
the stone type to be synthesized, to be used on the Project showing
range of texture and/or color variations of the exposed surfaces.
Units provided to the Project shall match these samples. b.
6.
C. Product Data:
Procedures: Submit requirements for hot and cold weather protection.
1. 2.
Provide product data on simulated stone units.
Submit literature on sealer, including manufacturer's installation instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company with minimum 3 years experience in the installation of
manufactured stone veneers of the type specified.
Regulatory Requirements: Materials and workmanship shall meet requirements of the
building codes which are applicable to the jurisdiction in which Project is located. B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle simulated stone in such a manner as to prevent chipping and
breakage.
B. Deliver and store materials in dry, protected areas.
C. Keep free of stain or other damage.
D. Locate storage piles, pallets, stacks or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy or
unnecessary traffic.
E. Replace damaged material at no cost to Owner.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Hot Weather Requirements: 1. When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F., or when the ambient
air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. and the wind velocity is greater than 8
mph, the Simulated Stone Contractor shall implement hot weather protection procedures as submitted to the Architect. Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 feet ahead of placing simulated stone.
Place simulated stone within one minute of spreading mortar.
2. 3.
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 0471 0-1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Simulated Stone
SASC SOUTHWEST, LLC Phoenix * Las Vegas
B. Cold Weather Requirements:
1.
2.
Fully protect simulated stone against freezing by a weather-tight covering which
shall also prevent accumulation of ice.
Do not lay simulated stone when the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere
is below 40 degrees F. or is likely to fall below 40 degrees F. in the 24 hour period
after laying, unless adequate protection is provided.
1.05 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A. Coordination: Coordinate with other work relating to simulated stone installation for
placing required blocking, backing, furring, conduits and other items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURERS
A. Simulated stone as manufactured by the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1.
2.
Cultured Stone Corporation, Napa, CA (800) 255-1 727.
As approved by the Architect.
SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A. Simulated Stone Veneer: Provide texture blend of 80 percent Chardonnay Southern
Ledgstone and 20 percent Chardonnay Dressed Fieldstone as manufactured by Cultured
Stone, or as approved to match Architects Sample.
1. Stone shall be fabricated with “natural” variations in color texture and
appearance.
2. Provide individual units manufactured to fit together with joint spacing as selected
by Architect.
3. Provide manufacturer’s standard formed corner units manufactured to fit into and match filed units.
BROWN COAT MATERIALS FOR SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A. Water: Clean and free of deleterious matter.
B. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type I or II.
C. Hydrated Lime: Conform to ASTM C207, Type S.
D. Aggregate shall be clean, well graded sand or screenings from crushed stone or slag, and
shall conform to ASTM C33 for fine aggregate except that it shall be graded within the following limitations:
1. Passing No. 4 sieve: 100 percent
2. Passing No. 8 sieve: 90 percent
3. Passing No. 16 sieve: 60 percent-90 percent
4. Passing No. 30 sieve: 35 percent-70 percent
5. Passing No. 50 sieve: 10 percent-30 percent
6. Passing No. 100 sieve: 5 percent
WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER, FURRING AND LATHING
A. Weather Resistive Barrier: Polyolefin film as specified in Section 07260.
B. Wire Mesh Reinforcement: 2 x 2 inch galvanized steel, 24 gage wire, woven mesh.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1, 2005 04710-2 C-Specsm/Simulated Stone
SASc SOUTHWEST. LLC
phoenix - Las VeQaS
2.05
2.06
2.07
C. Metal Lath: 2.5 Ib./sq.yd. expanded metal diamond mesh, self-furring type; galvanized
finish.
D. Tie wire shall be double annealed and galvanized conforming to Type I FS QQ-W-461, of
gages specified.
E. Anchorages: Nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit
application, galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place.
ACCESSORIES FOR SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A. Latex Modified Portland Cement Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N mortar, or Type S where
approved by manufacturer, as specified under Section 04065 and as follows:
1. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber or acrylic resin type.
2. Mortar Color: Natural Gray, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sheet Metal Flashings: In accordance with Section 07600 and as indicated on Drawings.
C. Sealer: Breather type (non-film forming) masonry sealer approved by simulated stone
Manufacturer.
PROPORTIONING AND MIXING OF BROWN COAT FOR SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A. Accurately measure ingredients. Proportion successive batches exactly alike. Mix
aggregate, cement and other dry materials until the mass is uniform in color and
homogeneous before adding water. Determine the quantity of water necessary for the
desired consistency by trial, and thereafter measure in proper proportions. Retempering
will not be allowed.
B. Mortar for coats shall consist of one volume of Portland cement to not less than three or
more than five volumes of damp, loose aggregate.
C. Hydrated lime, hydrated lime putty, or slaked lime putty may be added as a plasticizing
agent, but the amount used shall not exceed 10 percent by weight nor more than 25
percent by volume of the cement used.
D. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
MORTAR MIXES FOR SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A. Mortar: In accordance with Section 04065 and as follows:
1. Latex Additive: Accurately measure and mix latex additive as recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Preconstruction Conference: A conference shall be held at the jobsite prior to start of construction of this portion of the work to review substrates, flashing conditions, work
provided by preceding trades and work required by trades following this work. General
Contractor, subcontractor(s) affected by the work of this section, Architect and Owner's
Representative shall be in attendance. If required, modifications shall be made to details
and to specifications to address actual field conditions.
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1.2005 0471 0-3 C-SpecsTMISimulated Stone
SASC SOUTHWEST. UC
PhaniX-LaSVegas
B. Verification of Conditions:
I.
2.
Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing
to Architect.
Failure to observe this requirement constitutes a waiver to subsequent claims to
the contrary and holds Contractor responsible for correction(s) Architect may
require.
Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.
Verify, before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing
conditions have been completed.
3.
4.
C. Coordination with other Work: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or
will be concealed by this Work.
3.02 PREPARATION FOR SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A. Protection: Protect sills, ledges, offsets and other projections from dropping of brown
coat materials and mortar.
B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.
C. Clean simulated stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements which will
mark or damage exposed surfaces.
3.03 WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIEWLATHING FOR STONE VENEER
A. Cover plywood sheathing with weather-resistive barrier in accordance with Section 07260.
No waterproofing is required at CMU walls except at caps, sills and transitions as detailed
and as required to maintain waterproof integrity/
B. Lathing:
1. Sheathed Surfaces: Install lath with the long dimensions of the sheet across
supports and attach to thee studs or furring using 18 gage tie wire, or by nailing or
by equivalent attachment space at intervals not exceeding 6 inches O.C. vertically
and 16 inches O.C. horizontally.
Make end laps of lath only over supports and stagger endlaps in adjacent
courses.
Wrap metal lath a minimum of 16 inches around all inside and outside corners.
Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: No lath is required on clean, new concrete and
masonry surfaces.
2.
3.
4.
3.04 BROWN COAT APPLICATION FOR SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A. Apply brown coat with sufficient pressure so that it is forced through the metal
reinforcement and against the backing to form full keys and to embed reinforcement
completely. Apply to an approximate thickness of 1/4 inch from the face of the backing.
Scratch to provide bond for mortar setting of stone.
B. Temperature shall be 45 degrees F. and rising during application and for 48 hours
thereafter.
C. Allow brown coat to dry overnight before applying simulated stone.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 047 10-4 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Simulated Stone
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - Las Vegas
3.05 APPLICATION OF SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Erect simulated stone in accordance with simulated stone supplier's instructions, erection
drawings and as follows.
1. Apply mortar by one of the following methods in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions
a. Method A: Apply 1/2 to 314 inch bed of mortar to metal lath, covering a
maximum of 10 square feet at one time, or less as required to keep
mortar workable.
b. Method B: Apply mortar directly to the entire back surface of each stone
unit in 112 to 3/4 inch thickness.
Start installation of stone from the bottom up, or as otherwise recommended by
the manufacturer.
Apply corner units first, alternating short and long legs of each course.
Press simulated stone units firmly into position in soft mortar bed, joggle each
piece slightly to bond firmly, causing mortar to extruded slightly around edges of
units. Apply pressure to the stone to ensure a good bond and complete coverage
between the mortar bed and back surface of the stone.
Place units with uniform mortar joints of nominal 3/8 inch and not exceeding 1/2
inch in width. Tool joints smooth and square or slightly concave
Dty-Stack Appearance: Place units with uniform mortar joints set back from face
of stone a minimum of 1 inch to provide "dry stack" appearance.
Utilize wire ties where required to secure units in position until mortar has set. Point and tool joints before mortar has set.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Do not lay chipped, cracked, or otherwise defective units in the wall where damaged
portion or non-integral colored portion of simulated stone will be exposed to view. Units that are cut in field and therefore expose non-integrally colored portions of unit shall only
be used where exposed edge can be completed concealed in the finished work. Units
installed with non-integrally colored portions exposed in the Work shall be considered
defective. Remove and replace units that chipped, cracked, broken, or otherwise
defective whether before or after setting.
Openings: Provide openings in simulated stone walls where required or indicated. Steel
lintels shall be provided unless otherwise noted.
Cutting of Simulated Stone: Plan work to minimize jobsite cutting. When required, exposed units shall be cut with a power driven Carborundum or diamond disc blade saw
to provide uniform edges. When using "wet" cutting methods, clean water shall be used
on exposed units.
1. Lay units with cut edges so cut edge is concealed in finished work.
Where fresh simulated stone joins simulated stone that is partially or totally set, the
exposed surface of the set simulated stone shall be cleaned and lightly wetted so as to
obtain the best possible bond with the new Work. Loose simulated stone and mortar shall
be removed.
Coordinate sealant application as specified in Section 07900 as detailed and as required
to maintain waterproof integrity.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 0471 0-5 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Simulated Stone
SASC SOUTHWEST. uc
phoenix. Las ve!ps
3.06 REPAIRS OF SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A. Remove and replace simulated stone which has cracks, blisters, pitting, discoloration or
other defects.
B.
C.
CLEANING OF SIMULATED STONE VENEER
Repairing of defects will be permitted only when approved by the Architect.
Repairs shall match existing work.
3.07
A. Daily Cleaning: Keep walls clean. Soiled simulated stone from mortar spills which will be
exposed to view at the completion of the Project shall be cleaned immediately with stiff
fiber brushes until the wall is free of dropped or spattered mortar.
8. Remove scaffolding and equipment used in the Work.
C.
PROTECTION OF SIMULATED STONE VENEER
Clean up debris, refuse and surplus material and remove from premises.
3.08
A. Furnish temporary protection for exposed simulated stone corners subject to injury.
B. Carefully cover tops of walls left incomplete at the conclusion of the day's work with
tarpaulins or other approved covering, securely held in place.
C. In hot and dry weather, protect simulated stone against too rapid drying.
D. Allow no construction activity on opposite side of wall to which simulated stone work is
being applied during and for 48 hours after completion of work.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 0471 0-6 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs"/Simulated Stone
SAX SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - las Vwas
SECTION 04930
MASONRY CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: The application of chemical cleaner shall leave the finished
surfaces uniform in color and shall not alter the natural texture of the masonry units.
B. Surfaces to be Cleaned: Clean masonry which is left exposed (not painted or covered by
another finish material such as EIFS) in the finished work.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples and manufacturer's instructions for masonry cleaning chemicals for
approval prior to delivering materials to the site or commencing the work in this Section.
1. Cleaning compound manufacturer shall procure and apply cleaning solutions to
samples of the masonry units to be used in the structure which will be reviewed
by the Architect for both aesthetics and effectiveness.
2. Cleaning compound manufacturer's instructions: Submit current method of
application for cleaning chemicals stating the actual application rates.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: Engaged in producing materials with a satisfactory performance
record for at least 5 years. 2. Applicator: Trained, approved and accepted by the cleaning compound
manufacturer. Application personnel shall have at least 2 years experience with
the particular materials being applied.
6. Field Samples:
1. A test area of wall surface from 10 to 20 square feet in size shall be cleaned with the chemical cleaner recommended by the cleaning compound manufacturer for
acceptance by the Architect.
Test samples of adjacent non-masonry materials for possible reaction with the
diluted cleaning materials. Samples to be available for review by the Architect.
2.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Delivery shall be made to the job site in manufacturer's original
containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's batch number.
B. Storage and Protection:
1. Store materials in original, unopened containers in compliance with
manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Do not store in areas where temperature will fall below 20 degrees F. or rise
above 100 degrees F..
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Temperature and relative humidity conditions for a period before, during and after application shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 04930-1 C-Specsm/Masonry Cleaning
SASC SOUTHWEST, LLC phoenix.L8SVsgsr
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Chemical Cleaner:
1. Cleaner shall be a solution of blended liquid acids, heavily inhibited and
emulsified and in combination with special wetting systems.
2. Specific product selection shall be dependent upon substrate as recommended
by the chemical cleaner manufacturer.
3. Cleaner shall be acceptable to the masonry unit manufacturer.
4. Muriatic acid shall not be acceptable as a chemical cleaner for new masonry.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:
a. Sure-Klean Vana Trol and Sure-Klean No. 600 Detergent as
manufactured by ProSoCo, Inc., www.Drosoco.com
b. 202V Vana-Stop and 202 New Masonry Detergent as manufactured by
Diedrich Technologies www.diedrichtechnoloqies.com are acceptable
products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1.
2.
Prior to start of work, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades, and
verify that such work is complete to the point where this work may commence.
The chemical cleaner manufacturer's representative shall verify that the chemical
cleaner may be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
methods.
In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
Commencement of system application constitutes acceptance of surfaces by
applicator.
3.
4.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection:
1. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work of other trades.
2. Concrete sidewalks shall be protected from runoff by soaking with water
immediately prior to application on adjacent walls.
3. Adjoining glass, metal and painted surfaces shall be protected from overspray
and splash of chemical cleaner. Inadvertent splashes shall be removed in an
approved manner before the solution has damaged the surface.
4. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of Architect and at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Surface Preparation for Chemical Cleaner:
1. In strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
a. Masonry walls shall be cleaned within 14 to 28 days after installation.
b. Walls shall be free of excess mortar.
C. Cracks, other than hairline cracks, shall be pointed up.
d. Defective mortar joints shall be routed out, pointed with mortar and
tooled.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 04930-2 CaJlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Masonry Cleaning
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix - Las V-S
C. Presoaking Hoses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Adequate water supply shall be made available to assure thorough pre-soaking
and thorough rinsing of the wall before undertaking general cleaning.
Two water hoses shall be used by the cleaning crew.
One hose shall be attached to a length of lawn soaker hose placed along the top
of the wall to provide a uniform and complete saturation of the entire wall area.
The second hose shall provide a copious flow of water for thorough flushing of
excess mortar and dirt from the scrubbed areas.
The lawn soaker hose is later to be placed at the face of the scaffold or stage to
provide a continuous spray of wall areas below the working area.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Chemical Cleaner: Application to be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed
instructions and as follows:
1. Surfaces shall be thoroughly pre-soaked with clean water to prevent the
absorption of the cleaning solution within the pores of the masonry.
2. Cleaning solution shall be diluted with clear water and applied to pre-soaked wall
areas with a long handled stiff fibered masonry wall washing brush, or other brush
as recommended by the cleaning compound manufacturer. The cleaning
solution may also be applied with a garden-ty e low pressure sprayer having a
the wall 5 to 10 minutes, or as recommended by the cleaning solution
manufacturer. Wooden paddles or other non-metallic tools may be used to
remove stubborn particles. Cleaning shall be restricted to small areas of up to 20
square feet at a time.
After washing a given area, the wall shall be flushed with a copious amount of
clear water, working from top to bottom, before the solution dries on the wall
surface. All of the cleaning solution shall be completely rinsed off of the wall.
Rinsing water may be applied with a high-pressure hose system with a maximum
nozzle pressure of 700 psi . The high-pressure nozzle tips shall have a fan spray
angle of from 15 to 45 degrees. The high-pressure system shall have a water
flow rate of 3 to 8 gallons per minute. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the
brick unit or the mortar joints with the high-pressure water spray. Repeat the procedure on spots which require additional cleaning.
maximum nozzle pressure of 50 psi (3.5kg/cm B ). Allow the solution to remain on
3.
4.
5.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March I, 2005 04930-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Masonry Cleaning
SECTION 05100
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Structural steel framing including lintels, bearing plates, anchor bolts
and other structural steel items.
SUBMllTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and erection Drawings clearly showing each piece required
for fabrication and erection.
B. Test Reports: Submit reports for welded connection tests.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding:
1.
2.
Performed by certified welders in compliance with AWS D.l Structural Welding
Code.
Welders shall be duly qualified (test passed in the preceding 12 months) in the
position in which they are to weld and the qualifications and Specifications for
workmanship shall comply with the AWS requirements "AWS Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
B. Certifications:
1. Prior to fabrication or shipment of material to the job site, furnish certification of
the Manufacturer of the structural steel that material furnished meets or exceeds
requirements of ASTM standards specified or noted on Drawings, for each type of
material.
2. Prior to site welding operation, submit welders' written certifications and
qualifications.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the
ground is not permitted.
B. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid
damage from the elements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials shall be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting
the strength or service of the structure.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A572, except angles, plates and bars shall be ASTM A36 (Fy =
36 ksi).
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 051 00-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Structural Metal Framing
SASC southwest. LLC phoenix. Las vegas
C. Steel Pipe Columns: ASTM A53 Grade B or ASTM A501 (Fy = 36 ksi).
2.02
D. Steel Tube Columns: ASTM A500, Grade B.
E. Bolts:
1. 2.
Machine Bolts and Plain Anchors: ASTM A307, unless otherwise indicated.
High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325-N.
F. Welded Anchors and Shear Connectors: ICBO approved, as manufactured by KSM or
Nelson.
G. Welding Rods: AWS A5.0, E70 series, low hydrogen type.
H. Metal Primer: VOC compliant, Tnemec FO88-559 Gray.
FABRICATION
A. Workmanship and details of construction (except as otherwise indicated or specified)
shall be in conformity with applicable articles of the latest AlSC Manual, Parts 1 through 4;
AlSC Specifications; except Section A7 (Design Documents) and Chapter N (Plastic
Design); and the applicable building codes.
1. Sections shall be of dimensions, weight and design as indicated, assembled
complete at the shop, with base plates and other detailed materials attached.
2. Furnish 1/4 inch thick leveling plates at columns where base plates are shop
fabricated to columns.
3. Make connections as indicated or detailed, on the Drawings and the reviewed
shop and erection Drawings.
4. Exposed steel shall have smooth, clean surfaces with no identifying trade marks,
names etc., exposed to view.
5. Leave in condition for finish painting.
B. Bolted connections shall be as detailed or shall conform to AlSC standard bolted connections with maximum number of 3/4-inch diameter bolts. See Framed Beam
Connections Tables 11, Ill, or IV of AlSC Manual of Steel Construction.
C. No slotted holes permitted at steel connections unless shown on Drawings or approved
by Structural Engineer.
D. Where bolt holes in steel members are enlarged to more than 1/16 inch diameter
oversize, provide 3/16 inch x 2-1/2 inch x 2-1/2 inch plate washers to steel members with
3/16 inch fillet weld all around.
E. Loose Steel Lintels: Provide loose structural steel shape lintels for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions, as shown. Weld adjoining members together to
form a single unit. Provide not less than 4 inch bearing at each side of openings, unless
otherwise shown.
F. Loose Bearing Plates: Provide loose bearing plates for steel items bearing on masonry or
concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and
bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required.
2.03 SHOP FABRICATION FOR USE OF HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS
A. Joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt heads, nuts or washers, shall be free
of loose mill scale, burrs, or any foreign material (including paint). Field paint these areas
with the specific shop paint after erection and completion.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3 Carlspgd Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 051 00-2 C-Specs /Structural Metal Framing
2.04
2.05
B. Joints using high strength bolts shall be inspected by a representative of an independent
testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.
1. Inspection shall be accomplished by the use of a properly calibrated torque
wrench.
2. Calibration shall be by the procedure specified in the Specifications for structural
joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts, under Section 9, inspections (pp. 6-276)
Ninth Edition, AlSC Manual of Steel Construction.
Check a minimum of 20 percent of the bolts in each connection.
If one or more of the bolts checked in any connection is below the minimum
tension, check all of the bolts in that connection.
Bolts which cannot be properly tensioned will be rejected.
3.
4.
5.
C. Check calibrated wrenches individually for accuracy at least once daily for actual
conditions of application.
D. The Inspector shall check to insure that bolt threads are eliminated from the shear planes.
Submit copies of the torque reading for each connection directly to the Owner’s .
Representative in the form of a report, along with the minimum torque values required to
reach the specified tensions and the calibration procedures.
E. The use of load indicator washers or twist-off spline type of fastener requires specific prior
approval of the Owner’s Representative.
SHOP WELDING
A. Make welds by the electric-arc process.
B. Grind exposed welds smooth.
C. Where weld size is not indicated, it shall develop full strength of member and connection.
PAINTING - SHOP COAT
A. Items of steel and iron Work indicated or specified to be encased in concrete shall not be
painted.
B. Clean steel Work by wire brushing, or by other means selected by the fabricator, of loose
mill scale, loose rust, accessible weld slag, or flux deposit, dirt and other matter. Remove
oil and grease deposits by solvent.
C. After cleaning, give steel Work one coat of metal primer. Apply primer thoroughly and
evenly to dry surfaces by brush, spray, roller coating, flow coating or dipping at the
selection of the fabricator.
D. Apply primer at a rate of 350 sq. ft. per gallon (33m2 per liter) to provide a wet film of 4.5
mils.
E. Paint erection marks on painted surfaces. Touch-up surfaces where welding, grinding of welds, joints, etc. are done in the field.
F. The paint shall be thoroughly dry before the members are handled or loaded.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 051 00-3
Carlsgd Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Structural Metal Framing
SASC -soumM&. LLC Phoenix. Las vegas
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: Where a welded splice is fabricated in beams or columns other than those
detailed, fabricator shall have splice connection tested using one of the following
methods: magnetic particle, radiographic, or ultrasonic. Testing shall be conducted by an
independent testing laboratory and a report submitted to the Owner's Representative.
The costs of this testing shall be borne by the fabricator.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1.
2.
Verify anchor bolt locations, grouting and elevation of base and setting plates,
and other material set by other Trades before commencing Work.
Notify Owner's Representative of Work set by others which does not comply with
specified tolerances. Do not erect material upon such Work until it has been
satisfactorily corrected.
Start of Work implies acceptance of Work of other Trades affecting structural
frame erection.
3.
ERECTION
A. Erect Work to the proper lines and levels, plumb and true, and in correct relation to other
~ Work maintain this condition to completion.
B. Connections: 1. Machine Bolting:
a. Fair-up holes with pins to align holes before bolting.
b. Ream unfair holes to obtain alignment or drill new holes.
C. Enlargement of holes with drift pins or burning of new holes is not
permitted.
d. Draw bolts up tight after members are aligned and leveled, and set or
deform threads to prevent loosening.
2. Welding:
a. Weld by shielding arc method per AWS standard code for arc and gas
welding in building construction.
b. Submit certification that welders have passed AWS code qualification
tests.
C. Certification must be dated no earlier than 3 months prior to beginning of
Project.
d. Refer to Shop Drawings for weld size and dimensions.
e. Close joints exposed to weathering with continuous 118 inch weather
welds. f. Grind smooth exposed welds, but grinding shall not reduce weld strength
or required cross section.
9. Protect finish material from damage due to welding. h. Remove unsatisfactory welds by chipping or arc air method.
Connect members temporarily and align completely before making permanent
connections.
a. Temporary conditions shall consist of bolts in no less than 1/3 of the
holes and in no case less than 3 bolts in any single connection.
b. Surfaces in contact shall be thoroughly clean when assembled.
3.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 051 00-4
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Structural Metal Framing
C. Provide necessary temporary bracing and guying to align the structure
properly for permanent connections, and safely resist erection, dead load
and wind stress.
Take particular care to have the Work plumb and level (maximum
tolerance 1 to 500 for interior members, 0 to 1000 for exterior members)
before making permanent connections.
Remove bracing and guys only after permanent alignment and assembly
and structure is capable of completely sustaining design and temporary
construction loads.
d.
e.
C. Exposed Steel: 1.
2.
Verify the condition of exposed steel after erection.
Exert particular care to provide a neat, accurate installation with members straight
and true, corners and edges square, sharp and free from burrs and irregularities,
adjacent members perfectly matched and no bolts or rivets exposed.
Remove erection bolts and seats and plug weld and grind holes smooth. 3.
D. Field Painting:
3.
2.
Spot paint abrasions, field bolts and field welds with same paint used for shop
coat.
Remove temporary guys, bracing and bracing clips, and grind flush remaining
burrs, before painting. Remove welding slag, spatter, rust and burnt paint and
wire brush clean welds before touch-up.
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials,
equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 051 00-5 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Structural Metal Framing
SASC SooVmesC LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 0541 0
LOAD-BEARING METAL STUD SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
I .03
1.04
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Load-bearing metal stud system for interior framing and load-bearing
and non-load bearing exterior framing as shown on Drawings and as specified.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: Design structural members in accordance with AIS1 "Specification
for the Design of Cold-formed Structural Steel."
1. Maximum allowable deflection:
a.
b.
C.
Design system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure
of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when
subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.
Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building
structural members, and clearances of intended openings.
Walls receiving gypsum wallboard finishes: U240.
Walls receiving plaster and brittle finishes, including ElFS and stucco:
U240.
Walls receiving ceramic tile finishes: U360.
2.
3.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, design data and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, dimen'sions and construction details.
C. Certificates:
1. Submit Mill Certification with shipment to verify chemical composition, yield
strength, tensile strength, elongation and coating thickness. Include listing of
applicable ASTM standards specified in this section and comparison of ASTM
requirements to actual materials provided to jobsite.
Submit Manufacturer's certification that products furnished meet or exceed the
specified design requirements.
2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Performed by certified welders in compliance with AWS D1.3 Structural
Welding Code Sheet Steel.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Manufacturers shall have current ICBO or CAB0 evaluation
report.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Load-Bearing Metal Stud System 0541 0-1
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the
ground is not permitted.
B. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid
damage from the elements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the
Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. American Studco, Inc.
2.
3. Unimast, Inc. 4. Western
5. CEMCO
6. Dietrich Industries
7.
Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum.
Manufacturing members of the Metal Stud Manufacturer's Association, Corvallis,
Oregon, (503) 757-8991
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Studs, Track, Bracing and Bridging: Conform to ASTM C955.
1. ASTM A653, G60 hot-dip galvanized coating.
2. Minimum structural properties: In accordance with General Structural Notes.
C. Track: Channel shaped; same width as studs, for tight fit; 16 gage solid web, galvanized
or painted to match studs.
D. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed galvanized sheet steel; channel shaped. Provide
CRC - 1-1/2 inch x 16 gage bridging.
E. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Galvanized formed steel, thickness determined for conditions
encountered, Manufacturer's standard shapes.
F. Fasteners and Attachments:
1. Sheet metal: Self-drilling self-tapping screws, type appropriate for attachment
detail requirements with penetration through joined materials not less than 3
exposed threads.
2. Anchorage devices to structural components: Power driven or powder actuated,
drilled expansion bolts, or screws, with sleeves.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required, with framing
members fitted, reinforced and braced to suit design requirements.
B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Load-Bearing Metal Stud System 0541 0-2
SASC soulhwest LLC Phoenix. Las vegas
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be
concealed by this Work.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Install components in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall and partition layout. Secure in place with
fasteners or welding at maximum 24 inches. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor
and ceiling tracks.
C. Place studs at 16 inches o.c.; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side
of openings. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method unless noted otherwise.
D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud at wall opening, door and
window jambs.
E. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted.
F. Erect load bearing studs, brace and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design
requirements.
G. Extend stud framing through ceiling to underside of floor or roof structure above, unless
otherwise indicated.
H. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after
erection.
1. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing.
J. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing for
non-load bearing framing.
K. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to
walls.
L. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to
prevent stud rotation.
M. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: At Owner's request, Contractor shall provide spot testing of actual properties of
steel framing to verify compliance with specifications.
D.F. Architects 96123EASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Load-Bearing Metal Stud System 0541 0-3
3.04 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Load-Bearing Metal Stud System 0541 0-4
SASC souvmest. LLC. Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART I GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous metal as shown on Drawings and as specified, including
items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings
which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other Sections of these
Specifications. Types of miscellaneous metal items include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Carpenter's iron work.
2.
3.
Ladders at roofs and elevator pits.
Miscellaneous framing and supports including but not limited to the following:
a. b. Steel countertop supports.
C. Supports for chandeliers.
d. Countertop supports.
Steel tube frame internal wall bracing.
4. Steel gratings and frames.
5. Pipe bollards.
6. Miscellaneous steel trim.
7.
8. Stair nosings/detectable warnings.
9. Elevator hoist beams.
IO.
11. Enclosure gates and hardware.
12. Other items as indicated.
Ornamental grillage installed in hollow metal frames specified in Section 081 00.
Steel elevator sill angles and guide rail supports.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings for the fabrication and erection of assemblies of items
which are not completely shown by the Manufacturer's data sheets.
1. Include plans and elevations at not less than 1 inch to 1'-0" scale, and include
details of sections and connections at not less than 3 inches to 1'-0" scale.
2. Show anchorage and accessory items.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following, except as otherwise shown and specified:
1. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel
for Buildings."
2. AIS1 "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
3. AWS "Structural Welding Code-Steel."
4. ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates Shapes, Sheet Piping
and Bars for Structural Use."
B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS
"Standard Qualification Procedure."
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 05500-1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Metal Fabrications
SASC swthwesl. LLC. Phoenix. Las VeeaS
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the
ground is not permitted.
B. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid
damage from the elements.
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings
and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the Work. Allow for trimming
and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay the
Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
B.
Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.
Steel Tubing (Not-formed, Welded or Seamless): ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 46 ksi).
C.
D.
Cold-Finished Carbon Steel Bars: ASTM A1 08, Grade as selected by fabricator.
Hot-rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips: ASTM A568 and ASTM A569, pickled and
oiled.
E. Cold-rolled Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A61 1.
F. Hot-dip Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653, with G90 zinc coating.
G. V-Deck: Hot-dip Galvanized Steel Sheet, ASTM A653, with G90 zinc coating, with 1/2
inch V-bends at 6 inches center to center.
H. Cold-drawn Steel Tubing: ASTM A512, sunk drawn, butt welded, cold-finished and stress-relieved.
1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, type as selected; Grade A. Black finish unless galvanizing is
required. Standard weight, Schedule 40, unless otherwise shown or specified.
J. Anchors:
1. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shield, FS FF-S-325.
2. Toggle bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588; type, class and style as required.
3. Wedge-type concrete inserts: Galvanized box-type ferrous castings, designed to
accept 3/4 inch diameter bolts having special wedge-shaped heads, either
malleable iron complying with ASTM A47 or cast steel complying with ASTM A27;
hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153. Provide carbon steel bolts having special wedge-shaped heads, nuts washers
and shims; all galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153.
Slotted-type concrete inserts: Galvanized 1/8 inch thick pressed steel plate complying with ASTM A283. Box-type welded construction with slot designed to
receive 314 inch diameter square head bolt and with knockout cover. Hotdip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A123.
4.
5.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad GyE Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 05500-2 C-Specs /Metal Fabrications
K. Fasteners: Provide zinc-coated fasteners with galvanizing complying with ASTM A1 53 for
exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and
class required for the installation of miscellaneous metal items.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Bolts and nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon head.
Bolts, hexagon and square: ANSI B-18.2.1.
Bolts, round head: ANSI B-18.5.
Lag bolts: Square head type.
Wood screws: ANSI 8-18.6.1, flat head carbon steel. Plain washers: ASTM F844 helical spring type carbon steel.
L. Gratings: Safety-Grip as manufactured by AMICO, one-piece channel shaped plank-type
grating fabricated from ASTM A526, G-90 pre-galvanized 11 gauge steel with large
debossed holes at 2" on center and smaller embossed traction buttons at 1" on center.
M. Stair Nosings and Detectable Warnings: Type 24 safety strip with extruded anchor and
black color abrasive filler as manufactured by American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
N. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 for steel plates, bars and strips.
0. Paint:
1. Metal Primer: VOC compliant.
a. Interior Steel: Zinc alkyd, high-solids primer, conforming to FS TT-P- 645b.
b. Exterior Steel (exposed): 2-component. moisture-cured zinc-rich primer
conforming to SSPC-PSl2.01.
Galvanizing repair paint: High zinc dust content; MIL-P-21035 (Ships). 2.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices to be set in concrete or
built into masonry for installation of Miscellaneous Metal Work. Provide setting Drawings,
templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices.
B. Concrete Fill (for concrete filled pipe bollards): Comply with requirements of Section
03300 for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: For fabrication of Miscellaneous Metal Work which will be exposed to view, use
only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by
grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface
finishes, including zinc coatings.
B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop, when possible, to minimize field splicing
and assembly of units at the site. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 05500-3 Carlsbad Gc& Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Metal Fabrications
SASC southwesf LLC. PhOenlX ' Las vegas
C. Workmanship:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use materials of the size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of the required
size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability of the finished
product for the intended use. Work to the dimensions of fabrication and support.
Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of Work.
Form exposed Work true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces and
straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch
unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible
without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work.
Weld corners and seam continuously and in accordance with the
recommendations of AWS. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and
blend with adjoining surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the type
shown, or if not shown, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts.
Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure and
the progress schedule. Fabricate as required to provide adequate support for the
intended use of the Work.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap Miscellaneous Metal Work as may be required to
receive finish hardware and similar items of Work.
Use hot-rolled steel bars for Work fabricated from bar stock, unless Work is
indicated to be fabricated from csld-rolled, or cold-finished stock.
D. Carpenter's Iron Work:
1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers,
dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing
and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or
other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are specified in
Division 6 Sections.
2. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required.
Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural
connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
E. Ladders:
1. Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and
anchorages as required. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3, except as
otherwise shown.
Fit rungs into punched holes in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind
smooth on outer rail faces.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not
more than 5 feet O.C. Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate
support and anchorage, and to hold the ladder 6 inches clear of the wall surface
and other obstructing construction. Extend rails 42 inches above top rung, and
return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided If the
adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, gooseneck the extended
rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access.
Provide non-slip surfaces on the top of each rung, either by coating the rung with
aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of
manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout.
Exterior ladders shall have hot-dipped galvanized finish.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 05500-4 Carlsbad Gt+Z Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Metal Fabrications
F. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports:
1.
2.
Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of the
structural steel framework, as required to complete Work.
Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown, or if not
shown, of the dimensions required to receive adjacent grating, plates, doors or
other Work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate
from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of all welded construction
using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates, and a minimum
number of joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the Work.
Equip units with integrally welded anchor straps for casting into concrete or
building into masonry wherever possible. Furnish inserts if units must be installed
after concrete is poured. Except as otherwise shown, space anchors 24 inches
o.c., and provide minimum anchor units of 1-114 inch x 1/3 inch x 8 inch steel
straps.
3.
G. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Provide shapes and sizes as required for the profiles shown.
Except as otherwise noted, fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and
steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed
field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for
coordination of assembly and installation with other Work.
H. Enclosure Gates and Hardware: Fabricate to sizes and shapes indicated using
galvanized steel tubing and shapes and plate with16 gauge Vdeck skin. Continuously
welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices
wherever possible.
1. Hinges: Provide heavy duty galvanized steel butt hinges sized as required for
weight of gate. Weld hinges to frame.
2. Lever Lockset: Provide heavy duty, lever handle, keyed cylinder lockset.
Reinforce gate frame as required for installation of lockset with welded plate.
. I. Fabricate pipe bollards from steel pipe of diameter indicated on Drawings.
2.04 FINISHING
A. Galvanizing: Galvanize all exterior metal fabrications. Comply with ASTM A123 and A1 53
for the hot-dip process after fabrication.
B. Shop Painting:
1. Shop paint Miscellaneous Metal Work, except those members or portions of
members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field
welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before shop coat of paint is
applied. Clean in accordance with SSPC SP-2, SP-3, or SP-7, as required.
Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1.
Apply one shop coat of metal primer paint to fabricated metal items, except apply
2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on metal primer paint in
accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, and to provide a uniform dry film
thickness of 2 mils for each coat.
2.
3.
4.
'
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 05500-5
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Metal Fabrications
SASC Soulhwesf LLC. Phoenix. Las Vegas
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
6. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be
concealed by this Work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
6. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting
templates to appropriate Trades.
C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from
water and concrete entry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment
until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on Shop Drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS Dl .l.
E. Install pipe bollards in concrete footings plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from
distortion or defects. Provide adequate bracing as required to hold bollard in position until
concrete has been placed and cured.
1. Fill bollards solidly with concrete and mound top surface to shed water.
F. Stair Nosings: Embed units at locations indicated immediately after placement of
concrete, flush and level with concrete finished surface and parallel with treads.
G. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
H. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed and galvanized
members, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
6. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 114 inch.
3.05 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 05500-6
Carlsbad Gc#L Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Metal Fabrications
SECTION 05510
STEEL STAIRS
PART 4 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: Steel stairs including stringers, treads, risers and landings, shall be
designed and fabricated to support dead load plus live load of 100 psf or a concentrated
load of 300 pounds, whichever governs. Limit maximum live load deflection to 1/360
span.
1.02 SUBMllTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing dimensions, details and erection diagrams.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with local code and regulatory agency requirements
for stair design and the following:
1. ANSI A117.1 "Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by
Physically Handicapped People."
2. Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA).
3. ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
B. Welding: Conforming to AWS D1 .l and performed by certified welders.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. . Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the
ground is not permitted.
B. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid damage from the elements.
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify existing conditions by taking field measurements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36.
B. Steel Bars and Bar-Size Shapes: ASTM A36.
C.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 46 ksi).
E. Galvanized Steel Sheet for Exterior Stairs: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating,
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Cou\ze Clubhouse March 1,2005 0551 0-1 C-Specs /Steel Stairs
commercial or structural quality, Grade 33, unless otherwise required for design loads.
F. Metal Primer: VOC compliant.
1.
2.
Galvanizing: ASTM A653, Class G-60.
Interior Steel: Zinc alkyd, high-solids primer, conforming to FS TT-P-645b.
Galvanizing repair paint: High zinc dust content; MIL-P-21035 (Ships).
G.
2.02 FAB Rl CAT1 ON
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
PART 3
Shop Assembly:
1.
2.
3.
Conform to Standard Specifications, Rules and Practice of the AlSC as described
in the "Steel Construction Manual."
Form and fabricate the Work to meet installation requirements.
Include accessories to adequately secure the Work in place.
Metal Pan Units:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Form metal pans of 12 gage thick structural steel sheets complying with ASTM
A569 or ASTM A570, Grade 30.
Shape pans to conform to configurations shown.
Construct riser and subtread metal pans with steel angle or bar supporting
brackets, of size shown, welded to stringers.
Secure metal pans to brackets with welds, as shown.
Secure subplatform metal pans to platform frames with welds.
Fabricate stringers of structural steel shapes as shown. Provide closures for exposed
ends of stringers.
Provide metal framing, hangers, columns, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates and other components as required for support of stairs and platforms.
Provide galvanized finish at all exterior stairs.
Drainage: Construct exterior treads and exterior platforms pitched slightly to drain. In no
case will water ponding be permitted on treads and platforms.
Shop/Factory/Finishing: Clean metal work of grease, rust, mill scale and other foreign
matter, and give a coat of primer.
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Owner's Representative. Commencement of Work will be
construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Where masonry walls support the Steel Stair Work, provide temporary supporting struts,
designed for the erection of steel stair components before installation of masonry.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 0551 0-2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Steel Stairs
SASC Swtmvesl. LLC
Phoenix. Las Vegas
3.03 ERECTION
A. Make connections between members, unless otherwise indicated, by the use of welds or 0 bolts.
B. Conceal connections in finished Work where possible.
C. Accurately align members for miter exposed joints with hairline joints.
D. Perform welding by the shielded arc method.
E. Grind welds in finished surfaces smooth with no identifying marks remaining exposed.
F. Fabricate units so that bolts and other fastenings do not appear on finish surfaces. Make
joints true and tight.
3.04 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3 0
March 1,2005 0551 0-3
Carlsbad Golf Cou$$e Clubhouse
C-Specs /Steel Stairs
SECTION 05520
HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Structural performance of handrails and railing systems: Comply with ASTM E985 based on testing in accordance with ASTM E894 and E935
B. Design Requirements: Comply with ASTM E985 and UBC Section 1006.
1.02 SUBMITALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit details and erection diagrams showing construction methods and dimensions for connection with other Work and materials.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or
coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight.
B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 0 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify existing conditions by taking field measurements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36.
B. Steel Bars and Bar-size Shapes: ASTM A36.
C.
D.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 46 ksi).
Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30.
E. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, Grade as selected.
F. Steel Pipe: ATM A53, type as selected, Grade A standard weight (Schedule 40).
G. Paint:
1. Metal Primer: VOC compliant.
2.
a.
Galvanizing repair paint: High zinc dust content; MIL-P-21035 (Ships).
Interior Steel: Tnemec 10-99W (white).
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 05520-1 CarlsbaqMGolf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Handrails and Railings
H. Wall Bracket (Pipe Handrails): Julius Blum #382 with appropriate fastener and anchor
plate.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly:
1.
2.
3. 4.
Shop/Factory/Finishing: Clean surfaces of grease, rust, mill scale, and other foreign
matter, and apply coat of primer, except galvanized surfaces.
Galvanize all exterior railings, handrails, sleeves, brackets and flanges after fabrication.
Make connections between members, unless otherwise indicated, with welds or bolts.
Conceal connections in finished Work where possible.
Where exposed, use Phillips oval head screws.
Accurately member or miter exposed joints with hairline joints.
Grind welds, projections and corners in finished surfaces smooth. No identifying marks
shall remain exposed.
Welds shall be flush type, with fillets dressed to uniform radius, using the shielded arc method.
Conform with AlSC Standard Specifications, Rules and Practice in the "Steel
Construction Manual."
Form and fabricate the Work to meet installation conditions.
Include accessories to adequately secure the Work in place.
Make provisions to connect with or to receive abutting construction.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
EXAM I NATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
Coordination:
concealed by this Work. B. Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Install steel railings and handrails at locations indicated.
Install items anchored in concrete in the formwork, where practicable.
Install items to be built into masonry so masonry can be built up to them.
Where indicated, anchor posts in concrete with core drilled holes or pre-set sleeves of
diameter at least 3/4" more than diameter of post being anchored and not less than 5"
deep. Fill space with non-shrink, non-metallic grout.
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 05520-2 CarlsbatMGolf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Handrails and Railings
SASC southwest. LLC.
Phoenix. Las Vegas
E. Install posts and vertical members plumb within 118 inch of vertical. Install longitudinal
members parallel with each other and to floor surfaces or slope of stairs to within 1/8 inch
per 10 running feet.
F. Securely anchor wall brackets.
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of
excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean
condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 05520-3
CarlsbaqiGolf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Handrails and Railings
SECTION 05700
ORNAMENTAL METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ornamental bar rail.
2. Miscellaneous metal accents.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Excessive fading: A change in appearance which is perceptible and objectionable as
determined by the Architect when viewed visually in comparison with the original color
range standards.
B. Excessive non-uniformity of color or shade: Non-uniform fading during the period of the
warranty to the extent that adjacent panels have a color difference greater than the
original acceptable color range.
C. Cracking, peeling, pitting or corroding:
resulting from the natural elements in the atmosphere.
Defects, discernible from a distance of lo',
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Subcontractor qualifications: Fabricate and install the work of this Section using a
subcontractor having a minimum of 5 years experience in this type of work. Use
adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
* Also applicable to overall length or width of sheet if only one longitudinal or transverse
buckle or edge wave is present.
B. Reference standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract
Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following.
1. NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual
2. AWS Structural Welding Code
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with Section 01 330 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawing for the work of this Section. Shop Drawings for
items specified by design load shall include engineering calculations sealed by a Structural Engineer registered in the State of Arizona.
C. Product Data: Submit product data proprietary items used.
D. Samples: Sample panels, 12 inches square minimum, showing acid etched and sealed steel finish for initial selection purposes.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1.2005 05700-1 Carlsbad Ggf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Ornamental Metals
SASC Southwesl. LLC Phoenix . Las VeWS
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Storage: Store off ground and under cover, protected from damage.
B. Handling: Handle materials so that surfaces are protected. Prevent distortion or damage
to fabricated pieces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Copper Alloys, Bronze:
1.
2.
3.
Plate, sheet, strip and bars: ASTM B 3618 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (rnuntz
metal, 60 percent copper).
Seamless Pipe: ASTM B43, alloy UNS No. C23000 (red brass, 85 percent
copper).
Seamless Tubes: ASTM B135 (ASTM B135M), alloy UNS No. C23000 (red
brass, 85 percent copper).
B. Finishes:
1. Copper Alloys, Bronze: Old penny satin copper and silicon bronze with medium
patina to match Architects sample, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners of same metal of that being fastened, unless
indicated otherwise.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Fit and assemble work in the shop as far as practicable.
B. Shop weld or braze all joints in the shop to the greatest extent possible to comply with
AWS recommended practices.
C. Joints: Carefully fit and match work with continuity of line and design, using rigidly
secured joints with hairline contact, unless otherwise indicated. Reinforce members and
joints with plates, bar, rods or angles for rigidity and strength as needed to fulfill
performance requirements. Use concealed non-ferrous metal fasteners for jointing which
cannot be welded. Where exposed fasteners are unavoidable in the finished work
provide Phillips flat-head machine screws.
D. Shop/Factory/Finishing: Clean surfaces of grease, rust, mill scale, and other foreign
matter, and apply coat of primer, except galvanized surfaces.
E. Galvanize exterior railing, sleeves, brackets and flanges after fabrication.
2.03 RAILING FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: 1.
2.
3.
Make connections between bronze members by brazing.
Form and fabricate the Work to meet installation conditions.
Include accessories to adequately secure the Work in place. Make provisions to connect with or to receive abutting construction.
B.
C. Accurately member or miter exposed joints with hairline joints.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 05700-2 C-Specs"/Ornamental Metals
D. Grind brazes, projections and comers in finished surfaces smooth. No identifying marks
shall remain exposed.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS TRIM
A. Fabricate miscellaneous trim and other items to designs, sizes, shapes, patterns and
configurations indicated. Form and fabricate from metals indicated.
B. Fabricate items with concealed attachments for connecting to other work, unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field measurements: Verify dimensions before proceeding with the Work. Obtain field
measurements for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. Be
responsible for the accuracy of such measurements and precise fitting and assembly of
finished work.
3.03 INSTALLATION 0 A. Coordination: Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
Coordinate schedules for installation of the work of this Section with schedules for other
installations to assure orderly progress of the total construction sequence.
Cut, drill, and fit ornamental metal work and trim as required for installation. Do not cut or
abrade finishes that cannot be restored in the field.
B.
C. Install items accurately placed in location, plumb, level and in alignment and elevation
with adjoining work. Fit field connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
Brazed Connections: Connect railing joints by brazing to comply with applicable AWS
specifications. D.
E. Attachment: Fasten metal work to solid masonry with expansion bolts or with fiber plugs
and to hollow block with toggle bolts. Provide screws threaded full length to the head of
the screw.
F. Install vertical members plumb within 1/8 inch of vertical. Install longitudinal members
parallel with each other and to floor surfaces or slope of stairs to within 1/8 inch per 10 running feet.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 05700-3
Carlsbad Gyif Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Ornamental Metals
3.04 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, promptly clean exposed portions and remove 0 traces of dirt, grease and foreign materials.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 Carlsbad Gy&f Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 05700-4 C-Specs /Ornamental Metals
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
i .Ol
1.02
1.03 0
1.04
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
2. 3. Plywood backing panels.
4. Solid wood T&G decking.
5.
6.
Rough carpentry incluc.. ig bac.,ing, blocking, nailers, and curbs.
Dimensional lumber framing and sheathing.
Custom trusses fabricated from dimensional lumber.
Other items as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical data for wood preservative and fire retardant products.
8. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each exposed wood and accessory item
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
12-inch length of re-sawn board lumber.
Wood with sandblasted finish, minimum 12-inches x 12-inches square.
Proposed bolt and nut with head type as selected by Architect to be used in the
finished Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Identify each piece of lumber or plywood used for structural framing with grade and trade
mark of a lumber grading organization. Trade mark of manufacturer shall also appear on
each piece.
B. Grading Rules: Conform with applicable requirements of American Lumber Standards
"Simplified Practice Recommendation R-16" and to grading rules of manufacturer's
association under whose rules the lumber is produced.
C. Solid Wood Roof Decking: Comply with AlTC 112, "Standard for Tongue-and-Groove
Heavy Timber Roof Decking."
D. Standards: Conform with requirements of American Plywood Association, U. S. Dept. of
Commerce Commercial Standards and American Wood Preservers Association
Standards, as they apply.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact.
B. Storage: Store off ground to assure adequate ventilation, and protect against damage
while stored at the site.
C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 06 1 00- 1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Rough Carpentry
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Store materials for which a maximum moisture is specified
in areas .where humidity can be controlled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS
. __. -. -
A. Species: Douglas Fir graded in accordance with Standard Grading and Dressing Rules of
WCLIB. Framing lumber shall be stress grade. All sides shall be surfaced or provided
with special architectural finish as indicated on Drawings and approved by Architect.
B. Lumber Grades: As follows unless noted differently on the Structural Drawings:
1. ~ One inch boards: Construction.
2.
3. Beams: Number 1 or better.
4.
5.
6.
7. a.
Framing lumber, ledgers, plates, 2 to 4 inches thick: Number 2 or better.
Beams, where so noted on Drawings: Select Structural.
Posts and columns, 4x and under in least dimension: Number 2 or better. Posts and columns, 6x and larger in least dimension: Number 1 or better.
Misc. blocking, bridging, etc: Utility.
Grounds and furring: Construction Grade Douglas Fir or No. 2 White Pine.
C. Moisture Content: Lumber shall be air-dried or kiln-dried. At time of installation, moisture
content, expressed as a percentage of the weight of the oven-dry wood, shall not exceed
19 percent for lumber of up to two inches nominal thickness and 15 percent for exterior
trim and siding. Moisture content of lumber over two inches nominal thickness shall
conform to the rules of the association under which it is graded.
2.02 SHEATHING MATERIALS
A. Plywood: Each panel of softwood plywood shall be identified with the APA grade-
trademark and shall meet the requirements of PS-1-83 for softwood plywood. Provide Marine Grade treated water-resistant plywood where indicated.
B. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting of telephone and electrical equipment , provide
Grade C-D Exposure 1 plywood panels, 15/16 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plywood which has an edge or surface permanently exposed to the weather shall be
exterior type. Panel thickness and identification index shall be as shown on the Drawings
and as specified and shall also be stamped on each piece of plywood.
2.03 SOLID WOOD DECKING
A. Solid Wood, Matched, Decking: Standard tongue-and-groove or double tongue-and-groove
decking of solid wood (not laminated), of the following unit grade of the indicated pattern in
the required species:
1. Grade: Select Decking, with structural properties equal to or exceeding those
indicated on the Structural Drawings.
B. Moisture Content: Provide wood decking fabricated from lumber of 19 percent moisture
content (air or kiln dried), and include S-DRY or similar indication in grade marking or certification of grade.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 061 00-2 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Rough Carpentry
SAX Swthwest LLC Phoenix * Las Vegas
C. Pattern and Dressing, Solid Matched Decking: Standard pattern of type indicated, surfaced
on top and bottom, and sanded on exposed surfaces.
2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative Treatment: 1. Materials:
a.
b.
Chromated copper arsenate (CCA) shall not be allowed.
Provide ammoniacal copper quaternary (ACQ) or copper boron azole
(CBA) as produced by the following manufacturers:
1) Arch Wood Protection, Inc., Smyma, GA (866) 789-4567,
www.wolmanizedwood.com or www.naturalselect.com.
2) Chemical Specialties, Inc., Charlotte, NC (800) 421-8661,
www.treatedwood.com
3) Osmose, Inc., Wood Preservhg Division, Griffin, GA (800) 241- 0240, www.osmose.com.
2. Locations Required:
a. Wood sillplates and ledgers bolted in direct contact with concrete or
masonry, located at or below grade only shall be pressure treated
lumber.
Blocking occurring on top of or above the roof deck, including the nailer beneath the flashing at parapet caps, shall be treated lumber.
Other locations as required by Code.
b.
C.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide bolts and nuts with head type as selected by Architect where exposed in
the finished Work.
B. Nails: Common wire, galvanized for exterior Work, meeting FS FF-N-101 of the sizes
indicated on the Drawings.
C. Screws: Standard domestic manufacture, bright steel, except galvanized for exterior use and of brass, bronze, aluminum or stainless steel when used to attach items made of
those materials. Screws used for attaching interior trim and finish to drywall partitions
shall be Type S self-drilling, self-tapping corrosion resistant coated steel drywall screws of
required lengths as specified in Section 09250.
1. Screws used for attaching preservative treated wood shall be Type S selfdrilling,
self-tapping corrosion resistant coated steel screws. Acceptable products include
the following: a. DEC-KING Exterior Wood Screw with Climacoat.
b. Tapcon Concrete Anchor with Blue Climaseal or White Ultrashield.
C. Wood-To-Metal TEKS with Grey Spex.
d. Roofgrip with Spex or Blue Climaseal.
e. GY-FAST Nail with Climacoat.
f. Maxi-Set Tapcon White Ultrashield.
D. Bolts: Standard mild steel, square head machine bolts with square nuts and malleable iron or steel plate washers or carriage bolts with square nuts and cut washers as
indicated. Bolts, nuts and washers, wholly or partially exposed on exterior shall be
galvanized.
E. Structural Bolts: Machine bolts, or carriage bolts, of structural grade steel with square
nuts, conforming to ASTM A307.
F. Steel plates and angles: ASTM A36, galvanized after fabrication.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 06 1 00-3 C-Specs"/Rough Carpentry
G.
H.
1.
J.
K.
L.
PART 3
Lag screws, shear plates and split ring connectors: Conform to requirements of the
"National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings" of National
Forest Products Association.
Framing anchors and joist hangers: Simpson Company products or similar devices as
approved by Architect and noted on Drawings.
Power driven inserts: Ramset, or as approved by Architect meeting FS GGG-D-777a.
Install as per manufacturer's printed directions. Charge shall be powerful enough to
prevent spalling of concrete.
Galvanizing: ASTM A653.
Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588.
Fabricated Connections:
1. Sheet metal galvanized of size and type shown on Drawings.
2. Structural Steel: ASTM A36. Welding by qualified welders in conformance with
AWS D1. One shop coat of paint per Federal Specification TT-P-86, Type II to
parts not embedded.
EXECUTION
3.01 FRAMING
A. Coordination: Install wood framing making proper provisions for Work of other trades.
Cut wood required to accommodate plumbing, heating and ventilating, electrical and other
trades. Fit neatly around exposed items, as outlet boxes, conduit, pipes and ducts.
Protect adjacent Work. Before proceeding with rigid sheathing, make certain required
inspections have been made.
B. Structural Members: No cutting, notching or drilling without prior approval of the structural
engineer through the Architect.
C. Wood Backing: Provide wood backing, furring, stripping or blocking indicated or required
for installation and attachment of work of other trades. Provide approved fire-proofed
wood backing where required by Code in noncombustible or fire-rated construction.
D. Connections: Subdrill where necessary to avoid splitting.
E. Bolts: Drill bolt holes 1/32 inch larger than bolt diameter. Use square plate or malleable
iron washers under heads and nut where they bear against wood. Re-tighten bolts
immediately prior to concealing with finish materials. Re-tighten exposed bolts
immediately prior to final inspection.
F. Lag Screws and Screws: Subdrill. use square plate or malleable iron washer under lag screw heads when they bear on wood.
G. Exterior base plates or sills resting on concrete: Bed in cement mortar to obtain a
continuous bearing. Mortar shall consist of one part cement to three parts sand. Mix mortar in small quantities so that it can be used promptly. Size plates or sills and set level
and true to line. Bolt down with bolts of size, length and spacing indicated with a bolt not
more than 9 inches from the end of any piece.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 06 1 00-4 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsYRough Carpentry
SAX southwest. LLC Phoenix * Las Vqas
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
Rough framing: Fit closely, set accurately to required lines and levels, and secure rigidly
in place. Set horizontal and inclined members with crown edge up. Reinforce cut
members as directed. Bolt, nail and spike in a thorough manner with not less than the
sizes and quantities indicated or specified. Structural members shall provide full contact
at bearing surfaces.
Studs: Wall and partitions shall be nominal 2x4 and 2x6 studs 16 inches on center unless
otherwise noted or unless they are required to be larger to accommodate mechanical or
electrical equipment, piping and fixtures or fixtures or equipment of any other Trade.
Unless otherwise detailed, panels, valve covers, cleanouts, devices, access doors,
recessed cabinet boxes, etc., shall be mounted flush with the adjacent wall surface.
When any such item is of a depth where it is not practical to use solid studding to the full
thickness of the wall, then the wall shall be furred. When furring is required, it shall
extend the full width and from floor to roof or ceiling joists. The studs comprising interior
partitions and the wall material affixed thereto shall extend from floor to roof or ceiling joist
framing except as shown. Staggered stud walls shall be constructed where shown on
plans and as detailed.
Top plates in bearing partitions: Shall be doubled and lapped at each intersection with
walls or partitions. Stagger joints in upper and lower members of top plate not less than 4
feet.
Provide blocking not less than 2 inches in thickness of same width as stud as follows:
1.
2.
'
Stud partitions or walls more than 8 feet, but not more than 14 feet in height: One
row of blocking fitted snugly and nailed into mid-height of stud.
Walls or partitions over 14 feet in height: 2 or more rows of blocking. Locate
rows of blocking so that in no case will the distance between sole or top plates
and blocking or between lines of blocking exceed 8 feet. Provide solid fire blocking at ceiling line at dropped ceilings. 3.
Frame corners solid where stud walls or partitions meet or as shown on the Structural Drawing.
Provide double joists under partitions parallel to joists, and for headers and side members
at openings larger than 4 feet in dimension.
Joist framing into headers and header joists shall be supported on joist hangers.
At roofs: Provide crickets, cants, equipment curbs, wood saddles, cant strips, curbs for
plywood at parapet walls; other miscellaneous backing, blocking, curbing, and wood nailers bolted to tops of concrete or masonry and at expansion joints, as specified or
required.
Provide treated lumber at built-up roofs, with concrete or masonry parapets. Install 112 inch treated plywood from the roof deck to 16 inches maximum above the roof deck or
insulation, whichever is higher, mechanically fastened to the wall. Install 112 inch treated
plywood nailer at sides of nonmailable skylights, roof hatches, equipment and other roof
penetrations.
3.02 CUSTOM TRUSSES
A. Construct trusses with dimensional lumber members from select structural, appearance grade lumber, of sizes indicated with fabricated plate connectors of plate thickness and configuration indicated. Provide through bolt type connections as detailed.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191 -3 March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
061 00-5 C-Specsm/Rough Carpentry
SAX southwest LLC Phoenix - Las Vegas
3.03
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
PLYWOOD SHEATHING
A. Install roof sheathing with long dimension perpendicular to joints.
B. Install wall sheathing with long dimension vertical.
C. Sheathing shall have edges blocked and nailed for diaphragm or shear wall stresses as
shown on the Drawings.
D. Install with the "C" or best face on exposed side.
E. At non-tongue and groove sheathing, provide plywood clips at 24 inches O.C. maximum
at unsupported or unblocked edges.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
SOLID WOOD DECKING
Install with the "C" or best face on exposed side.
A. Install decking as shown on Structural Drawings with end joints located over bearings as
indicated.
SITE WOOD TREATMENT
A. Blocking within 12 inches of concrete shall be treated after sawing by soaking ends in
solution of Wolman CCA for not less than 15 minutes.
CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove excess materials, equipment
and debris and dispose of away from premises.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 06 I 00-6 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Rough Carpentry
SECTION 061 72
PREFABRICATED WOOD BEAMS AND JOISTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .Ol SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for review before fabrication begins, conforming to the design load criteria shown on the Drawings.
1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Joists shall be stored in a vertical position, in a dry place, completely protected from the
weather. Joists shall be handled with care to prevent damage.
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and
attachment of members is required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Plywood Web Joists:
1. Materials: Plywood web joists shall be factory manufactured with structural grade
plywood, microlam or machine stress rated lumber flanges, utilizing waterproof
type glues. Plywood webs shall be APA structural I grade with face veneers
installed with grain running in the vertical direction of the joist and butt jointed to
form a continuous web member. The web shall be pressure formed and fit into a
groove in the center of the wide face of the flange members so as to form a
pressured glue-joint at that junction.
Design: Joists shall be sized and detailed to fit the dimensions and loads indicated on the plans. designs shall be in accordance with allowable values and
section properties assigned and approved by the building code. Verification of design of the joist by complete calculations is to be available upon request.
Fabrication: Joists shall be manufactured in a plant approved by the building
code for fabrication.
2.
3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Where shown on Drawings, plywood web joists shall be erected in accordance with the
drawings and fabricators installation suggestions. Temporary construction loads which
cause member stresses beyond design limits are not permitted.
Erection bracing and blocking in addition to that specified bridging is to be provided to
keep the joists straight and plumb as required to assure adequate lateral support for the
individual joists and the entire system until the sheathing material has been applied.
B.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 B
March 1,2005 061 72-1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Prefabricated Wood Beams and Joists
SA% southwes(. LLC
phoenix - Las Vegas
3.02
C. Contractor shall notify the Architect prior to enclosing joists to provide the opportunity for
inspection of the installation.
Temporarily removing web members, drilling or cutting chords or webs will not be
permitted without written permission from Architect.
Coordinate with other trades whose Work relates to truss joist member installation.
D.
E.
CLEAN I NG
A. After erection, remove unused materials, tools, scaffolding and debris and leave broom
clean.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 061 72-2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs "/Prefabricated
Wood Beams and Joists
SECTION 061 73
WOOD TRUSSES
,
PART 1 GENERAL
I .01
1.02
1.03
0 1.04
1.05
1.06
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Prefabricated wood trusses as shown on the Drawings and as
specified. Miscellaneous fastening devices, except for connector plates, are specified
elsewhere.
SUBMllTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit engineering drawings conforming with the design load and
deflection criteria shown on the Drawings for review before fabrication begins. These
drawings shall bear the seal of a registered professional Engineer. See structural
drawings for additional requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design: Trusses shall conform with applicable provisions of the following:
1. NDS-85 for lumber.
2. TPI-85 for criteria.
3. UBC for code compliance.
B. Report: Submit ICBO report for metal connectors. Provide engineering calculations for ornamental connectors for exterior canopy trusses.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handling: Handle fabricated trusses and subassemblies with care so that they are not
subject to damage. During the construction period, provide means for adequate
distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any one truss or other
component is not exceeded.
B. Storage: If the trusses are to be stockpiled or stored prior to erection, set in vertical
positions and, rest upon temporary bearing supports and brace so they will not be subject
to unusual bending or tip over.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field
measurements and checking shop drawings details before proceeding with fabrications.
SCHEDULING
A. Time delivery and installation of trusses to avoid delaying other trades whose work is
dependent on or affected by the carpentry work and to comply with protection and storage requirements.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March I, 2005 061 73-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Wood Trusses
SASC swthwest. LLC Phoenix ' Las VeQaS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fabricate trusses and connectors in accordance with approved engineering drawings.
B. Moisture Content: The average moisture content of lumber 2 inches or less in thickness
shall be 19 percent or less at time of enclosure.
C. Lumber defects such as wane or knots occurring in the connector plate area shall not
affect more than ten percent of required plate area, or number of effective teeth required
for each truss member.
Connector Plates: Minimum of 0.036 'inch thick and manufactured from ASTM A653
Grade A steel, hot dip galvanized to meet Coating Designation G60. In highly corrosive
environments or when fire retardant lumber is specified, furnish stainless steel connector
plates in lieu of hot dip galvanized.
D.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Cut members accurately to length, angle and true to line to assure tight joints for the
finished truss. Place members and connector plates in special jigs with the members
tightly clamped in place and maintain in that position until the connector plates have been
pressed into the lumber simultaneously on both sides of the joints. Do not permit open
joints which depend on the stiffness of the metal connector plates to transmit stresses or
improperly fitting joints. Build camber into the member, as noted, by properly positioning
the members in the fabricating jig.
B. Apply connector plates to both faces of truss at each joint to provide firm even contract
between the plate and the wood. Wood members shall be accurately cut and fabricated
so that members have good bearing and completed truss units are uniform. See Truss
Plate Institute Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses QST-88 for
tolerances and other special requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Coordinate with other trades whose work relates to truss installation.
B. Securely brace and block trusses both during erection and after permanent installation, in
a building in accordance with Commentary and Recommendations (BWT-80) as
published by the Truss Plate Institute and the manufacturer's written instructions.
Erection bracing and blocking shall hold trusses straight and plumb and in safe condition
until decking and permanent truss bracing has been fastened forming a structurally sound roof framing system.
C. Install erection and permanent bracing and blocking and permanently fasten trusses
before application of loads. Permanent structural cross bracing to ensure overall rigidity
of the roof system shall be in accordance with the project Structural Drawings. Check
truss design drawings for additional special bracing or blocking requirements.
D. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, nailing shall be as required to assemble and
secure wood construction, but in no case less than that required by applicable building
codes. Connectors shall have current IC60 approval.
D.F. Architects 961236ASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 06 1 73-2 C-SpecsmMlood Trusses
7
3.02
E. Unless specifically shown, wood plugs or nailing blocks shall not be used. Powder
cartridge driven units may not be used on structural members without prior approval.
Provide nails, strikes, screws, straps and similar items of suitable type and sizes to attach
and hold members securely in place as may be necessary.
F. Bridging: Install a continuous line of 2 in. x 4 in. bridging connected to each member at
the web or chord member during the erection stage. Provide one line along the top and
one line along the bottom chord.
G. Alignment: Erect members with the top and bottom chords in true vertical alignment.
Align top chords of trusses parallel to each other and straight with no point in the plane on
the top chords more than 3/8 inch out of true horizontal.
CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 061 73-3
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTMNVood Trusses
SECTION 06180
GLUE-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART I GENERAL
1 .Ol
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
SUBMllTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing materials, dimensions and erection details.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Design, fabrication and construction of structural glue-laminated timber shall
conform to applicable requirements of the following:
1. ANSVAITC A190.1.
2. CS-253.
B. Laminator shall have minimum 5 years of continuous experience immediately prior to
fabricating beams of this project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store members on supports not less than 12 inches above ground or l-1M inches above
subfloors, as applicable.
B. Individually wrap members for protection during shipment, storage and erection with Sisalkraft or resin sized paper. Contractor shall continue to protect members after
erection and until acceptance of Work.
C. Protect members during unloading, hauling and erection. Field-trimmed ends or surfaces
shall receive a coat of penetrating type sealer prior to erection.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements;
proper fit and attachment of members is required.
SCHEDULING
A. Contractor and fabricator shall coordinate construction and delivery schedules. Members
shall not be delivered to site until adequate preparation for storage has been made and
not erected until preparations to receive members are complete, including miscellaneous metal and connecting hardware embedded in concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber:
1.
2.
Lumber for laminating shall be of such stress grade to provide glue-laminated members with normal working stress values of 2400 p.s.i. in bending. Moisture Content: At time of gluing, moisture content of lumber shall not be less
than 7 percent and shall not exceed 11 percent. The range of moisture content of
various laminations assembled into a single member shall not exceed 5 percent.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 06180-1 C-Specs m/Glue-Laminated Construction
B. Adhesive:
1.
2.
Mixing, spreading, storage life, pot life, working life and assembly life of adhesive
shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations. Use exterior type adhesives.
Comply with ANSVAITC A190.1 for wet-use (dry-use) adhesive.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate with adequate plant and equipment and under supervision of properly qualified
personnel.
B. Laminations shall be machine finished, but not sanded, to a smooth finish and to a
uniform thickness with a maximum allowable variation of 1/64 inch.
C. Provide members conforming to AlTC Architectural appearance grade where exposed to
view and Industrial appearance grade where concealed from view in the final construction
in accordance with AITC-110.
D. Warp, twist or other characteristics which prevent contact of adjacent glued faces or
interfere with uniform bending when under clamping pressure not permitted. Surfaces to
be glued shall be clean and free from oil, dust and other foreign material detrimental to
gluing.
.
E. Identification: Each completed member shall bear a specific identification, for location
and shall be accompanied by an AlTC Inspection Certificate provided by the fabricator.
F. Connecting Hardware:
1. Connecting hardware indicated on Drawings shall be furnished by fabricator of
glue-laminated members.
2. Steel plates, angles and other shapes: Conform to ASTM A36. 3. Bolts: Conform to ASTM A307. Make bolt lengths such that threads are
excluded from bearing on wood or steel. Provide standard malleable iron or equivalent steel plate washers under bolt heads or nuts bearing on wood.
4. Lag screws, shear plates and split ring connectors: Conform to “National Design
Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings” of National Forest
Products Association.
Accurately locate bolt holes and drill with a bit 1/16 inch larger in diameter than
bolt. Install lag screws, shear plates and split ring connectors per National
Design Specifications.
Galvanizing: Fabricated steel base assemblies shall be by hot-dip process per
ASTM A1 23 after fabrication.
Shop paint: Coat connecting hardware except galvanized base, not embedded in
concrete, with one coat of primer per Federal Specification TT-P-645.
5.
6.
7.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Erect members in accordance with AITC-105 and the instructions of the fabricator
B. Handling or erection of tools, equipment and methods shall avoid scarring corners and
faces or otherwise injuring the member. Sharp instruments or unprotected wire rope or
chain slings not permitted.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
061 80-2 C-Specs”/Glue-Laminated Construction
SASC swthwest. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
3.02
C. Erect laminated wood members true and plumb. Install temporary bracing wherever
necessary to take care of loads to which structure may be subjected, including erection
equipment, and to keep structure and members in alignment.
D. Leave temporary bracing in place as long as required for safety and until no longer
required to maintain position. As erection progresses, securely bolt up to take care of
dead loads, lateral forces and erection stresses. Tie temporary bracing to adequate
support.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection and Testing:
1. Inspection of beams and their connections prior to erection and after erection, at
the jobsite, shall be by an ICBO certified independent inspector with minimum five
(5) years of experience in inspecting glulam beams and their framing.
Where, as cautioned by AITC, tension may occur perpendicular to grain due to
wood shrinkage restrained by connection or other reasons, the laminator shall
install vertical dowels in glued holes to arrest cracks.
3. Size of dowels and the spacing shall be determined by the laminator for each
specific occurrence, regardless of when such cracks occur.
4. Tension lamination finger joints shall be proofload tested and test results
submitted for review.
2.
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials.
equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191 -3
March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse 061 80-3 C-Specs"/Glue-Laminated Construction
SAX Southwest, LLC Phoenix * Las VegaS
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior base, moldings, trim and railings.
2. interior frames and jambs.
3. Interior sills and wall caps.
4. Miscellaneous wood ornamental items and trim.
5. Wood veneer wall panels and trim.
6. Shop finishing of finish carpentry.
7. Other items as indicated.
SUBMllTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, elevations, dimensions, construction
details, and schedule of finishes.
B. Samples: Submit minimum of two (2) samples of each species of exposed wood with
selected finish. Samples shall be 12 by 12 inches in size for panel products and 24 inch
lengths of each trim member required.
REFERENCES
A. Standards:
stringent requirements are specified:
1.
2. American Plywood Association.
3.
Following standards apply to Work of this Section except where more
Western Wood Products Association Manual.
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standard Grading and Dressing Rules.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or
coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight.
B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Provide humidity conditions which will not damage
woodwork.
B. Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurement; proper fit and attachment of parts is required.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191 -3
March 1,2005 06200-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Finish Carpentry
SAX S0dlWe& uc Phoenix - Las Vegas
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
WOOD MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Lumber Trim and Rails: Awl Premium Grade; average moisture content of 6
percent; species and grade as follows:
1. Select Cherry, Premium Grade.
B. Grounds, Blocking and Furring Strips: #2 White Pine, construction grade Douglas Fir or
other sound softwood. Fire treated lumber as required by codes or construction type.
SHEET MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Plywood: Awl, core materials of particleboard , type of glue recommended for
application; face veneer and cuts as follows:
1. Species, cut and veneer matching: Select Cherry, Premium Grade, plain sliced
and book-matched unless otherwise indicated.
ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Nails, screws, panel clips, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material,
and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed
where possible.
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, configurations and details indicated and in
conformance with Awl Custom Grade Standards.
B. Provide wood base, molding, trim, railing, sills, and wall cap members in one-piece
lengths to the greatest extent possible and in compliance with Awl Section 300
requirements for grade indicated.
1. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members. Terminate kerf or groove short of end of members with ends exposed
in finished work.
INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900 for fabrication of interior door frames
and jambs.
SHOP FINISHING OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. Quality Standard: Comply with Awl Section 1500, Premium Grade, unless othewise
indicated.
B. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section,
regardless of whether shop applied or applied after installation. 1. Shop Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork at
the fabrication shop. Defer only final touch up, cleaning, and polishing until after
installation.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3 March 1,2005 06200-2 Carlsbad Golfgourse Clubhouse
C-Specs /Finish Carpentry
C.
D.
PART 3
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer to concealed surfaces of
woodwork.
Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for finish system, staining, and sheen,
with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
1. Awl Finish System: As indicated on Drawings or as selected by Architect. 2. Staining: Match Architects sample.
3. Sheen: Satin 30-50 gloss units.
EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Priming: Back-prime wood surfaces inaccessible and unexposed after installation before
delivery with an approved linseed oil and aluminum primer. Prime coat unfinished metal
parts.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Set and secure woodwork in place; rigid, plumb and level, and in accordance with Awl
Section 1700.
Use only hotdip galvanized or aluminum finish or casing nails. Set nails for putty
stopping in surfaced members. Hammer marks not acceptable on exposed finished
surface and are subject to rejection of member by Architect.
Interior Base, Molding, Trim, Sills, and Wall Caps: Install members in single lengths
without splices where possible. Miter external corners and cope internal corners. Where unavoidable in the finished Work, make end splices bevel splices and not square butted.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base
and wall with plastic wood filler.
Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips and
by blind nailing on backup strips, splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim
and framing. Do not face nail unless otherwise indicated or unavoidable in the finished
Work.
Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of
species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
Install Work to details shown; plumb, level and to line and securely anchored. Make scribes, where required, accurate.
Tolerances: As follows: 1.
2.
3.
4. Variation in reveal width: 1/32 inch maximum.
5.
Plumb and level: 1/16 inch in 96-inches maximum.
Vertical cup and bow for flush wood members and panel products: 1/16 inch in
96-inch maximum.
Horizontal variation from true plane: 118 inch in 96-inches maximum.
Alignment of reveals and joints between members: 1/32 inch maximum offset.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 06200-3
Carlsbad Golfsourse Clubhouse
C-Specs /Finish Carpentry
SA% souM. LLC Phoenix - Las Vegas
I. Provide and install other miscellaneous millwork items and related items required to
complete the Work.
J. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop
or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed, prior
to finishing:
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 06200-4 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Finish Carpen try
SECTION 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Architectural woodwork as shown on Drawings and as specified herein,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2. Wood cabinets.
3. Wall mounted adjustable shelving.
4. Custom display cases.
5.
Plastic laminate faced cabinets and countertops.
Custom wood toilet compartments and doors including hardware.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 10501 'Wood Lockers" for custom manufactured wood lockers.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, elevations, dimensions, hardware,
construction details, and schedule of finishes.
6. Samples:
1.
2. 3. Each type of hardware.
Submit two 12 inch x 12 inch samples of each wood species to receive factory
finish showing stain color.
Submit samples of plastic laminate showing selected colors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following:
1.
2. ANSVNEMA LD3 for laminates.
AW I "Quality Standards" for woodwork quality.
B. Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact.
8. Storage: Adequately protect against damage and moisture while stored at the site.
C.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions.
A, Environmental Requirements: Provide humidity conditions which will prevent damage to
woodwork.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3 March 1,2005 06400- 1 Carlsbft Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Architectural Woodwork
SASC Southwest. UC phoenix. L~S v-5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish plastic products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the
Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements:
1. Formica
2. W ilsonart
3. Nevamar
4. Laminart
5. Pionite
WOOD MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Lumber: Awl Premium Grade; average moisture content of 6 percent; species
and cut as shown on Drawings.
SHEET MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Plywood: Awl, core materials of particleboard , type of glue recommended for
application; face veneer and cuts as shown on Drawings.
B. Wood Particleboard: Awl standard, composed of wood chips, medium density, made
with water resistant adhesive; of grade to suit application; sanded faces for drawer
construction and shelving.
C. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 114 inch (6mm) thick,
smooth one side, for drawer bottoms, gables and backs.
LAM I NATE MATE RIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: High pressure decorative type.
1. Horizontal Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade GP50. .050 inch thickness.
2. Vertical Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade GP28, (.028 inch thickness). This grade of
laminate shall be counterbalanced.
3. Post Forming Grade: NEMA LD-E, Grade PF 4.2.
4. Melamine: Tested to meet NEMA Test LD-3. This grade of laminate shall be counterbalanced.
5. Backer: NEMA LD-3, Grade BK-20 (.020 inch thickness).
6. ColorslPatterns: As indicated on Drawings or as selected from manufacturer's
full range of colors.
ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by Laminate Manufacturer to suit application.
B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.
Threaded steel for concealed joints.
Decorative Metal Inserts: 26 gauge, metal and finish as indicated on Drawings. C.
D. Edge trim: Hot melt glue applied 3mm PVC banding with eased corner. Color shall be as
selected by Architect.
E. Fabricated steel countertop supports are specified in Section 05500.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 06400-2 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/Architectural Woodwork
F. Glass for Display Case Doors and Glass Shelves: 1/4-inch thick, ASTM C 1048, Kind FT
(Fully Tempered), Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3; with exposed edges seamed
before tempering. Grind and polish edges of glass used as shelves.
2.06 HARDWARE
A. Shelf Standards and Supports: K&V 255AL and 256 supports, provide 256R where used
with glass shelves.
Shelf Standard and Brackets: K&V 85-1 85 double-slot. B.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Sliding Door Pulls: Grant 426.
E. Catches: Stanley 41 or K&V 43.
F. Drawer Slides: Blum 230 E, 100 Ib., Blum 430 E at file drawers.
G. Hinges: Blum 170E w/ mounting plate; #71.6530.
H. Locks: National C8138 for drawers; National C8123 for doors.
1. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Grant 600 Series.
J. Sliding Glass Door Hardware: K&V P992 ZC Roll-Ezy wlcam type lock.
K. Finish: As selected by Architect.
L. Provide other hardware to fulfill function of architectural woodwork and cabinets as shown
on Drawings subject to approval by Architect.
M. Wood Toilet Compartment Hardware: Products as selected by Architect as manufactured
by Accurate Partitions, Corporation, Ampco Products, Inc., or Jacknob Corp.
2.07 FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 09900.
2.08 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate architectural woodwork and cabinets in conformance with AW I Custom Grade Standards.
B. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
C. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 318 inch matching hardwood or plastic laminate edging. Use one piece for full length only.
D. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern or
plastic trim as indicated on Drawings.
Shelves: Fabricate shelves with 1 inch thick wood particleboard cores, unless otherwise
indicated.
E.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 06400-3
Carlsb%d Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Architectural Woodwork
F. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick style as shown on Drawings.
G. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
H. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured
sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel
arrises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.
1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
J. Provide cutouts for appliances, outlet boxes, fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of
cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges.
K. Secure glass in wood frames as indicated with wood stops and to comply with applicable
provisions of Section 08800 and of FGMA "Glazing Manual."
2.09 SHOP FINISHING
A. Sand Work smooth and set exposed fasteners; apply wood filler.
6. Use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for
applied finishes.
C. Finish: Awl Section 1500 System TR-6 for transparent finish.
D. Seal internal surfaces of cabinets with two coats of sealer where indicated to be wood.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
6. Coordination:
concealed by this Work.
Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure cabinetry and other woodwork in place; rigid, plumb and level, and in accordance with Awl Section 1700.
6. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C. Secure and align adjoining cabinet units and counter tops with concealed joint fasteners.
D. Scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (0.80 inch).
Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
Secure cabinet and bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. E.
F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of
species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 CarlsbTi Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 064004 C-Specs /Architectural Woodwork
3.03
3.04
G. . Install trim in single lengths without splices where possible. Miter external corners and
cope internal comers.
FINISHING
A. Provide final touch-up of shop-applied finishes and complete any finishing not completed in Shop. Sand Work smooth and set exposed fasteners.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and
visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
8.
C.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 06400-5 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Architectural Woodwork
SECTION 07131
BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Application of elastomeric sheet waterproof membrane and protection
board as shown on Drawings and as specified.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data, installation instructions, limitations and
recommendations. Include certification of data indicating VOC content of components.
B. Samples: Submit samples of membrane and protection board.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
Minimum 3 years experience with Projects of similar scope and complexity.
Applicator shall be approved by Membrane Manufacturer.
Applicator shall furnish written evidence that applicator is currently approved by
manufacturer to install the products required or specified for this project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered in Manufacturer's original unopened packages with
Manufacturer's labels intact.
B. Material shall be protected from rain and physical damage. Store materials away from
sparks or flames. Store membrane where it will not receive high temperature exposure
for extended periods of time.
C. Outdoors, place cartons on raised pallets and cover completely. Follow Manufacturer's
directions.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Perform Work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits
established by the Manufacturer of the materials and products used.
B. Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation Work is
complete and in condition to receive sheet membrane waterproofing.
WARRANTY
A. Provide Manufacturer's written warranty for a period of 5 years, against failure of
waterproofing system to perform in accordance with the terms expressed in the manufacturer's standard warranty.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1.2005 071 31 -1 CarlsbafMGolf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the
Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements:
1. W. R. Grace Bituthene
2.
3. Mirafi Miradri 860/861
W. R. Meadows Sealtight Met-Rot
B. Specifications are based upon Bituthene as manufactured by W. R. Grace Construction
Products Division.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Waterproof Membrane: Bituthene 3000 or 4000 membrane (as required by prevailing
VOC requirements); minimum self-adhering membrane of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt
integrally bonded to 4 mils of polyethylene sheeting. Provide product manufactured for
application in temperatures present at application.
B. Primer, Elastomeric Mastic and Protection Board Adhesive: As furnished by Membrane
Manufacturer.
C. Protection Material:
1. Horizontal: Bituthene Asphaltic Hardboard, or Amoco Foam Products AMOCOR-
2.
PB4.
Vertical: One inch thick expanded polystyrene.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Coordination:
concealed by this Work. Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES
A. Refer to Manufacturer's literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and
sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil, and wax from exposed
surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods
which are acceptable to Manufacturer of sheet membrane waterproofing.
1.
B; Cast-in-Place Concrete Substrates:
Do not proceed with installation until concrete has properly cured and dried,
minimum 7 days for normal structural concrete and minimum 14 days for lightweight structural concrete.
Fill form tie rod holes with concrete and finish flush with surrounding surface.
Repair bugholes over 112 inch in length and 1/4 inch deep and finish flush with
surrounding surface.
2.
3.
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 071 31 -2 CarlsbafMGolf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing
4.
5.
Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete and repair exposed area.
Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface.
C. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashings as recommended by Waterproofing
Manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Manufacturer's literature for recommendations on installation, including but not
limited to, the following:
1. Apply primer at the rate recommended by Manufacturer. Recoat areas not
waterproofed if contaminated by dust. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish
surfaces to protect those surfaces from excessive application of primer.
' 2. Delay application of membrane until primer is completely dry. Dry time will vary
with weather conditions.
Seal daily terminations with troweled bead of mastic.
Apply protection board and related materials in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.
4.
B. At the end of each working day, water cut-offs must be installed to protect against water
penetration under installed membrane. Temporary water cut-offs shall be removed
before Work is resumed. Seal daily terminations with a trowelled bead of elastomeric membrane.
C. Where metal edging occurs set flanges in mastic and secure as shown on Drawings.
Strip in with membrane.
. D. Install protection material the same day the membrane is applied (or immediately after 24
hour testing at horizontal applications). Secure protection material in place by an
approved method until concrete or backfill is placed. Nails or other fasteners shall not
penetrate through the membrane. Topping slab may be applied immediately upon
installation of protection material.
3.04 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 071 31 -3 CarlsbafMGolf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing
SASC Swthwest. LLC Phoenix. Las Vws
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data, installation instructions, limitations and
recommendations. Include certification and test data substantiating R-values and
combustibility of each type of insulation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and
surface burning characteristics.
Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
combustibility.
B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to job in Manufacturer's original unopened
packaging. Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Deliver so that
stocks of materials on the site will permit uninterrupted progress of the Work.
B. Materials shall be properly identified on each package with the Manufacturer's name and
R value.
2.01
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the
Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements:
1. Batt and Blanket Insulation:
a. Johns-Manville
b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
C. Certainteed
B. Materials designated for a specific application shall be the products of one Manufacturer.
MATERIALS
A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, FS25 Type Ill, Class A, Category 1 faced glass fiber batts,
with resistance values as indicated on the Drawings, for various locations. Batts shall be
a single thickness to meet the required R value noted on Drawings. Multiple layers of
batts will not be accepted. Furnish faced batts with nailing flanges at wood framing,
B. Fire Safing Insulation: ASTM C24, E119 and E136. Thickness shall be as required by
the Manufacturer to provide a fire rating equal to that of the assembly of which it is a part.
Where smoke stop protection also is required, install Thermafiber Smokeseal Caulking Compound as needed to meet UL Standard 1479 and ASTM E814 procedure.
D.F. Architects 96123EASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 07210-1
Carlsbad GoldCourse Clubhouse
C-Specs /Building Insulation
C. Acoustical Batt Insulation: As specified in Section 09820.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine subsurfaces to receive Work of this Section. Report in writing to General
Contractor, with a copy to Architect, any conditions detrimental to Work of this Section.
Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to the
contrary and will make Insulation Contractor responsible for any corrections the Architect
may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Batt Insulation:
1.
2.
Apply no insulation until such time as the Construction has progressed to the
point that inclement weather will not damage or wet the insulation material.
Fully insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members, pipes, conduits or other obstruction by cutting and fitting insulation material as required
to maintain the integrity of the insulation.
At wood framing nail or staple flanges of faced batts and friction fit unfaced batts
between wood members.
Batt insulation at metal studs and other non-nailable members shall be installed
with vapor barriers in and flanges continuously tight against framing members.
a. Secure in place with string wire or other method as approved by
End matching neatly with ends fitting snugly.
3.
4.
Architect.
5.
B. Fire Safing Insulation: Install in proper sizes on safing clips as needed but not to exceed
24 inches O.C. Leave no voids between walls and edges of slabs.
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials,
equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean
condition.
B. Protection: Take precautions to protect insulation, both during and after installation, from
damage of any kind until covered.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-1 91-3 March 1,2005 0721 0-2
Carlsbad GciiCourse Clubhouse
C-Specs Building Insulation
SASC SOUTHWESI, uc
phoenix. Las Vesa~
0 SECTION 07215
INSULATED METAL FURRING SYSTEM
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Furnish manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of
assemblies.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM C754 and C840 and GA-216 insofar as any portions are applicable, are hereby
made a direct part of this Specification as though repeated herein. In case of conflicts the more stringent requirements shall govern.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, packages or bundles identified
with manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade.
B. Store inside in dry areas and protect from dampness and deterioration.
C. Protect metal accessories from rusting.
D. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the premises.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temperature and Humidity Conditions: Do not install system unless installation areas
comply with the minimum temperature and ventilation requirements recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Protection: Protect work installed by other trades previous to work under this Section.
Replace any work damaged without added cost to the Owner. Provide closures for
exterior openings, where required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of the following Manufacturer, subject to compliance with Specification
requirements.
1. Henry Products; RoyLite Styro Stud www.hennrproducts.com
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Insulation: Expanded polystyrene preformed cellular insulation conforming to ASTM
(2578, Class I, pre-grooved to receive channel, 1-112 inch thickness unless noted
otherwise on drawings.
B. Channels: U-shaped 1 -5/8 inch wide steel furring channel, roll formed, 25-gauge
galvan ized steel.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 0721 5-1 C-SpecsTM/lnsulated Metal Furring System
C. Channel Fasteners: Tapcon Concrete Fastening System. Phillips Recess No. 3, 1-5/8
inch long x 1/4 inch diameter, manufactured by Buildex Division, Illinois Tool Works, Elk
Grove Village, IL. www.itw.com
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
8. Coordination:
concealed by this Work.
Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Application shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Install insulation board on inside of perimeter walls where indicated:
1.
2.
Installation of the board shall begin at one comer with each board tightly butted to
form an uninterrupted surface.
Cut and fit as necessary to accommodate doors, windows and electrical conduit.
C. Position the channel in one of the pre-grooved areas of the board, beginning at the
corner. Channel spacing shall be on 24 inches centers. The back of the channel shall be
pressed nearly flush with the face of the insulation board.
D. Position additional channels around windows and door openings and at outside corners
as necessary to provide a firm attachment for the gypsum wallboard.
E. Drive fasteners through the channel and insulation board into substrate. Fasteners shall be spaced at intervals of not more than 18 inches.
F. Gypsum Board Installation: In accordance with Section 09250 and as follows:
1.
2.
Attach wallboard to the metal furring channel using standard self-tapping drywall
screws. Screw spacing shall be 12 inches O.C.
In all instances wallboard shall cover all insulation board, even in unexposed areas.
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove and dispose of
excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs"/lnsulated Metal Furring System 0721 5-2
SASC SouUrwes(. LLC Phoenix ' Las ve!Jas
SECTION 07240
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .Ol
1.02
SUM MARY
A. Section Includes the following:
1.
2.
Exterior insulation and finish wall system (EIFS) applied to concrete masonry unit
and plywood sheathing surfaces.
Exterior finish wall system (DFS) direct applied to gypsum board and concrete
masonry unit surfaces.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1.
2.
At all locations the insulation board shall be completely encapsulated by the
reinforcing mesh and adhesive or substrate.
Separate insulation board from interior of building by minimum 1/2 inch gypsum sheathing or equivalent thermal barrier material which will limit the average
temperature rise of the unexposed surface to not more than 250 degrees F. after
15 minutes of fire exposure when subjected to the ASTM El 19 time-temperature
curve. Install thermal barrier in a manner assuring its remaining in place for a
minimum fire exposure of 15 minutes. 3. Insulation Board: Use and maximum thickness shall be in accordance with
applicable building code requirements. Length and slope of inclined surfaces shall follow guidelines listed below:
a.
b.
C.
Minimum slope: 6 inches of rise in 12 inches of horizontal projection.
Maximum length of slope: 2.3 times the thickness of the insulation.
Inclined surfaces shall not be used for areas as defined as roofs by
building codes.
4. Substrate Systems: Engineered to withstand applicable loads including live,
dead, positive and suction wind, seismic, etc. Bond strength, fastener strength
and connection strength shall be analyzed and engineered. Maximum deflection
under positive or suction full design loads of substrate system shall not exceed
11240th of span.
Sheathing substrates shall be oriented with their strong axis perpendicular to the
supporting framing.
Expansion Joints: Install continuous expansion joints at the following locations:
a.
b.
C.
d.
e. Where the substrate changes.
f.
Changes in roof lines.
Long continuous elevations.
3) Changes in building shape and structural systems. 9- * Expansion and contraction of the field applied ElFS and adjacent
materials shall be taken into account in the design of expansion joints,
with proper consideration given to sealant properties, installation
conditions, temperature range, coefficient of expansion of materials, joint
width-to-depth ratios, etc.
5.
6.
Where expansion joints occur in the substrate.
Where building expansion joints occur.
At floor lines in wood frame construction.
Where the ElFS abuts other materials.
Where significant structural movement occurs, such as at:
1)
2)
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 0 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/ Exterior Insulation and Finish System
March 1,2005 07240-1
SAX Southwesl. LLC
PhcenlX. Las vegas
7. Details: Follow ElFS manufacturer's latest published information for standard
detail treatments. Corners shall be reinforced by wrapping the standard
reinforcing mesh around the corner from both directions for a minimum of 8
inches as recommended by the manufacturer. Openings shall be reinforced
using a 9 inch wide strip of standard reinforcing mesh laid at a 45 degree angle to
the opening corner as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.03 SUBMllTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
expansion joints.
Provide drawings showing wall layout, all details, connections and
B. Samples: Provide color and texture sample for Architect's approval. Sample shall be 24
x 48 inches mounted on plywood sheathing (of the type which will be actually used), of
each finish, texture and color. Each sample shall be prepared using the same tools and techniques proposed for the actual installation.
C. Test Reports: Submit copies of ICBO Research Report verifying the performance of the
EIFS.
D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit copies of ElFS manufacturer or authorized
representative's field service reports for each filed quality control visit.
E. Certificates:
manufacturer for this Project.
Submit a copy of applicator's current certificate of approval from ElFS
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish the following maintenance materials:
1. 2. One can of adhesive.
3.
4.
For each finish and color, one can of finish.
20 square feet of standard reinforcing mesh.
20 square feet of insulation board.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Application of ElFS materials shall be performed by journeymen qualified
in the trowel trades and trained by ElFS manufacturer at an applicator school.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
Insulation Board: Listed in the UL Building Materials Directory and have Flame
Spread and Smoke Developed rating of not greater than 25 and 450,
respectively, in accordance with ASTM €84.
EIFS: Approved for use by ICBO as described in current ICBO Research
Committee Report.
1.
2.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact.
B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 07240-2 C-Specsm/ Exterior Insulation and Finish System
1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Ambient air temperature shall be 40 degrees F. or greater and rising at the time
of installation of the ElFS materials, and remain so for at least 24 hours
thereafter.
For ElFS installation in ambient temperatures less than 40 degrees F., maintain
supplementary heat for at least 24 hours after ElFS installation. Subsequent to
installation of the EIFS, the wall shall remain free of residual moisture.
2.
1 .OS WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's Complete 5 year warranty covering both labor and materials used
in system, and substrate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products equaling or exceeding quality requirements of the specified product, of the
following manufacturers, as follows or as approved are acceptable for bidding:
1. Pleko Southwest, Tempe, AZ
2.
3. Senergy, Inc., Cranston RI
4. STO Industries, Rutland, VT.
5. United Coatings, Greenacres, WA.
Dryvit System, Inc., West Warwick, RI.
B. Specifications are based upon products as manufactured by Senergy, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Senerquick Adhesive, water-reducible, non-cementitious, translucent white
adhesive used directly from the pail for application of insulation board to plywood
sheathing.
B. Alpha Base Coat: 100% acrylic polymer dispersion with a quartz or silica aggregate that is field blended with Type I or Type II Portland Cement 1 :1 by weight. For use as adhesive
over gypsum soffit board and as base coat for embedment of mesh.
C. Waterproofing Base Coat for Low-Slope and Sill Conditions: Senergy "Extra Stop Base
Coat" acrylic-based, portland cement mixed, waterproof base coat and adhesive for use
at low slope parapets, sills, and projections.
D. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene, ASTM C578 Class II, aged (air dried) for 6 weeks at 68 degrees F. minimum, or for 5 days at 140 degrees F. before use.
1.
2. 3. K-value: 0.23 per inch.
4.
5. Size: 24" x 48"
Flame Spread (ASTM E84 or UL 723): Less than 25.
Average Density: 1 .O pound per cubic foot.
Thickness: One inch, or as indicated.
E. Standard Reinforcing Mesh: Treated, balanced, open weave, glass fiber type, minimum
weight of 4 oz./yd., available in 38 inch and 9 inch widths.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 07240-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/ Exterior Insulation and
Finish System
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
High Impact Mesh: Treated, balanced, open weave, glass fiber type, minimum weight of
20 oz./yd., available in 38 inch widths.
Finish Coat Materials: Factory mixed, acrylic based finish coat with colorfast mineral
pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers to achieve finish indicated.
1. Color: As noted on Drawings or as selected by Architect.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II.
Water: Clear, potable, and free of all foreign matter.
Sealant System: Shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Tremco Dymeric Plus, with Primer No. 1.
Pecora Dynatrol II with Type P75 Primer.
Dow-Corning 790 with 1200 Primer and Ethafoam Backer Rod.
2.03 MIXES
A. Adhesive:
homogeneous consistency. Additives are not permitted.
Stir pre-mixed adhesive products to be used directly from the pail to a
B. Base Coats:
1. Use clean container, free of foreign substance, for mixing and preparing material.
Do not use container which has been used for or cleaned with a petroleum
product.
Use a mixer similar to Goldblatt Jiffler Mixer No. 15311H7, powered by 1M inch
drill 400-500 RPM.
Measure a given weight of adhesive into a container, and an equal weight of
Portland cement into another container. While stirring the adhesive, add small amounts of Portland cement in increments
to obtain a final ratio of one-to-one by weight. Continue stirring until the mixture is
homogenous.
Small amounts of water may be added to the adhesive mixture to adjust
workability. The mixture shall not be "watered down."
A period of 5 minutes shall elapse after the initial mixing, then the mixture shall be
tempered by stirring again.
Use mixture immediately after tempering. Pot life is the same as plaster-like
materials and depends on ambient temperature and humidity conditions and
substrate. Keep container closed when not in use.
Under no circumstances use additives, or materials of any kind such as rapid
binders, antifreeze, accelerators, fillers, or pigments.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C. Finish Coating:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thoroughly stir coating with a clean high speed mixer as specified above until a
uniform workable consistency is obtained.
A small amount of water may be added to adjust workability. Coating shall not be
"watered down." Maximum water, 8 ounces per pail.
Under no circumstances use additives, or materials of any kind such as rapid binders, antifreeze, accelerators, fillers, or pigments.
Apply coating immediately after mixing. Keep container closed when not in use.
Pot life depends on ambient temperature and humidity conditions.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1.2005 07240-4
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpeCsm/ Exterior Insulation and
Finish System
PART 3 EXECUTION # 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Representative of the ElFS manufacturer shall inspect and approve gypsum
substrate prior to the application of insulation, as well as the insulation prior to
application of the finish.
Masonry, concrete and brick substrates shall be flat within 114 inch within any 4
feet. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for application of additive or
leveling coat to assure a smooth surface.
2.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Insulation Board:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Begin application at the base from firm, permanent or temporary support.
Apply adhesion to clean hard surface. Apply board with long edge oriented horizontally with its joints offset with respect
to the substrate joints and using a running bond pattern. Precut insulation board as required to fit openings, corners and projections. '
Stagger vertical joints and interlock at corners.
Insulation board pieces smaller than 24 inches x 48 inches may be used, such as
at corners. In all cases the perimeter of the insulation board shall have the 2 inch
ribbon per the Ribbon and Dab Method. Maintain 32 percent minimum contact
area.
B. Adhesive Mixture:
1. Notched Trowel Method: Apply beads of adhesive mixture to one surface of the
insulation board using a notched trowel having an edge profile meeting ElFS
manufacturer's requirements. The beads shall stand out 318 inch from the
surface of the insulation board. Apply ribbons of adhesive mixture 2 inches wide
x 3/8 inches thick around entire perimeter of the insulation board using a trowel.
Adhesive mixture shall not be applied to the ends of the insulation board. Use
this method for gypsum sheathing substrates only.
C. Mesh:
1.
2. Standard Mesh Base Coat:
Reverse roll as necessary to remove the tendency of the mesh to curl.
a. Using a stainless steel trowel, apply the adhesive mixture to the surface
to a uniform dry thickness of 1/16 inch. Apply base coat in 2 applications. b. Immediately embed the standard reinforcing mesh into the wet adhesive
mixture using a trowel.
C. Smooth the surface of the adhesive mixture with a trowel until the
reinforcing mesh is fully embedded.
d. The pattern of the mesh shall not be visible beneath the surface of the
adhesive mixture.
e. Lap reinforcing mesh pieces a minimum of 2-112 inches on all sides,
working from the center to the edge while smoothing out wrinkles. f. A period of 24 hours shall elapse to allow the base coat to form a positive
bond.
9. Protect base coat from damage and weather while curing.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 07240-5 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsN/ Exterior Insulation and Finish System
3. Heavy Duty Mesh Basecoat: Provide the following at applications below 6'-0"
above concrete walk surface. a. Using a stainless steel trowel, apply the adhesive mixture to the surface
to a uniform thickness of 3/32 inch.
b. Immediately embed the high impact armor mesh into the wet adhesive
mixture using a trowel.
C. Smooth the surface of adhesive mixture with a trowel until heavy duty
reinforcing mesh is fully embedded.
d. The pattern of the mesh shall not be visible beneath the surface of the
adhesive mixture.
e. Ends of adjacent heavy duty mesh pieces shall be tightly butted, not
lapped.
f. Work heavy duty mesh into the adhesive mixture, working from the center to the edge while smoothing out wrinkles.
9. A period of 24 hours shall elapse to allow the base coat to form a positive bond.
h. Protect base coat from damage and weather while curing.
i. Examine the surface of the first layer after curing for projections, loose
strands of heavy duty mesh, and correct to produce a flat surface. i. Apply a second layer consisting of adhesive mixture and standard
reinforcing mesh over the heavy duty mesh as specified above.
Low Slope Waterproofing Base Coat: Apply waterproofing base coat to sills, parapets,
and projections of low slopes between 2 in 12 and 6 in 12, in lieu of regular base coat
materials, trowel apply per manufacturer's instructions. In no case will slopes less than 2
in 12 be allowed.
D.
E. Finish:
1.
2. Maintain a wet edge.
3.
4.
5.
6. 7.
8.
9.
Apply finish continuously and in one operation to the entire wall surface.
The finish shall not be allowed to set up in a distinct area.
Employ sufficient manpower, scaffolding and equipment to ensure a continuous
operation and a uniform appearance.
Work shall proceed toward the joints and corners.
Use clean plastic float for floating.
A small amount of clean, potable water may be used to adjust the workability of
the finish. Maximum 8 ounces per pail.
Until dry, protect the finish from airborne contamination due to dust and soot, and
from weather and other damage.
Finish Texture: Textures and finishes as scheduled on Drawings.
F. DEFS: Where indicated without insulation, apply base coat, mesh and finish coating
components directly over gypsum sheathing or CMU.
G. Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
System materials shall be fully cured prior to sealant installation.
Color of sealant shall be as selected. Joint design and surface preparation shall be based on sealant manufacturer's
recommendations and project conditions.
Follow additional requirements contained in ElFS manufacturer's detailed sealant specification.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07240-6 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specsm/ Exterior Insulation and Finish System
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: During construction the work shall be inspected on a regular basis by the ElFS manufacturer or authorized representative.
3.04 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1.2005 07240-7 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/ Exterior Insulation and Finish System
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC
Phmlx. LaS V-S
SECTION 07260
WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, technical data and installation instructions.
Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification that products furnished meet specification
requirements.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide weather resistive barriers that are manufactured in
accordance with Uniform Building Code Standard 14-1 or unperforated asphalt saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D226, or ICC approved alternative acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction as a weather resistive barrier.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact.
B. Storage: Store off ground to assure adequate ventilation, and protect against damage
while stored at the site.
C.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
Perform Work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by the Manufacturer of the materials and products used.
Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation Work is complete, dry and in condition to receive weather resistive barrier. B.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIERS
A. Polyolefin Sheet Weather-Resistive Barrier:
1. Weather resistive barrier composed of either cross-laminated polyolefin films,
woven polyolefin strands, or spunbonded polyolefin fibers, coated or uncoated,
with or without perforations to transmit water vapor but not liquid water complying
with UBC Standard 14-1 or ICC approved alternative:
a. Thickness: 3 mils minimum. b. Water Vapor Transmission: 10 perms minimum as tested per ASTM E96, Procedure A.
C. Flame Spread: Maximum of 25 per ASTM EM.
d. Minimum Allowable Exposure: 3 months.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07260-1 Caritbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Weather Resistive Barriers
2. Furnish one of the following products, except as approved by the Architect,
subject to compliance with specification requirements:
a.
b.
Tuff Wrap as manufactured by Celotex w.usa.com
Tyvek CommercialWrap as manufactured by Dupont
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners:
1. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, hot dipped zinc coated steel, minimum
13/64 inch head diameter, or with plastic washer heads, and 0.080 inch shank
diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate into wall studs.
Staples: Standard wide face staples, hot dipped zinc coated steel, minimum 1
inch crown, of sufficient length to penetrate into wall studs.
Screws: Steel drill screws with washers complying with ASTM C1002, Type S,
hot dipped zinc coated steel, of sufficient length to penetrate steel framing.
2.
3.
B. Sealing Tape:
polyolefin film coated with a permanent acrylic adhesive.
Joint Sealer: Polyurethane or latex based joint sealer acceptable or recommended by
sheet manufacturer and complying with Section 07900.
Adhesive: Polyurethane or latex based adhesive acceptable to sheet manufacturer.
Manufacturers standard pressure sensitive seam sealing of tape of
C.
D.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
EXAM I NATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be
concealed by this Work.
C. Verify base, sill and other flashing materials are in place prior to installation of weather
resistive barrier.
WEATHER- RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Polyolefin Sheet Weather-Resistive Barrier:
1. Apply material horizontally starting at outside corner with bottom aligned with
foundation or bottom termination and plumb. Leave 6 to 12 inches of material at corner for overlap. Align stud marks on rolls with framing members of exterior
wall.
Use material as required to span floor to floor height and lap upper layer over
lower layer 6 inches minimum. Lap vertical joints 6 inches minimum.
Secure sheet to foundation with continuous bead of joint sealer. Wrap sheet 6 inches minimum around all comers lapped over adjacent sheet and taped.
Extend sheet directly over window and door openings, cut and wrap material into
opening, or trim material at openings and seal with tape as recommended by
manufacturer.
2.
3. 4.
5.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07260-2 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTMNVeather Resistive Barriers
SAX SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
6. Fasten at 12 to 18 inches on center spacing at each vertical stud using the
following fasteners:
a. Fasten to sheathed wood frame construction with staples, large head
nails, or plastic washer nails.
b. Fasten to metal frame construction with steel drill screws with washers.
C. Attach to masonry surfaces with adhesive.
Lap upstanding flashing with 4 inch minimum overlap and secure with adhesive.
Tape all seams, window and door penetrations, corners, and torn or damaged
areas as recommended by sheet manufacturer.
Completed installation shall be free of holes or breaks.
7.
8.
9.
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove excess materials, equipment
and debris and dispose of away from premises.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07260-3
Carlibad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs Meather Resistive Barriers
SAX souvmesl. LLC Phoenix. LaS V-S
SECTION 07500
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Built-up mineral-surfaced asphalt roofing as shown on Drawings and as
specified.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Roofing system shall be UL Class A and shall conform to UBC requirements.
B. 3-ply - Nailable Deck: One ply of base sheet with one ply Type VI ply sheets and mineral
cap sheet, as available from manufacturer
1. GAF Materials Corporation: Not available.
2. GS Roofing Products, Inc.: Specification A-6-M-3 with Flintglas Premium Ply
Sheet, Class B over combustible and non-combustible decks with maximum
slope of 6" per foot.
Johns-Manville: Specification 3GNC with GlasPly Premier Ply Sheet, Class A
over combustible decks with maximum slope of 1" per foot, Class A non-
combustible decks with maximum slope of 1-1/2" per foot, and Class B non-
combustible decks with maximum slope of 3" per foot (verify with manufacturer).
4. Consolidated Fiber Glass Products Co., Inc. (Conglas Roofing Systems Division):
Specification ND-16A-CAP, UL Class A with maximum slope of 2" per foot.
5. Thermo Manufacturing: Specification "TRI-PLY' N-3-B1 P-M with Eagle Ultra
Glass Type VI plysheet, Class A with maximum slope of 2" per foot.
3.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's material specifications and installation instructions,
and evidence of UL and FM ratings for roofing system.
B. Certificates: Submit certification from manufacturer indicating approval of the applicator and submit certifications from both manufacturer and applicator that the substrate and the
details are proper and adequate for materials being furnished.
C. Maintenance: Submit 2 copies of roofing manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified, with
minimum 5 years documented experience.
2. Applicator: Roofing applicator with 2 years experience in work of similar scope
and nature to that specified and approved by manufacturer of roofing material.
FM Listing: Provide labeled Class I roofing system which has been tested and listed by
Factory Mutual for application indicated. Provide a minimum 1-90 system. 6.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191 -3 March 1,2005 07500-1
Carls9td Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Built-up Asphalt Roofing
C. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Convene a pre-installation conference to review roofing specifications and
procedures with the Architect, Contractor, roofing installer, sheet metal installer,
roofing manufacturer's representative, Owner and other trades relevant to the
work, prior to ordering materials.
Notify Architect at least 48 hours prior to starting Work.
Contractor shall review materials, details, etc. and submit a report including
revised details to Architect. Incorporate revised details approved by Architect in
the Project at no additional cost to Owner.
2.
3.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1.
2.
3.
Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with
labels intact.
Deliver so that stocks of materials on the site will permit uninterrupted progress of
the Work.
Asphalt: Each container, or bulk shipping ticket shall indicate the equiviscous
temperature (EVT), the finished blowing temperature (FBT), and the flash point
(W-
B. Storage:
1.
2.
Fully protect against wetness or damage while temporarily stored.
Materials stockpiled or located on roof areas shall be safely stored away from
roof edges and properly secured to prevent wind damagehlowoff. The materials
shall be distributed in such a manner that they will not overload the structure at
any location, beyond its capacity.
C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
I .06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1.
2.
Roofing shall not be applied during precipitation and shall not be started when there is a probability of precipitation during application.
At ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F. and below, including wind chill,
precautions must be taken to insure that asphalt maintains the minimum
acceptable temperature at the point of roofing application as recommended by
the roofing manufacturer.
B. Protection: Protection against staining and mechanical damage shall be provided for
adjacent surfaces during application of roofing.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Furnish written full value warranty (materials and installation by both
manufacturer and roofing subcontractorlinstaller) for a period of 10 years from substantial
completion of the Work, which covers repairs necessary to maintain roofing Work in a
watertight condition during the warranty period. Warranty to cover workmanship,
materials and repair or replacement of same, at no cost to Owner.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 07500-2 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Built-Up Asphalt Roofing
SASC somwast LLC
PtMlllk.LasVO9ES
PART 2 PRODUCTS B 2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
MANUFACTURERS
A. Roofing: Furnish products of one of the following manufacturers, except as approved by
the Architect, subject to compliance with specifications requirements:
1. GAF Materials Corporation, Wayne NJ-
2. GS Roofing Products Company, Inc., Wilmington, CA 3. Johns-Manville, Denver, CO.
4. Consolidated Fiber Glass Products Co., (Conglas Roofing Systems Division),
Bakersfield, CA.
5. Thermo Manufacturing, Chandler, AZ
6. Materials designated for a specific application shall be the products of one manufacturer.
SHEET MATERIALS
A. Standard Fiberglass Base Sheet: ASTM D4601, Type II; UL Type G2 BUR.
6. Ply Sheet: ASTM D2178, Type IV.
C. Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet: ASTM D3909 with white granule surface.
D. Flashing Sheet:
1. Modified bitumen for torch or hot mop application with non-woven polyester mat
or fiberglass scrim/mat bonded together. 2. Thickness:
a.
b.
Acceptable products - torch applied:
a. GAF Rubberoid Torch FR.
b. GS Flintlastic GTA.
C. Thermo TP4G FR
Acceptable products - hot mop application:
a. GAF Rubberoid Mop FR.
b. GS Flintlastic GMS.
C. Manville DynaFlex
d. Conglas Conform
e. Thermo 308G FR
Torch applied: 0.197 inch minimum thickness.
Hot mop application: 0.160 inch minimum thickness.
3.
4.
BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.
B. Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type IV.
C. Plastic Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II, asbestos-free.
ACCESSORIES
A. Cant Strips: Rigid core fiberboard, ASTM C726, or perlite, ASTM C728.
B. Tapered Roof Insulation: Expanded perlite, ASTM C728. Provide preformed crickets and tapered edge strips fabricated to slopes indicated or as required for sloping to drain.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07500-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Built-Up Asphalt Roofing
C. Traffic Walkways: Asphalt impregnated fiberboard as manufactured by APOC or W.R.
Meadows.
D. Plywood: In accordance with Section 06100.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1.
2.
3.
Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing
to Architect.
Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.
Verify, before proceeding with this Work, that required inspections of existing
conditions have been completed.
.
B. Roof Deck:
1.
2.
3.
Roof deck shall be smooth, dry, clean and free of sharp projections and
depressions.
Roof decks shall be installed to provide drainage of water freely over and out
drainage fittings such as scuppers, drains, etc.
Drainage fittings shall not be set exceedingly high so as to dam or restrict water passage.
C. Coordination:
1.
2.
Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by
this Work.
Roof accessories shall be available before Roofing Contractor begins work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deck: Prepare in accordance with manufacturer's printed specifications, except as
otherwise specified, and as follows.
1. Make subsurfaces free from material projections, dust, loose and foreign
materials presenting a smooth plane, ready for installation.
2. Surface must be dry before commencement of roofing application.
3. Deck shall be swept clean and kept free of loose and foreign materials other than tools and equipment of the roofer.
4. Plywood and Wood Decks:
a.
b.
Plywood and wood surfaces shall be smooth, free of protruding nails,
depressions, or raised edges.
Seal joints and cover knot holes of wood deck.
B. Protect roofing materials and take precautions to prevent damage from other trades
during and after roofing. Repair torn or punctured materials before roofing over. Use
runways over materials in place.
C. Provide and install cant strips at the intersection of roofs and vertical surfaces and
tapered edge strips at plywood crickets and valleys.
Where tapered insulation crickets are indicated, install one ply of standard base sheet
with 2 inch sidelaps and 4 inch end laps; nail base sheet 9 inches on center on sidelaps
and 12 inches on center on two rows 12 inches in from each edge; embed tapered roof insulation into a solid mopping of hot steep asphalt, using 30 pounds per 100 sq. ft. of
deck.
D.
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191 -3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 07500-4 C-Specs /Built-up Asphalt Roofing
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 0 A. Amhalt:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Asphalt temperature point of application shall be EVT plus 25 degrees F.
Do not heat to a temperature higher than FBT.
Equipment used for heating asphalt shall be equipped with accurate and clearly
visible thermometers.
Cutting or alteration of bitumens will not be permitted.
B. Outlets:
1. Set drain outlets below roof deck surface to permit free flow of water and to
prevent forming water dams at rims.
2. Install lead or copper flashing at all drains in accordance with NRCA details.
3. Seal roofing around drains and fill metal base of ring-type drains with flashing
compound.
4. After roofing is applied, install ring and tighten while bitumen is soft.
5. See also Division 15.
C. Sheet Metal Work (Metal drip edges, flashings, jacks, pipe and conduit flashing and other
flanged accessories as indicated on Drawings):
1. Prime metal flashing in contact with roofing with asphalt primer, allowed to dry
before roofing materials are applied.
2. Set in full troweling of plastic asphalt cement and nail flanges at 3 inches on
center.
3. Provide 2-ply flashing of flanges consisting of:
a. First layer 9 inch wide base felt set in full troweling of cement followed by;
b. Second layer 12 inch wide set in full troweling of cement.
Flange to be set over cap sheet, except flange of metal edging shall be below cap
sheet. Form a cant of plastic cement around base and seal top at jacks, etc.
4.
5.
6. See also Section 07600.
D. Cylindrical Penetrations:
1.
2.
Seal with metal cap of similar material with clamping ring. Cap shall act as counterflashing over base flashing over BUR over 2x treated
wood curbing and 4 inch cant, as described elsewhere.
E. Non-Cylindrical Penetrations:
1.
2.
Provide bitumen traps with vertical flanges 8 inches high and horizontal flange
minimum 6 inches wide.
"Strip in" 2-ply flashing of flanges consisting of:
a. First layer 9 inch wide base felt set in full troweling of cement followed by;
b. Second layer 12 inch wide set in full troweling of cement.
Fill traps with flashing cement providing a surface tapered away from the
projection to the top of trap and provide positive water runoff.
Install a sheet metal "umbrella" around the projection, wider than the trap, and
sealed sloped to shed water around the projection, sloped to shed water beyond
the entire trap surface. This method shall be superseded if another method is detailed on the Drawings.
3.
4.
5.
F. Cant Strip:
1.
2.
In angles of roof deck and at vertical walls or curbs, furnish and install a 4 inch
minimum cant strip.
Prime the walls with asphalt primer and when dry, embed the strips in solid mopped asphalt.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 07500-5 C-SpecsTM/Built-Up Asphalt Roofing
3.
4.
Fit flush at ends and to wall surface.
Where scuppers occur, apply cant strip 2 inches back from flange and bevel cant
8 inches from end.
G. Parapet Walls:
1.
2.
3.
From roof deck to a line 16 inches maximum above roof deck, install one layer of
1/2 inch treated plywood mechanically fastened to wall.
Reglet shall be installed in masonry course immediately above plywood nailer in
accordance with applicable section of masonry specifications.
Coat the inside and top of masonry and concrete walls evenly with Asphalt
Emulsion applied with spray or soft-fibered brush, using 3 gallons per 100 sq. ft.
H. Valleys:
1.
2.
3. Spot mop to deck.
4.
Reinforce valleys with a 36 inch wide extra layer of standard base sheet and
extend 12 inches up incline.
Apply in direction of slope of valley, lap 4 inches on ends.
Valleys formed by crickets are to be constructed in this manner.
3.04 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
General: Application shall be in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's
instructions and the following requirements.
Outlets:
1.
2.
3.
Set standard base sheet at drains in flashing compound 9 inches wide around
ring and flange.
Install minimum 30 inch square, 4 pound lead or 16 ounce soft copper flashing
set in flashing compound over the completed membrane.
Flashing shall be stripped in with two collars of standard base sheet extending 4
inches and 6 inches beyond outside edge of flashing set in asphalt, and while hot,
install clamp ring and tighten.
Valleys :
1.
2.
3.
Vent Pipes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Flashing Pans: (Flashing pans are not suitable for hot pipe projections.) 1. Where column stubs, sign anchors, railing posts, tank support or other
projections extend through the roof surface, install a minimum of 4 inches level
height flashing collar with 6 inch flange.
2. Opening between projection and deck shall be closed to prevent drippage.
3. Install flange on top layer of fabric set in asphalt.
Reinforce valleys with an additional ply of standard base sheet 36 inches wide,
extending 12 inches up inclines.
Apply in direction of slope of valley, lapping 4 inches on ends.
Solid mop to base ply.
Where projections extend through the roof surface, install flashing with a 4 inch
continuous flange. At plumbing vent stacks install 4-pound lead jack.
Set flange in flashing compound on base ply. (For nailable surfaces, flange must
also be nailed 3 inches on center 314 inch from perimeter.)
Seal flange with a 6 inch wide strip of glass fabric, set in asphalt.
Follow with a collar of base ply to fit around vents and overlap flanges 6 inches on
all sides, applied in asphalt.
After membrane is applied, form a cant of flashing compound around the base.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1.2005 07500-6 C-Specsm/Built-Up Asphalt Roofing
SAX southwesl. LLC phoenix ' Las vegas
4.
5.
Cut two collars of standard base sheet to fit snugly around collar with flashing
compound.
Cant the flashing compound around projection above the level of outside rim.
F. Roofing - General:
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Cut plies in lengths not to exceed 18 feet and allow to flatten.
Longer lengths may be used when rolled or machined and broomed into place.
Plies of roofing shall be broomed thoroughly into place into the hot bitumen full
width of felt.
Use a clean broom; no rollers or squeegees are permissible.
Side and end laps of each ply shall be staggered and offset from preceding plies.
Fishmouths, wrinkles, tears, buckles, or other damage in ply of felt shall be cut
out and repaired by installation of an additional layer of felt, set into hot bitumen.
Mop full width under each felt layer; no dry laps will be allowed.
Roofing System shall be installed in a continuous application.
a. Plies of roofing must be laid single-fashion starting at low points and
drains and working up slopes to high points of roof.
b. No "phased" application of roofing will be allowed.
Roofing felts shall be applied by the strapping method, on slopes exceeding 2
inches per foot, and back nailed as required by the manufacturer.
See Factory Mutual Wind Uplift Requirements for specific attachment methods.
9.
10.
G. Roofing over Wood Deck:
1. Apply standard base ply and fasten side laps at 9 inches on center and fasten 18
inches on center staggered in two rows 12 inches from each edge with approved
fasteners. (See Factory Mutual Wind Uplift Requirements for specific fastener
attachment.)
Solid mop top surface of base ply with asphalt and embed of ply sheet(s), shingle
method, lapping as per manufacturer's printed instructions, mopping between plies.
Solid mop ply sheets with asphalt, and while hot, embed one ply of mineral
surfaced cap sheet with 2 inch side laps. End laps shall be 4 inches and not less
than 3 feet apart, diagonally staggered.
Back mop side and end laps with asphalt.
2.
3.
4.
H. Base Flashings:
1. Over completed membrane at vertical surfaces, install base flashings consisting
of one ply of Flashing Sheet, torch applied or set in asphalt or flashing compound,
installed per manufacturer's standard materials and procedures for different
flashing conditions.
Nail top edge 9 inches on center through tin discs.
Apply a three-course flashing system to concrete or masonry walls.
Secure the Base Flashings as follows:
a.
2.
3.
4.
At wood surfaces, nailers, etc. nail the top edge of the cap sheet 6 inches
on center. Use regular roofing nails long enough to properly penetrate
the wood.
At masonry/concrete surfaces, nail the top of the cap sheet 6 inches on
center using case hardened concrete nails with tin discs or equal type
fastener.
Centered over the top edge of base flashings, on walls equipped with
sheet metal counterflashings, apply a continuous 3-course seal using
alternate layers of plastic cement and fiberglass webbing. Centered over the top edge of base flashings on walls not equipped with
sheet metal counterflashing, apply a continuous 5-course seal using
alternate layers of plastic cement and fiberglass webbing, or base flashing seal required by roofing manufacturer.
b.
C.
d.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 07500-7 C-Specs /Built-up Asphalt Roofing
3.05
3.06
3.07
1. Apply Traffic Walkway roof protection material over the Cap Sheet surface where
indicated. Apply using plastic roof cement. Cut panels from roll in lengths not exceeding
6 feet, and invert and apply in the inverted position. Install material with open joints to
allow free drainage.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: The completed installation shall be inspected by a
representative of the manufacturer in the presence of the Architect and the Owner's
representative. Pre-installation and progress inspections shall be made at intervals
deemed necessary by roofing manufacturer.
PROTECTION
A. At the end of each day's Work, the Work performed during that day shall be sealed at the
edges and well covered to prevent moisture getting under the materials.
CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials,
equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean
condition.
B. Clean bitumen spills or stains. Repair damage to existing structure or grounds to Owner's
satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 07500-8 CarlsQd Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs /Built-Up Asphalt Roofing
SASC soumwesl LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Flashings, sheet metal work and related items concealed from view in
the finished work including, but not limited to:
1. Counterflashing at vertical surfaces.
2. Flashing at roof penetrations.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07622 - Copper Flashing and Trim for flashing used at locations where
exposed to view in the finished work.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings indicating type of material, gage, dimensions, profiles, locations where used, fastening and anchoring methods, joints, and provisions of
expansion and contraction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1.
2.
Comply with design and installation methods of SMACNA Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual.
Comply with The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual installation details.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping:
packaging with labels intact. Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened
B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
B.
Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653, 24 gage minimum and as indicated, with G-60 coating.
Solder: ASTM B32, 50/50 type.
C. Flux: FS 0-F-506.
D.
E. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.
Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
D.F. Architects 96123EASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07600-1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Flashing and Sheet Metal
2.02
F. Sheet Metal Fasteners:
fasteners.
Galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed
G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586.
H. Reglets and Counterfiashings: Fry Reglet Corporation, Type ST at stucco, Type MA at
masonry, Type CO (galvanized steel) at concrete, or fabricated as indicated on Drawings.
I.
J.
Roofing Felt: ASTM D226,15 pound type or 30 pound type.
Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC paint - 12, dry film 15 mils per coat.
K. Polyethylene: Black, 6 mil.
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate sheet metal with lines, arris, and angles sharp and true, and plane surfaces free
from objectionable wave, warp or buckle. Hem exposed edges to form a 1/2 inch wide
hem on the side concealed from view.
B. Forming, anchoring, expansion and contraction details, shall conform to referenced
quality standards.
C. Provide for thermal expansion of running trim, flashing, expansion joints, and other items
exposed for more than 15 feet continuous length.
D. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet.
E. Form pieces in longest practical lengths, except form flashing and facias in 8 to 10 foot
units.
F. Fabricate coping covers with float seams.
G. Solder and seal metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints
clean.
H. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs, with mitered corners;
solder for rigidity, seal with sealant.
1. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges.
J. Where prefabricated counterflashing and reglet system is used, form upper edge of
counterflashing with an approved snap lock flange to engage reglet receiver and to
provide a spring action at bottom edge against built-up flashing.
Flashing Pans: Form sheet metal pans 6 inch nominal square size, with 3 inch upstand,
and 4 inch flanges. Fill pans watertight with plastic cement.
K.
2.03 FINISH
A. Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces.
B. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mil.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 07600-2 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Flashing and Sheet Metal
PART 3 EXECUTION 0 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
1. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are
solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
2. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and
secure.
6. Coordination:
concealed by this Work.
Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Installation shall conform to NRCA and SMACNA manuals.
Expansion Seams: Maintain a watertight installation at expansion seams. Locate
expansion seams as shown or if not shown, at the following maximum spacing for each
general flashing use:
1. Flashing, expansion joints, gravel stops, and trim: At 10 foot intervals, 24 inches
on each side of corners and intersections.
2. Sealant-type expansion joints: Where sealant-filled expansion joints are used,
embed the hooked flanges of the joint members not less than ? inch into the sealant. Form joints to completely conceal the sealant. When ambient
temperature is moderate at the time of installation (40 to 70 degrees F.), set joint
members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant type joints at
temperatures below 40 degrees F. Installation of sealant is specified in Section
07900.
Where dissimilar materials abut, provide proper separation or protection to minimize the
possibility of galvanic action.
Soldering:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Except where other methods of joining are indicated or specified, solder joints
and connections of Sheet Metal Work.
Remove grease and dirt from metal surfaces to be joined. Remove flux residue by scrubbing, neutralizing with ammonia or a 5 to 10 percent
solution of washing soda, followed by a clear water rinse.
Assemble parts and solder using regular non-corrosive resin flux. Heat metal
thoroughly to completely sweat solder through full contact area.
Reglets: Install reglets in masonry, concrete or stucco to receive flashings.
Counterflashing:
1.
2.
Provide metal counterflashing at top edges of built-up base flashings and at other
locations indicated.
Lap end joints a minimum of 3 inches. Do not solder or weld joints. Make flashing continuous at angles. Counterflashing shall overlap base flashing a minimum of 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
Where counterflashing terminates in reglets, fasten flashing with lead wedges
every 12 inches. Fill reglets continuously with synthetic rubber type sealant. 3.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 07600-3 C-Specsm/Flashing and Sheet Metal
SASC Southwest LLC
Phoenix. Las Vm
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3
March 1,2005 07600-4
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Flashing and Sheet Metal
SECTION 07615
SHEET METAL ROOFING (Copper)
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Compiy with the following:
I.
2.
3.
Air Infiltration: No measurable air leakage per ASTM E283.
Water Infiltration: No measurable water penetration per ASTM E331.
Wind Uplift: UL997, Class 90.
1.02 SUBMllTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, design data and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details.
C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of roof panel with specified finish.
D. Test Reports: Submit reports showing compliance with performance requirements.
E. Engineering Calculations: Submit calculations, sealed by a Registered Structural
Engineer, verifying wind uplift performance of roofing.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE m - A. Qualifications:
documented experience.
Manufacturer specializing in specified product with minimum 5 years
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1.
2.
SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
AIS1 Specification for Design of Coldformed Steel Structural Members.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact.
B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Furnish 10 year warranty against cracking, peeling and fade for finish.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
07615-1 C-Specsm/Sheet Metal Roofing(Copper)
SASC southwst, LLC
Phoenix . Las Vegas
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
SHEET MATERIALS
A. Metal: 16 02. per square foot 110 cold rolled temper copper.
B. Finish: DKS Copper Patina System, Dark Burl Copper, DKS 1101, Contact: Steve Clark
(480) 710-7147.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Stainless steel with washers where required. Length sufficient to penetrate
insulation and steel decking.
B. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
C. Felt Underlayment: 90 pound felt for single layer application.
FABRICATION
A. Exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the roof panels.
B. Flashings: Hem exposed edges on underside 112 inch.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
A. Standing Seam Tee-Panel:
1.
2.
3.
Panels shall have 12-314 inches on-center seam spacing with a seam height of 1
inch.
Panels shall be roll-formed in continuous lengths from eave to ridge.
Snap-on seams shall be 1 inch in height and shall contain a factory-applied
Extruded Vinyl Weather Seal Insert to prevent siphoning of moisture through
sidelap seam.
4. Certification shall be submitted based on independent testing laboratory, indicating no measurable water penetration or air leakage through the system
when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 and E331.
5. Concealed anchor clips to be spaced as required to meet uplift loads (maximum
of 24 inches on center.
6. When required, panel assembly to bear UL Label UL90, pursuant to Construction
No. 296.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
1. Examine deck to ensure proper attachment to framing. 2. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves
or projections, properly sloped to valleys and eaves.
3. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly
set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
4. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Flutes in steel deck to be clean and
dry-
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 076 1 5-2 C-Specsm/Sheet Metal Roofing(Copper)
6. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be
concealed by this Work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install unperforated asphalt saturated roofing felt underlapent in single layer, weather
lapped head 6 inches, ends 18 inches over solid sheathing and fastened in place. Install
felt horizontally, starting at eave to ridge with a 6 inch minimum overlap.
Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to SMACNA Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual to achieve a watertight installation.
6.
C. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines
are plumb.
Install starter and edge trim before installing roof panels. D.
E. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation of roof panels.
F. Attach panels using manufacturer's standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance
with approved shop drawings.
G. Install sealants for preformed roofing panels as approved on shop drawings.
H. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials.
I. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk boards.
J. Protect installed roof panels and trim from damage caused by adjacent construction until
completion of installation.
K. Remove and replace panels or components which are damaged beyond successful
repair.
3.03 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
B. Clean grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
0761 53 C-Specsm/Sheet Metal Roofing(Copper)
SECTION 07622
COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .Ol
1.02
1.03
1.04
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Exposed to view flashings, sheet metal work and related items not
included as work of Section 0761 5 as follows:
1. Countemashing at vertical surfaces.
2. Coping. 3. Edge flashing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07600 - Sheet metal Flashing for galvanized sheet metal flashing for
areas not exposed to view in the finished work.
SUBMllTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings indicating type of material, gage, dimensions, profiles,
locations where used, fastening and anchoring methods, joints, and provisions of
expansion and contraction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1.
2.
Comply with design and installation methods of SMACNA Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual.
Comply with The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual installation details.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact.
B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Copper: ASTM B 370; temper HOO (cold-rolled) except where temper 060 is required for forming; 20 oz./sq. ft., except provide 24 oz./sq. ft. at top facing horizontal surfaces.
Cleats: 16 ounce cold rolled copper.
Solder: Provide 50 - 50 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32), with rosin flux.
Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
B.
C.
D.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 07622-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs TM/Copper Flashing and Trim
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.
J.
K.
L.
Fasteners: Same metal as flashingkheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being
fastened.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of
sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, non-drying, nonmigrating
sealant.
Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound,
recommended by metal manufacturer for exteriodinterior nonmoving joints including
riveted joints.
Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-
resistant seaming and adhesive application of and compatibility with flashing sheet.
Paper Slip Sheet: 4 to 6-lb. rosin-sized building paper.
Roofing felt: asphalt or coal tar saturated felt weighing not less than 30 Ibs per 100 square
feet.
Metal Accessories: Provide clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
as required for installation of work, noncorrosive, size and gauge required for
performance
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with
details shown and with applicable requirements of Copper Development Association
(CDA) "Copper in Architecture Handbook" and other recognized industry practices.
Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance, with expansion provisions
for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of
the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions
and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed copper work without
excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form
seams, and solder. Rivet joints for additional strength where required.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work
cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterheatherproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints).
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated or required for
proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric
sealant, in compliance with CDA standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive
substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating
or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1, 2005 07622-2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specs T'/Copper Flashing and Trim
2.03 FINISH
A. Copper: Matching finish specified for copper roofing in Section 0761 5. 0
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Coordination:
concealed by this Work. Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be
INSTALLATION
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation
instructions and recommendations and with CDA "Copper in Architecture Handbook".
Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal
expansion of units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level
as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight
and weatherproof. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds,
and sealant.
B. Underlayment: Where installation is to be directly on cementitious substrates, install a
slip sheet of red rosin paper on a course of asphalt saturated felt.
C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for
waterproof performance.
CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07622-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs TM/Copper Flashing and Trim
SASC southwest. LLC
phoenix. Lar vegls
SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
' PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Roof accessory assemblies as shown on Drawings and as specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, design data and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details.
I .03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact.
B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field
measurements; proper fit and attachment of parts is required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the
Architect, subject to compliance with Specifications requirements:
1. Bilco Co.
2. Babcock-Davis Hatchways Inc.
3. Pate Co.
4. Milcor, Inc.
5. O'Keeffe's Inc.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Roof Hatch: Bilco Type S-20, or as approved. Galvanized steel, 14 gage cover and curb, 22 gage cover liner. 1 inch thick rigid insulation in curb and cover 12 inch high curb.
1.
2. 3.
Provide heavy duty padlock hasp.
Provide vandal resistant features as available.
Finish: Powder coat; standard color as selected.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07720-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Roof Accessories
B. Curbs: Pate Style pc-lb, or as approved, box section design, heavy gage galvanized
steel construction, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate,
factory installed wood nailer, and insulated with 1-1/2 inch thick rigid fiberglass board
insulation.
C. Equipment Supports: Pate Style es-I monolithic construction, heavy gage galvanized
steel, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, factory installed
2 x 4 wood nailer, and heavy gage galvanized steel counterflashing.
Pipe Curb Assemblies: Pate Style pca-1 , with curb constructed of heavy gage galvanized
steel with continuous welded corner seams, factory installed wood nailer insulated with
1-1/2 inch thick rigid fiberglass board insulation, cover of acrylic clad ABS thermoplastic,
including graduated step PVC, boots, adjustable stainless steel clamps and cap fastening
screws. Each assembly shall include curb, cap, boots and clamps. See Drawings for
size and quantity of pipe penetrations.
D.
E. Ladder extension (Provide at each roof hatch): Bilco Model 1 LadderUP safety post.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Coordination:
concealed by this Work. Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be
INSTALLATION
A. Install roof specialties at locations shown or required in accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions and as detailed on Drawings.
B. Install roof hatches, equipment supports and bases, curbs and curb assemblies, at locations indicated, fastening securely to deck through curb flange.
CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3 March 1,2005 07720-2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Roof Accessories
SAX Swlhwest. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Firestopping as shown on Drawings and as specified.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide UL Classified or Warnock Hersey Listed firestopping system to prevent the
spread of fire, smoke and gasses through penetrations in fire resistive walls, floors and partitions, including; but not limited to; the following areas:
1. Unprotected openings and openings accommodating penetrating items such as
cables, cable trays, pipes, ducts, boxes and conduits through fire rated floors,
walls and smoke barriers.
2. Head of wall openings between wall and connecting floor or roof deck
assemblies.
a. Meet requirements for exposure to hose stream test.
b. Applicable for use with steel fluted deck floor assemblies.
b. Allow deflection of floor or roof above.
B. Firestop systems shall not be intended to support live loads and traffic unless specifically
approved by Testing Agency.
C. Firestop systems shall be approved by Code Authority.
D. Firestop products shall remain flexible where subject to movement without affecting the
integrity of the product.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, performance criteria, Drawings and
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit Manufacturer's complete Shop Drawings showing proposed material,
reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings method of installation and UL or Warnock
Hersey listing number.
C. Test Reports: Submit UL or Warnock Hersey test report description for firestopping
system.
D. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of firestop systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Applicator with minimum of 5 years experience and approved by the
materials manufacturer.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1, 2005 07840-1 Carlsbad Golf Coyje Clubhouse C-Specs /Firestopping
SASC SWvmeJl LLC
Phoenix. Las Vas
B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and
surface burning characteristics:
1.
2. 3. Listing:
ASTM E 136, ASTM E 119 and ASTM E 814, as applicable.
UL 1479 fire test to achieve required fire-rating as noted on Drawings.
a.
b. WH International Listings
UL Fire Resistance Directory (current edition).
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact. '
Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. 6.
C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish firestop systems acceptable to governing Code Authority from one of the following
Manufacturers, subject to compliance with Specification requirements:
1. U.S. Gypsum Co.
2. Johns-Manville
3. Tremco, Inc.
4. Rectorseal Corporation
5. 3M Fire Protection Products
6. Specified Technologies, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Firestop System Materials - General:
1. Appropriate for penetration.
2. Include every component required for code approved installation, including; but
not limited to:
a. Firestopping putties or compound.
b. Backing material.
C. Wrap strips.
d. Primers, clips and collars.
e. Forming and damming materials.
f. Sealant and solvent cleaner.
B. Properties:
1.
2.
Free of asbestos, halogens and volatile components after curing and shall not
slump or sag, (except for self-leveling products).
Capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flames, heat and smoke in
compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479 and U.B.C. Standard
7-5.
Non-combustible per ASTM E 136.
UV resistant where exposed to sunlight.
Water resistant where exposed to moisture.
Firestop system shall accommodate movement without adversely affecting fire
rating of wall/floor assembly.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07840-2 Carlsbad Golf Coyae Clubhouse C-Specs /Firestopping
7. Shrink resistant.
8. Paintable or capable of receiving finish materials in those areas which are
exposed to view and which are scheduled to receive finishes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be
concealed by this Work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which
may affect bond of firestopping material.
6. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond.
C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage, if required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall conform to requirements of qualified designs or manufacturer approved
modifications as supported by engineering reports, and shall be approved and accepted
by the authority having jurisdiction.
1. Apply primer and firestop materials in accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions and in accordance with the appropriate UL Fire Resistance Directory
or with the appropriate Warnock Hersey International Listing.
Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating, to ensure
against the passage of flames, smoke and toxic gases, and to a uniform density
and texture.
Protect materials from damage on surface subjected to traffic and install cover
plates as required on firestop system that will or may be subject to traffic.
Tool surfaces of firestop products to provide a smooth and clean appearance.
2.
3.
4.
6. Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and,
if indicated, whether such material is designated as insulation, safing or otherwise.
Insulation types specified in other sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping materials.
C. Interior Walls and Partitions:
Construction joints between top of fire rated walls and underside of floors above
shall be firestopped.
Firestop systems installed shall have been tested by either UL or Warnock
Hersey, including exposure to hose stream test and including test for use with
steel fluted deck floor assemblies.
Firestop system used shall allow for deflection of floor or roof above.
1.
2.
3.
D.F. Architects 96123iSASC 05-191 -3 March 1,2005 07840-3 Carlsbad Golf Cowe Clubhouse C-Specs /Firestopping
SASC southwest. LLC phanix.Lasve.Qas
D. Penetrations:
1.
2.
Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, pipe, duct or other elements which pass
through one or both outer surfaces of a fire rated floor, wall, or partition.
Provide firestopping to fill spaces in accordance with ASTM E 814 (UL 1479)
where a penetration occurs through a structural floor or roof and a space would
otherwise remain open between the surfaces of the penetration and the edge of
the adjoining structural floor or roof, except at floors on grade.
Requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been
provided. Firestop the annular space between sleeve and surrounding surfaces.
3.
3.04 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. .
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07840-4 Carlsbad Golf CoyBe Clubhouse C-Specs /Firestopping
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Sealant and backing materials.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s current specifications and recommended installation
2.
3.
procedures.
Submit sample warranty to be signed jointly by applicator and manufacturer.
Submit manufacturer’s standard color chart.
B. Shop Drawings: Illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface of the
work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
C. Field Adhesion Test and Stain Reports: Submit copies of logs and test reports showing
results of field adhesion testing and stain testing.
D. Contract Closeout: Submit Manufacturer’s Warranty.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Installers shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary skills and shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements.
B. Field Adhesion Testing:
sealant and substrate as follows:
Perform preconstruction adhesion testing for each type of
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Notify Architect at least 7 days prior to date of adhesion testing.
Arrange for manufacturer’s field technical representative and Architect to be
present during testing. Install sealant in test joints in minimum 60 inch lengths.
Test joints by standard field adhesion hand pull test.
For joints with dissimilar substrates, test adhesion to each substrate separately
as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Conduct number of field adhesion tests for each type of sealant and each type of
substrate as follows:
a. Not less than 10 tests for the first 1,000 feet of installed sealant and 1
test for each additional 1,000 feet of sealant installed, or 1 test per floor
per elevation.
Document results of field adhesion tests and record results in field adhesion test log.
Include in log data on pull distance used to test each joint sealant.
Include data on joints where material connected with pull portion of sealant failed
to adhere to joint substrate or tore cohesively.
Inspect joints and record data for the following:
a. Complete fill.
b. No voids.
C. Joint dimensions matching those of manufacturer’s recommended details.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07900-1 Carlsbad Golf Coyrse Clubhouse C-Specs M/Joint Sealers
SASC souvmesf LLC
Phoenix ' Las vegas
C.
11. 12.
13,
For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
Do not install joint sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
Repair sealant test areas by removing damaged materials and applying sealant to
test area using same procedure used to originally install the sealant.
Stain Testing: Perform Stain testing of natural stone, masonry and other porous
substrates proposed for use in the Work. Obtain actual samples of materials proposed
for use and test to determine if permanent discoloration of porous surfaces will occur from
direct contact with sealants. Unless otherwise required by manufacturer of sealant,
perform stain tests as follows:
1. Notify Architect at commencement of stain testing procedure.
2. Arrange for manufacturer's field technical representative and Architect to be
present during examination of test results.
3. Cut substrate to provide flat surface for application of sealant.
4. Separate substrate materials by removable shims to create 1/2 x 112 x 3 inch
joint.
5. Fill joint with scheduled sealant , tool, and allow to cure for 21 days at room
temperature.
6. After 21 day curing, remove shims, compress joint to 50 percent of original joint
width to 114 inch, and place in an oven at 70 degrees Celsius for 14 days.
7. After 14 days in oven, remove and allow sample to cool to room temperature.
8. Examine sample to determine presence of discoloration or change in appearance
in any way to exposed surfaces.
9. After visual inspection, cut sample in half to determine presence of discoloration or change in appearance in any way into the sample itself at the adhesive bond
line and presence of bleeding into the area around the adhesive bond line.
Document results of stain tests and record results in stain test log.
Do not install sealants that show evidence of staining substrates.
10.
11.
D. Field Color and Workmanship Samples: Caulk a section of joint as directed, under job
conditions, at least 7 days prior to start of work for review by Architect. When approved,
sample shall be used as a standard of comparison for remainder of work.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact.
B. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Maintain product in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precautions to ensure fitness of material when installed.
C. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Observe manufacturer's temperature service range. Do not apply sealant when weather conditions will inhibit bonding and curing.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07900-2 Carlsbad Golf CoNse Clubhouse C-Specs /Joint Sealers
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty, in writing and signed jointly by the installer and sealant manufacturer, to
replace sealants which fail at no additional cost to the Owner because of loss of cohesion
or adhesion, or do not cure, and which fail to achieve air-tight and water-tight seal as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
Sealant Types "A" and "B": 5 years.
Sealant Types "C1 " and "C2": 20 years.
Sealant Types "D." "E" and "F": 2 years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of one of the following manufacturers subject to compliance with
specifications requirements:
1. Pecora www.pecora.com
2. Tremco Vulkem Paraseal www.tremcosealants.com
3. Dow Corning Corp. www.dowcornina.com
4. General Electric www.qe.com
5. Sika Corp. www.sika.com
6. Sonneborn / Chemrex w.chemrex.com
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials:
1.
2.
Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product
required.
If sealants from separate manufacturers must be used and could come in contact
with each other, provide written certification from every manufacturer, involved
that the sealants are compatible and will adhere to each other.
MATERIALS
A. General: Sealants, primers, back-up materials, preformed joint fillers, bond breakers and
related materials shall be compatible with adjoining materials.
B. Sealant:
1.
2.
General: The selection of proper sealant for a particular joint shall be in
accordance with current published recommendations of the manufacturer.
Types: See Schedule in Part 3 for the location where each type of sealant is to
be provided.
a. Type "A": 2-part or 3-part (self-leveling) urethane, conforming to ASTM
C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T; Pecora NR-200 Urexpan
Sealant or Dynatred, Tremco THC-900/901, Vulkem 45/245, Sikaflex 2c
SL (self-leveling) Dow Corning Parking Structure Sealant (FC, NS or SL
as applicable) and Sonneborn SL-2.
b. Type "B": 3-part chemically curing polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, 0, and
capable of withstanding movement of 50% in extension and
compression, and sustained temperatures of 250 degrees F in service.
Tremco Dymeric 240 FC Sealant, Pecora Dynatrol 11, Vulkem 922,
Sikaflex 2c NS (non-sag) and Sonneborn NP-2.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07900-3 Carlsbad Golf Coyhse Clubhouse C-Specs /Joint Sealers
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
PART 3
C. Type "C-1": One-part low modulus moisture cure silicone rubber sealant
conforming to FS TT-S-O01543A, Class A, FS TT-S-O0230C, Type II,
Class A and ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, .Use NT, M, G,A,
and 0, and capable of withstanding movement of 100% in extension and 50% in compression in service. Dow Coming 790 Silicone Glazing
Sealant, Tremco Spectrem 1 and Pecora 890.
d. Type "C-2": One-part medium modulus neutral cure silicone rubber
sealant conforming to FS TT-S-O01543A, Class A, FS TT-S-O023OC,
Type II, Class A and ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT,
MI G,A, and 0, and capable of withstanding movement of 50% in extension and 50% in compression in service. Tremco Spectrem 2, Pecora 895, Dow Corning 795, Dow Corning 791, and GE Silpruf.
Type "D": ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M,A,O. Sika Sikaflex lA, Pecora Dynatrol 1, Tremco DyMonic FC, Pecora 345
and Sonneborn NP-1.
Type "E": Silicone rubber sealant with mold inhibitor. General Electric
Sanitary 1700, Tremco Tremsil 200, Dow Corning 999, Pecora 898,
Sonneborn Omni-Plus. Type "F": Tremco Acoustical Sealant and Pecora BA-98.
3.
4. Color: Provide standard or custom colors as selected by Architect, In general,
e.
f.
9. Sealants at fire penetrations: As specified in Section 07840
colors shall match adjacent materials.
Primer: Nonstaining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
Joint Filler (Backer): ASTM D1565; round closed cell polyethylene, urethane or neoprene
foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent; "SofRod" as manufactured by A.E.T.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
Gloss Reducer: Silica sand No. 20, color to match adjacent surface. Gloss reducer shall
be provided at traffic sealant applications.
Other Materials: Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a
complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the
sealant manufacturer as compatible, subject to the review of the Architect.
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces, Verify, before proceeding with this Work, that required
inspections of existing conditions have been completed.
6. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be
concealed by this Work.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07900-4 Carlsbad Golf Coype Clubhouse C-Specs /Joint Sealers
SASC Swthwesl. LLC Phoenix. Las vews
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove
loose materials and other foreign matter which may impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
C. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
D. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform properly.
E. Use bond breaker where required.
F. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by masking when necessary.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1.
2.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
In general, seal openings and other locations which normally require sealant to
seal against infiltration from air, water and most insects, including; but not limited
to:
a. Construction and expansion joints.
b. Joints between dissimilar materials.
C. Joints around windows, door frames, louvers and other penetrations and
openings in the exterior wall.
d. Interior wall openings.
e. Other locations indicated on drawings. 3. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges.
B. Joints:
1. 2. Tool joints concave.
Free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
C. Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate
means. Gun shall have nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as detailed.
D. Neatly point or tool joint surfaces to provide slightly concave surfaces, free of wrinkles and
skips, uniformly smooth and with perfect adhesion along both sides of joint.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant as work progresses.
B. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07900-5 Carlsbad Golf Coyrse Clubhouse C-Specs M/Joint Sealers
3.05 SCHEDULE
A. Expansion and Control Joints:
1. Horizontal traffic: Type "A" with gloss reducer.
2. Masonry, concrete to concrete, stucco, steel and wood: Type "B".
3. Glass (except insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum, metal,
sandstone, EIFS, and plastics: Type "C-1".
4. Glass (including insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum, plastics, and
perimeter joints of frames of windows and doors in materials above: Type "(2-2".
B. Non-expand ing Joints:
1.
2.
3.
Glass (except insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum, sandstone,
EIFS, and plastics: Type "C-1 ".
Glass (including insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum and plastics:
Type "C-2".
Concrete to concrete, stucco, masonry, aluminum, steel, and wood: Type "D".
C. Mechanical (ductwork and air conditioning): Type "D".
D. Plumbing Fixtures (around toilet fixtures): Type "E".
E. Acoustical (acoustical applications where sealant is required): Type "F".
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 07900-6 Carlsbad Golf Coype Clubhouse C-Specs /Joint Sealers
SASC SOUTHWEST, LLC
Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 08100
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing elevations of each door and frame type,
typical and details of construction, location and installation requirements for hardware,
size and thickness of material.
B. Fire Rated Doors and Frames:
1. Installation Instructions: Door and frame manufacturer shall clearly identify the
hardware products, other materials and work requirements necessary to maintain
compliance with UL lO(c) (positive pressure testing as required by 1997 UBC for
fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Certification: Submit certification that fire rated doors (including frames and
hardware as a unit) will comply with UL lO(c) (positive pressure testing) as
required by 1997 UBC for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2.
C. Furnish recognized independent test lab certification that products comply with ANSI
A250.4,
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A.
B.
Deliver welded frames with spreaders and doors with wrappers.
Store doors and frames under protective cover in dry, enclosed spaces at the site. Place
doors and frames on non-staining blocking Raise bottoms of doors at least 4 inches high
and provide 114 inch air space between stacked doors to avoid metal to metal contact and
permit air circulation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Doors and frames shall be certified to comply with ANSI A250.4, Test Procedure and
Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing,
and ANSI A250.8, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .O 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish steel doors and frames from one of the following Manufacturers subject to
compliance with Specification requirements: 1. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
2. Curries Company www.curries.com
3. The Ceco Corporation w.cecodoor.com
4. The Kewanee Corp. www.kewaneecom.com
5. Republic Builders Products www.reDublicdoor.com
6. Fleming Steel Doors and Frames
B. Doors and frames shall be furnished by the same Manufacturer.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 08100-1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Steel Doors and Frames
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Doors: Furnish Level, Model and Physical Performance level in accordance with ANSI
1. Level: Level 2, 18 gauge. 2. Physical Performance: Level B.
3. Model: Model 2, Seamless.
Core: Honeycomb, Polystyrene, Polyurethane, or Vertical steel stiffener core. Core shall
be as allowed by UL 1 O(c) for fire rated doors. Provide polystyrene or polyurethane core at
exterior doors to occupied interior spaces.
C. Frames: ANSI A250.8/SDI 100, 16 gauge steel.
D. Glazing Beads: Minimum 20 gauge steel.
E. Steel: ASTM A1008 cold-rolled or ASTM A101 1 hot-rolled. Hot-dip galvanized meeting
ASTM A653, Grade G60 or Grade A60 galvannealed for exterior openings.
F. Paint: Non-lifting, rust-inhibitive grey primer meeting ANSI A224.1, compatible with field
finish specified in Section 09900, applied after bonderizing.
A250.8/SDI-100.
B.
2.03 FABRICATION- DOORS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Construct hollow metal doors, flush and vision lite types as scheduled on Drawings, in
accordance with ANSI A250.8/SDI-100 with core as specified above. Reinforce top and
bottom of doors horizontally by 16 gauge steel channels, full width, spot welded to each
face at least 3 inches on center. Bevel edge of lock stile.
Door Edge Joint and Treatment: Joints at the edges of doors shall have manufacturer's
standard edge construction with continuously welded seam, dressed smooth.
Where heavy duty hinges have been specified, provide 7 gauge or equivalent reinforcing
at hinge cut outs. Coordinate with hardware schedule.
Exterior Doors: Close top and bottom edges of all exterior doors flush as an integral part
of the door construction, or by placing end closure channel with web of channel flush with
top and bottom edge of door (not inverted), or by addition of end cap at top and bottom of
door, spot welded to each face at least 3 inches on center, filled and dressed smooth.
Reinforce openings in doors for lights and vents on all sides with 14 gauge steel channel.
Provide non-egress double doors with one-piece astragals of 14 gauge steel unless
otherwise indicated or scheduled. Provide solid drip cap at top of exterior out-swinging doors.
Accurately mortise doors for locks and hinges. Provide adequate box type reinforcement with steel plates welded to the interior reinforcing channels and drilled and tapped. Provide reinforcement for all other items of hardware.
Doors with glass lite openings shall have trim recessed from the face of the door, beveled
and attached with screws.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 08 1 00-2
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Steel Doors and Frames
SASC SOUTHWEST. LLC Phoenix. Las VeQaS
2.04
2.05
2.06
I. Louvers (if any): Provide sightproof louvers inserted into the panels. Form louver frames of minimum 20-gauge steel. Weld or tenon minimum 24 gauge blades to frame and
fasten the entire assembly to the door with moldings. The moldings, when used, shall be
an integral part of the louver.
J. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide fire rated doors investigated and tested as fire door doors,
complete with type of hardware to be used. Identify each fire door with recognized testing
laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire rating of steel doors. Doors required to meet
smoke and draft control assembly requirements shall have labels that identify that the
door has been tested and approved for smoke and draft control assemblies (S-label).
Construct doors to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80 and UL-lO(c).
FABRICATION - FRAMES
A. Construct to shapes and sizes shown, meeting various wall thicknesses in accordance
with ANSI/SDI-100.
B. Welded Frames: Weld, fill, grind and dress smooth face frame miters.
C. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap for standard weight, full mortise template hinges and
template strike.
D. Provide not less than three 18 gauge anchors per jamb, or as shown on Drawings,
spaced for maximum stiffness. Provide adjustable 18 gauge floor clips at each jamb,
welded to back face of jamb, punched for securing to floor with two spaced anchors.
E. Make cutouts for required hardware specified under Section 0871 0, from templates
furnished. Reinforce butt cutouts with minimum .8 gauge thick steel plate drilled and
tapped and welded in place. When heavy-duty hinges are specified, provide high
frequency reinforcing at frames for hinges. Coordinate with hardware vendor. Provide
strike stops of frames with holes for three rubber door silencers; on double door frames,
provide for two silencers per door at head.
F. For openings over 42 inches wide and at double openings, reinforce head members full
length with a matching profile of 12 gauge steel. Provide anchor at midpoint of door, if
practical.
G. Construct frames for UL labeled doors in accordance with UL requirements and label as
scheduled. Frames required to meet smoke and draft control assembly requirements
shall have labels that identify that the frame has been tested and approved for smoke and
draft control assemblies (S-label).
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Allowable Tolerances for Fabrication: As specified in ANSVSDI-117, Manufacturing
Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
PAINTING
A. Bonderize and prime doors and frames with one shop coat of rust inhibitive primer.
D.F. Architects 961 23/SASC 05-1 91 -3
March 1,2005 08 1 00-3
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Steel Doors and Frames
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install metal door frames plumb, level, rigid and in true alignment as recommended in SDI
105 and ANSllDHl A1 15.IG.
6. Install doors and fasten to maintain alignment with frames to achieve maximum
operational effectiveness and appearance.
1.
2.
Maintain clearances as specified in ANSI A250.8,2.1.8.
Shim as required per NFPA 80, ANSVA115.IG and SDI 122.
B. Install fire doors and frames to comply with NFPA 80 and in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Prepare and install doors in accordance with ANSI A1 15 and SDI 122.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect fire rated doors (including frames and
hardware as a unit) and verify compliance with UL 10C (positive pressure testing) as
required by 1997 UBC for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Fire rated doors (including
frames and hardware as a unit) which do not comply with UL 1OC (positive pressure
testing) as required by 1997 UBC Fire Tests of Door Assemblies shall be removed and
replaced at no additional cost to Owner.
CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials,
equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 08 100-4
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-Specsm/Steel Doors and Frames
SASC SaJhvest. LLC Phoenix Las VegaS
SECTION 08215
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing schedule of door sizes and types, door details
and elevations. Note discrepancies between the Drawings and door schedules, and the
requirements of regulatory and testing agencies.
B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data showing door construction.
C. Samples:
showing face, edge, core construction and factory finish for each type specified.
Before fabrication, submit sample of each type of door to be furnished,
D. Fire Rated Doors: 1. Installation Instructions: Door manufacturer shall clearly identify the frame,
hardware products, other materials and work requirements necessary to maintain
compliance with UL lO(c) (positive pressure testing as required by 1997 UBC for
fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
Certification: Submit certification that fire rated doors (including frames and
hardware as a unit) will comply with UL lO(c) (positive pressure testing) as
required by 1997 UBC for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordination: Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and obtaining necessary
information from Hardware and Metal Frame Manufacturers. Door Manufacturer shall be
responsible for coordinating necessary information received by Contractor from Hardware
and Metal Frame Manufacturers in order that doors shall be properly prepared to receive
hinges and hardware. Contractor shall provide door supplier with approved frame
schedule, hardware schedule, and hardware templates. Furnish to door supplier 60 days
prior to desired delivery date of doors.
0
B. Regulatory Requirements: Fire doors shall be listed and labeled by a nationally
recognized testing and certification agency, in accordance with applicable building codes.
Doors required to meet smoke and draft control assembly requirements shall have labels
that identify that the door has been tested and approved for smoke and draft control
assemblies (S-label). The listed doors shall meet or exceed ASTM E152, UL-lO(b), UL-
lO(c) (positive pressure testing) or NFPA 252 (September 1999). Provide fire labels from
Warnock-Hersey International (WHI), or Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
C. Certification: Provide each fire rated and sound rated door with a label permanently
attached at eye level, to the hinge stile, indicating the testing agency's approval for the
rating required.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prior to delivery, provide protection compatible with finish specified for door edges and
faces.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 08215-1
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsYWood Doors
SASC southwest. LLC
Phoenix - Las V-s
B. Delivery:
1. Deliver doors to the jobsite only when proper storage site is available.
2. Store doors in an area having controlled temperature and humidity as
recommended by NWWDA, Awl and the door manufacturer.
3. Store doors flat on factory pallets, or three full 2 x 4's, one centered and the other two 12 inches from each end. Do not stack doors on end, or on their vertical
edge.
Protect wood doors from construction activity, dirt, and exposure to sunlight. 4.
C. Handling:
1.
2.
3.
Always handle doors with clean hands or gloves.
Do not drag doors across one another.
Maintain factory packaging or other means of protection on doors, until date of
Substantial Completion.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Furnish the following warranty to Owner:
I. Warrant doors from the date of installation against defects in materials and
workmanship. Periods of warranty after date of installation:
a. Interior solid core and mineral core: Life of installation.
Replacement under warranty shall include removal of the defective door, hanging,
installation of hardware, and finishing.
2.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Doors shall be products of one of the following Manufacturers:
1. Algoma www.alaomahardwoods.com
2. Buell Door Company www.buelldoor.com
3. Eggers Industries www.eaaersindustiles.com
4. Marshfield Door Systems www.marshfielddoors.com
5.
6. Graham www.arahamdoors.com
Oshkosh Architectural Door Company www.oshkoshdoor.com
2.02 FLUSH DOORS
A. Cores:
1.
2.
Solid Core: Shall conform to ANSI A208.1 1 LD2, 32 Ibs. per cubic foot density.
Acoustical Core: Awl Section 1300, Type SR with two layers of high density
particleboard and center core of damping material. Provide acoustical cores at all
mechanical or elevator equipment rooms whether scheduled or not.
B. Edge Bandings:
1. Stiles (Dimensions given are minimum sizes allowed after factory trimming to
booksize or prefitting). a. Particleboard Core: 1-112 inch double banded laminated hardwood stile (no finger joints allowed) in outer and outer band to be at least 1/2 inch
wide same species lumber as face veneer with the exception of birch
doors which will have hard maple stiles.
Rails (Dimensions given are minimum sizes allowed after factory trimming to
booksize or prefitting).
a. Particleboard Core: 1-1/4 inch minimum mill option hardwood rail.
2.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 082 1 5-2 C-SpecsmNVood Doors
C. Face Veneers, Crossbands and Backers: When wood veneer or medium density overlay faces are specified, doors shall be 5 ply, made up of a face veneer, crossbanding and a
core unit, all securely bonded together utilizing type 1 (fully waterproof) adhesive and the
hot press assembly technique. All plies must be placed at right angles to adjacent plies.
Face veneers shall have a minimum thickness of 1/50 after factory sanding and the
individual pieces of veneer forming the face veneer must be spliced or edge glued
together.
1.
2.
Face veneer, cut and matching: As selected by Architect.
Cross banding shall be thoroughly dried hardwood extending full width and height
of door with grain at right angles to face and back veneer.
D. Glue: Type 1 for interior and exterior doors.
2.03 LABELED FLUSH DOORS
A. Mineral core flush veneered doors, 5-ply, shall be made up of face veneers,
crossbanding, and a core unit securely bonded together utilizing Type I (fully waterproof)
adhesive and the hot press assembly technique. Provide matching transom panels where
scheduled.
B. Face Veneers and Crossbanding: Same as specified for non-labeled doors.
C. Core Unit: Asbestos free, noncombustible mineral composite with a minimum of 28
pounds per cubic foot (450kg/m3 density when tested in accordance with ASTM C303,
with 10 percent maximum absorption by weight with core in equilibrium at 90 percent
relative humidity and 70 degrees F.. Provide flame resistant blocking as required by the
hardware schedule. The door listing shall not limit the size or location of such blocking.
1. Provide one lock block 5 inches x 12 inches when a bored unit or mortise lock is
to be used and two lock blocks when the door is equipped with an exit device.
2. For doors with closers include 6 inch top rail. Provide wide bottom rails for exit,
manual and automatic flush bolts and automatic door bottoms.
D. Rails: Top 15/16 inch, bottom 1-7/8 inches rail (one or two piece) of flame resistant
material - salt free. Securely glue rails to core.
E. Stiles: Manufacturer's standard for receiving a full mortise hinge. No salt treated
components shall be used. UL or WH approved for labeled doors meeting the following
performance criteria:
1. Split Resistance: Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 900 load
pounds when tested in accordance with "Test Method to Determine Split Resistance of Hinge Edges of Composite Type Fire Doors."
Direct Screw Withdrawal: Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 650 load pounds when tested for direct screw withdrawal in accordance with ASTM
D1037; using a No. 12 x 1-1/4 inch steel thread-to-the-head wood screw of the
cadmium plated or rust-resistant type. Drill 5/32 inch pilot hole, approximately 118
inch beyond the length of the screw.
Cycle/Slam: 200,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other visible signs of
failure when tested in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A151 .l , Section
2.5.
2.
3.
D. Manufacture labeled doors to the required size so as to provide proper clearances without
field trimming. Machining of labeled doors must be completed before label is applied to
assure the full thickness of the edge bands. Machine fire doors to meet NFPA 80
requirements. Provide channels for concealed exit devices specified in Section 08710
and in conformance with UL requirements.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3
March I, 2005 0821 5-3
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Wood Doors
SASC southwest, LLC Phoenix - LaS V-S
2.06 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Clear Finish:
applied using the following steps.
1. Finish sanding.
2. Burnish.
3.
4. Curing.
5. Sealer denibbing.
6.
7. Curing.
Awl Section 1500 System TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane,in 10 gloss,
Sealer application. catalyzed polyurethane coating.
Sealer to be catalyzed polyurethane coating or modified
Topcoat application. Topcoat to be catalyzed polyurethane coating or modified
catalyzed polyurethane coating.
B. Stain Finish: AWI Section 1500 System TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane applied using the
following steps.
1. Finish sanding.
2. Burnish.
3. Stain application. Stain to color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard and custom colors.
4. Curing.
5. Sealer application. Sealer to be thermosetting polyester amino modified
6. Curing.
7. Sealer denibbing. a.
9. Curing.
conversion coating.
Topcoat application. Topcoat to be catalyzed polyurethane coating or modified
catalyzed polyurethane coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine door frames to assure that jambs are true and plumb. Correct frames which are
not true and plumb before doors are hung.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Doors shall be hung true and plumb with standard bevel and with uniform 3/32 inch
clearance at jambs and head, and 1/2 inch bottom clearance, unless otherwise required.
Mortise, drill or otherwise prepare doors for finish hardware specified in Section 08700,
Finish Hardware.
B. Doors that are cut or planed for fitting shall be immediately resealed with a transparent
wood sealer. Doors shall operate freely without sticking or binding, without hinge-bound
conditions and with hardware installed, properly adjusted and functioning.
C. Repair of Factory Finish:
Clear and Stain: Minor handling marks or scratches (not through the seal coat)
shall be repaired by sanding the damaged area, then topcoating again with
polyurethane with a matching gloss.
Opaque: If scratches or handling marks go into the base color coats, repairs
shall be made under the direction of the door manufacturer. Minor scratches on
the surface shall be sanded, then retopcoated with varnish with a matching gloss.
1.
2.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 082 1 5-4 C-SpecsmNVood Doors
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect fire rated doors (including frames and
hardware as a unit) and verify compliance with UL 1OC (positive pressure testing) as
required by 1997 UBC for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Fire rated doors (including
frames and hardware as a unit) which do not comply with UL 1OC (positive pressure
testing) as required by 1997 UBC for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies shall be removed and
replaced at no additional cost to Owner.
3.04 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials,
equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean
condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191 -3
March 1,2005 082 1 5-5
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsVWood Doors
SECTION 08310
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMllTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing sizes, construction and installation details.
1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact.
B. Storage and Protection: Deliver and store items in dry, protected areas. Adequately
protect against damage while stored at the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the
Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements:
1. Milcor Inc.
2. Karp Associates
3. J.L. Industries
4. Bilco
2.02 ACCESS DOORS
A. Doors: Sizes as shown on the Drawings. Units shall be prime painted steel at painted
wall construction and stainless steel in tile and other locations as indicated, in types as
required by wall construction, as follows (based on Milcor):
1. "DW ," drywall walls/ceilings.
B. Door and Frame: 16 gage steel. Provide key operated cylinder lock. 16 gage steel shall
be used for door and frame. Type K door shall have concealed spring hinges to allow
door to open a minimum of 175 degrees. Size as required or as indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install access doors in accordance with Manufacturer's directions at locations shown on
Drawings.
B. Install plumb and level, true to line.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 D
March 1,2005 0831 0-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Access Doors and Frames
3.02 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials,
equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean
condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 96123lSASC 05-191-3 Carl$bad Golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 0831 0-2 C-Specs /Access Doors and Frames
SASC southwest. LLC. phoenix - Las vegas
SECTION 08330
COILING DOORS AND GRILLES
PART I GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
SUBMllTALS
A.
Design Requirements: Design exterior doors to meet windload of 20 psf.
Shop Drawings:
installation details.
Samples: Submit 2 samples showing specified finish.
Submit Drawings indicating type of doors, operation, finishes and
B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened
packaging with labels intact.
Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions.
B.
C.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the
Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements:
1. Cookson Co. 2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
3. Overhead Door Corp.
COILING DOORS
A. Insulated Coiling Door: 1. Model FCWl as manufactured by Cookson, complete with guides, hoods,
operating mechanism and special features as specified.
2. The load of barrel and curtain shall be supported by 2 grease-sealed ball
bearings.
3. Curtain:
a. Interlocking No. 44 slats with 22 gage exterior slat and 24 gage interior
slat fabricated from hot dipped galvanized strip steel. b. Galvanized coating to be ASTM A653 designation. Material to be given a
grey acrylic prime coat before fabricating.
C. Rigid polyurethane insulation, 13/16 inch thick with flame spread not
greater than 25 and a smoke generation of 50 or less with R = 6 or better. d. Alternate slats to be fitted with endlocks.
e. Reinforce bottom slat with two steel angles, not less than 118 inch thick.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 08330-1 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse C-SpecsTM/Coiling Doors and Grilles
4. Hood:
a. Fabricated from galvanized steel.
b. Baffle: Provide canvas hood baffle to minimize seepage of air around
hood.
Curtain and hood: Baked grey acrylic primer.
All other exposed surfaces: One coat of rust inhibiting paint at factory.
5. Finish:
a.
b.
Operation: Chain operated by means of reduction gears and galvanized hand
chain and chain lock.
Locking: Cylinder locking device operable both sides as specified in Section
08710.
6.
7.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental
conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as
acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be
concealed by this Work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Doors are to be installed by the manufacturer or authorized representative in strict
accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions.
B.
3.03 CLEANING
Upon completion, adjust doors and grilles for proper operation.
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess
materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3 March 1,2005 Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse 08330-2 C-SpecsTM/Coiling Doors and Grilles
sac southwast. uc Phoenix. Las Vegas
SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
I .03
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Aluminum entrance doors and window wall frames.
B. Related Sections:
1.
2. Section 08800 - Glazing.
Section 0871 0 - Door Hardware.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Design CriteriaKoncept: Window wall framing system that provides for flush
glazing on all sides without projecting stops, with glass set in center of frame.
B. Performance Requirements: Window wall.
1.
2.
3.
Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 CFM/min/sq. ft. of wall area at 6.24
PSF as measured in accordance with ASTM E283.
Water leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a
test pressure difference of 8 PSF.
Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies capable of withstanding
design wind load of 80 mph, exposure C and requirements of the authorities having
jurisdiction.
Limit deflection to U175 with a maximum of 314 inch, whichever is smaller. 4.
C. Performance - Aluminum Doors (Swinging):
1. Resistance to corner racking shall be tested by the Dual Moment Load test as
follows:
a. Test section shall consist of standard top door corner assembly. Side rail
section shall be 24 inches long and top rail section 12 inches long.
b. Anchor "top rail" positively to test bench so that corner protrudes 3 inches
beyond bench edge.
C. Anchor a lever arm positively to side rail at a point 19 inches from inside
edge of top rail. Attach weight support pad at a point 19 inches from inner edge of side rail.
Test section shall withstand a load of 270 pounds on the lever arm before reaching the point of failure, which shall be considered a rotation on the
lever arm in excess of 45 degrees.
d.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, shop drawings and samples in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Product Data: Submit 2 copies of Manufacturer's Specifications, recommendations and standard details for aluminum doors, frames and components of the Work.
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 08410-1 Carlsbad golf Course Clubhouse C-Specs /Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Include wall elevations at 1/2 inch scale, and full-size detailed sections of
every typical composite member.
b. Show anchors, joint system, expansion provisions, and other
components not included in Manufacturer's standard date.
C. Include glazing details.
3. Samples:
a. Submit 3 samples of each required aluminum finish on 12 inch long
extrusions or 6 inch square sheets of the alloys to be used for the Work.
b. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include 2
or more units in each Sample, to show the range of such variations.
C. Samples will be reviewed by Architect for color and texture only.
d. Architect reserves the right to require samples of typical fabricated
sections, showing joints, exposed fastenings (if any), quality of
workmanship, hardware and accessory items, before fabrication of the
Work proceeds.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, the requirements for aluminum doors and
frames, and the terminology used in this Section, are those of NAAMM, AAMA and AA
and in particular, those of the "Entrance Manual" by NAAMM.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
ANSI A117.1 "Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by
Physically Handicapped People."
Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA).
Title 24 CCR, Building Standards, including ADA regulations, architectural barrier laws and regulations regarding handicapped persons.
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Whenever possible, check the actual openings in the construction Work by
accurate field measurement before fabrication, and show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings.
2. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed and avoid
delays of the Work.
3. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurement, and coordinate installation tolerances to ensure proper fit of units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products of one of the following manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with specifications requirements:
1. Kawneer Co.
2. Southwest Aluminum Systems, Inc.
3. United States Aluminum Corp. 4. Vistawall Architectural Products.
5. EFCO
B. Specifications are based on System S-402 frames and D300 entrance doors as
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 084 1 0-2 C-Specs /Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
manufactured by EFCO.
SASC souulwesl. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Framing members, transition members, mullions, adapters, and mountings: Extruded
6063 T5 or T6 aluminum alloy (ASTM 8221 - Alloy G.S. 1 OaT5 or T6).
B. Screws, miscellaneous fastening devices, and internal components: Aluminum, stainless
steel, or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A-164. Perimeter anchors shall be
aluminum or steel, providing the steel is properly isolated from the aluminum.
C. Glazing gaskets: EPDM elastomeric extrusions.
D. Steel Sections: ANSVASTM A36; shaped to suit mullion sections.
E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.
F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPS 20, zinc rich type.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Sizes and Profiles: The required sizes for doors and frame units, and profile
requirements, are shown.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Complete the cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to
cleaning, finishing, treatment, and application of coatings.
2. Weld by methods recommended by the Manufacturer and AWS to avoid
discoloration at welds.
3. Grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish.
4. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to a radius of approximately 1/64 inch.
5. Conceal fasteners, wherever possible, except as otherwise shown.
6. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.
7. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of
contacting members.
8. Reinforce the Work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support
to the structure.
9. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed separators which
will prevent corrosion.
10. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with non-metallic separators to prevent
"freeze-up" of joints.
B. Frames:
1. Fabricate tubular assemblies as shown, with either welded or mechanical joints in
accordance with Manufacturer's standards, with concealed fasteners wherever possible. Provide members of the size, shape, and profile shown.
Reinforce internally with steel channel shapes as shown, or as necessary to
support the required loads. For single-acting pivoted doors as shown, without continuous door stops, provide
Manufacturer's standard clip-type door stops for head-mounting, equipped with
Neoprene bumpers. 5. Weatherstripping: Provide compression weatherstripping on door-contact face of
door stops on exterior door frames and/or other frames where indicated.
2.
3.
4.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 084 1 0-3 C-Specs /Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
SASC swulwest. LLC Phoenix. Las Vegas
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Glass framing members shall provide for flush glazing with through sight lines,
without projecting stops for 1 inch (25mm) thick insulated glass units.
Provide glazing system for frames to receive lights. Design system for replacement of glass, but for non-removal of glass from exterior.
System shall provide resilient settings for glass by use of EPDM elastomeric
extrusions.
Fabricate frame assemblies for exterior walls with flashing and weeps to drain
penetrating moisture to exterior.
Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly
from the building structure.
Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.
Include flashings, breakmetal covers, and miscellaneous trim in conjunction with
components as detailed, finished to match.
C. Swinging Doors
1.
2.
Materials: Sections shall be extruded for 6063-T5 or T6 aluminum alloy (ASTM
B221 - Alloy G.S. 1OA T5 or T6). Fasteners, where exposed, shall be aluminum, stainless steel or plated steel in
accordance with ASTM A-164. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel,
providing the steel is properly isolated from the aluminum.
Glazing gaskets shall be EPDM elastomeric extrusions.
Major portions of the door stiles shall be 0.125 inch in thickness and glazing
molding shall be 0.050 inch thick.
a. Vertical Stiles: 3-112 inches.
b. Top Rail: 3-1/2 inches.
C. Bottom Rail: 10 inches, or as shown on Drawings.
d. Corner construction: Both sigma deep penetration and fillet weld and
mechanical clip fastening.
e. Glazing stops: Snap-in type with EPDM glazing gaskets. Door shall be weatherstripped on 3 sides with metal-backed pile cloth installed in
door and/or frame. A weathered adjustable astragal with stainless steel backing
shall be provided as pivoted stiles and at meeting stiles of pairs of doors. Bottom
shall be weathered with an EPDM blade gasket sweep strip applied with
concealed fasteners.
3.
4.
5. Door Construction:
6.
7. Hardware: Provide the following:
HARDWARESETS 1 AND 2
ALL HARDWARE BY SECTION 08710
HARDWARE SET 3
2
6
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
SETS
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
BTM. PIVOTS 75323 X 7471K 613
INT. PIVOTS 75220 613
EXIT DEVICES 5103 LESS PULL 613
EXIT DEVICE 5101 LESS PULL 613
PULLS 2954 613
CYLINDER (BY SECTION 08410)
CONCEALED OVERH’D CLOSERS RTS26 BFE 613
THRESHOLD 170B
SWEEPS 315DN WEATHERSTRIP WITH FRAME AND DOORS
DORMA
DORMA
DORMA
DORMA
BBW
DORMA
PEMKO
PEMKO
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad golf Course Clubhouse
March 1,2005 084 1 0-4 C-Specs /Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
HARDWARE SET 4 (BOTH DOORS 102A AND 1028)
1 EA COMPLETE HEAVY DUTY BI-FOLD TRACK AND HARDWARE 4 EA FLUSH PULLS (INSIDE)
2 EA CYLINDER OPERATED BOTTOM FLUSH BOLTS
2 EA CYLINDERS (BY SECTION 08710)
16 EA HINGES
HARDWARE SET 5
ALL BY SECTION 08710,
HARDWARE SET 6
SET
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
BTM. PIVOTS 75323 X 7471 K 613 DORMA
INT. PIVOTS 75220 613 DORMA
EXIT DEVICES 5303 LESS PULL 61 3 DORMA
PULLS 2954 613 BBW
CYLINDER (BY SECTION 08410)
CONCEALED OVERH'D CLOSERS RTS26 BFE 61 3 DORMA
THRESHOLD 1708 PEMKO
SWEEPS 315DN PEMKO
WEATHERSTRIP WITH FRAME AND DOORS
D. Hardware Installation at Factory:
1. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames as required to receive hardware except do not
drill and tap for surface-mounted items until the time of installation at the Project
Site. Comply with Hardware Manufacturer's instructions and template
requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. Install hardware, except surface-mounted hardware, at fabrication plant. Remove
only as required for final finishing operations, and for delivery and installation of
the Work at the Project Site.
2.
E. Aluminum Finishes:
1. After fabrication of doors and frames prepare the aluminum surfaces for finishing in accordance with the aluminum producer's recommendations and standards of
the finisher or processor.
2. Process components of each assembly simultaneously to attain complete
uniformity of color.
3. Finish: 70% Fluropolymer (PVDF), Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 paint coating conforming with the requirements of AAMA 605.2.
4. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Manufacturer's Specifications and recommendations for the installation of
aluminum doors and frames.
1. Furnish necessary material, labor, and equipment for the complete installation of the following: glass framing, vertical and horizontal mullions, transitional
members connecting these components, adapters and mountings for trim
moldings and facing materials. Set units plumb, level and true in line, without warp or rack of frames, doors or
panels.
D.F. Architects 96123/SASC 05-191-3 Carlsbad golf Course Clubhouse March 1,2005 084 1 0-5 C-Specs /Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
2. 0
SASC southwesl. LLC
Phoenix. Las Vegas
3. Anchor securely in place.
4. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
5. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound as shown, or with
joint fillers or gaskets as shown to provide weathertight construction.
B. See Section 07900 for compounds, fillers and gaskets to be installed integrally with door
and frames.
C. See Section 08800 for installation of glass shown to be glazed into frames and doors.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of frames, exercising care to avoid
damage of the protective coating.
B. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.
END OF SECTION
D.F. Architects 961231SASC 05-191-3
March 1,2005 084 I 0-6
Carlsbad Golf Course Clubhouse
C-SpecsTM/Aluminum Entrances
and Storefronts